James E.
What is the function of the fuser section?
The fuser section melts the toner onto the paper to make the image permanent.
UTAX CD 1230, CD 1240, CD 1250 copiers Service Manual
The CD 1230, CD 1240, and CD 1250 are desktop copiers that offer a variety of features, such as automatic document feeding, duplex copying, and network connectivity. These copiers are ideal for small to medium-sized businesses that need a reliable and efficient way to copy documents.
PDF
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
Service Manual Copy CD 1230 CD 1240 CD 1250 Version 1.0 Date: 04-07-2006 2GNSM060 Service Manual Copy DC 2230 DC 2240 DC 2250 Version 1.0 Date: 04-07-2006 2GNSM060 CAUTION DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. ATTENTION IL Y A DANGER D’EXPLOSION S’IL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE. REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MÊME TYPE OU D’UN TYPE RECOMMANDÉ PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RÉBUT LES BATTERIES USAGÉES CONFORMÉMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT. Revision history Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks This page is intentionally left blank. Safety precautions This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities. Safety warnings and precautions Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below: DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. Symbols The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol. General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock. Warning of high temperature. indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol. General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited. indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol. General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet. Always ground the copier. 1.Installation Precautions WARNING • Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that it is adequate for the rated current. ............................................................................................. • Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities. ............................................................................................................................ CAUTION: • Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. ....... • Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ................ • Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This may cause fire. ......................................................................................................................... • Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ........... • Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ............................................... • Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ........................................................... • Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical attention. ...................................................................................................................................... • Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s instruction handbook. ..................................................................................................................... 2.Precautions for Maintenance WARNING • Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ............... • Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related brochures. ....................................................................................................................................... • Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and protective circuits. ..................................................................................................................... • Always use parts having the correct specifications. .......................................................................... • Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident. .......................................................................................................................................... • When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ................................................................ • Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ............. • Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .............................................................. • Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may damage eyesight. ........................................................................................................................... • Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly. ............................................................................................................ CAUTION • Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. .......................................................... • Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ........ • Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. .................................. • Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures. ........................................................................................................ • Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. .................... • Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing them; always hold the plug itself. ..................................................................................................... • Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item. ............................................................................................. • Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ........ • Remove toner completely from electronic components. ................................................................... • Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. .................................... • After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector, trapped wire and missing screws. ................................................................................................... • Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ...................................... • Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ..................................... · Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely. · Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents. · Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power switch on. · Always wash hands afterwards. • Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire in a furnace, etc. ....................................................................................................................... • Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immediately. ............................................................................................................................................ 3.Miscellaneous WARNING • Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ..................................................................................... 2GN/2GP/2GR CONTENTS 1-1 Specifications 1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-1 1-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-4 (1) Machine.............................................................................................................................................1-1-4 (2) Operation panel.................................................................................................................................1-1-5 1-1-3 Machine cross section ............................................................................................................................1-1-6 1-2 Installation 1-2-1 Installation environment .........................................................................................................................1-2-1 1-2-2 Unpacking and installation ......................................................................................................................1-2-2 (1) Installation procedure ........................................................................................................................1-2-2 (2) Setting initial copy modes................................................................................................................1-2-10 1-2-3 Installing the key counter (option) .........................................................................................................1-2-11 1-3 Maintenance Mode 1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1 (1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-1 (2) Maintenance modes item list.............................................................................................................1-3-2 (3) Contents of the maintenance mode items.........................................................................................1-3-6 1-4 Troubleshooting 1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection .........................................................................................................................1-4-1 (1) Paper misfeed indication ...................................................................................................................1-4-1 (2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ..................................................................................................1-4-2 (3) Paper misfeeds ...............................................................................................................................1-4-11 1-4-2 Self-diagnosis .......................................................................................................................................1-4-22 (1) Self-diagnostic function ...................................................................................................................1-4-22 (2) Self diagnostic codes ......................................................................................................................1-4-23 1-4-3 Image formation problems ....................................................................................................................1-4-44 (1) No image appears (entirely white)...................................................................................................1-4-45 (2) No image appears (entirely black)...................................................................................................1-4-45 (3) Image is too light. ............................................................................................................................1-4-46 (4) Background is visible.......................................................................................................................1-4-46 (5) A white line appears longitudinally. .................................................................................................1-4-46 (6) A black line appears longitudinally. .................................................................................................1-4-47 (7) A black line appears laterally...........................................................................................................1-4-47 (8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other.......................................................................1-4-47 (9) Black dots appear on the image......................................................................................................1-4-47 (10) Image is blurred...............................................................................................................................1-4-48 (11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ...................................1-4-48 (12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. ...................................1-4-48 (13) Paper creases. ................................................................................................................................1-4-48 (14) Offset occurs. ..................................................................................................................................1-4-49 (15) Image is partly missing....................................................................................................................1-4-49 (16) Fusing is poor..................................................................................................................................1-4-49 (17) Image is out of focus. ......................................................................................................................1-4-49 (18) Image center does not align with the original center. ......................................................................1-4-50 (19) Image is not square.........................................................................................................................1-4-50 1-4-4 Electric problems ..................................................................................................................................1-4-51 1-4-5 Mechanical problems ............................................................................................................................1-4-55 1-5 Assembly and Disassembly 1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly............................................................................................1-5-1 (1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-1 (2) Drum..................................................................................................................................................1-5-1 (3) Toner .................................................................................................................................................1-5-1 1-5-2 Paper feed section ..................................................................................................................................1-5-2 (1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys ......................................1-5-2 (2) Detaching and refitting the MP separation, MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys ...................1-5-4 (3) Detaching and refitting the left and right registration cleaner ............................................................1-5-9 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-5-3 Optical section ......................................................................................................................................1-5-11 (1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp......................................................................................1-5-11 (2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires .......................................................................................1-5-13 (3) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference).....................................................................................1-5-18 (4) Adjusting the position of the ISU (reference)...................................................................................1-5-20 (5) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit .................................................................................1-5-21 (6) Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit (reference) ................................................................1-5-23 1-5-4 Drum section.........................................................................................................................................1-5-24 (1) Detaching and refitting the drum unit ..............................................................................................1-5-24 (2) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit..................................................................................1-5-25 1-5-5 Developing section................................................................................................................................1-5-26 (1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit .....................................................................................1-5-26 1-5-6 Transfer section ....................................................................................................................................1-5-27 (1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller unit .................................................................................1-5-27 1-5-7 Fuser section ........................................................................................................................................1-5-28 (1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit...............................................................................................1-5-28 (2) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws..................................................................1-5-29 (3) Detaching and refitting the press roller............................................................................................1-5-30 (4) Detaching and refitting the fuser heater ..........................................................................................1-5-31 (5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller .............................................................................................1-5-32 (6) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit thermistor 1 and 2.................................................................1-5-33 (7) Adjusting front position of the fuser unit (adjusting lateral squareness) ..........................................1-5-34 1-5-8 Others ...................................................................................................................................................1-5-35 (1) Detaching and refitting the ozone filter 1 and 2...............................................................................1-5-35 (2) Detaching and refitting the dust filter 1 and 2..................................................................................1-5-36 1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement 1-6-1 1-6-2 1-6-3 1-6-4 Upgrading the firmware...........................................................................................................................1-6-1 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR) ..................................................................................................1-6-2 Remarks on main PWB replacement......................................................................................................1-6-2 Remarks on scanner PWB replacement.................................................................................................1-6-2 2-1 Mechanical construction 2-1-1 Paper feed section ..................................................................................................................................2-1-1 2-1-2 Main charging section .............................................................................................................................2-1-4 2-1-3 Optical section ........................................................................................................................................2-1-5 (1) Original scanning...............................................................................................................................2-1-6 (2) Image printing....................................................................................................................................2-1-7 2-1-4 Developing section................................................................................................................................2-1-10 (1) Single component developing system.............................................................................................2-1-12 2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections..........................................................................................................2-1-13 2-1-6 Cleaning and charge erasing sections..................................................................................................2-1-14 2-1-7 Fuser section ........................................................................................................................................2-1-15 2-1-8 Eject and switchback sections ..............................................................................................................2-1-16 2-1-9 Duplex section ......................................................................................................................................2-1-17 (1) Paper conveying operation in duplex copying.................................................................................2-1-18 2-2 Electrical Parts Layout 2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1 (1) PWBs ................................................................................................................................................2-2-1 (2) Switches and sensors .......................................................................................................................2-2-2 (3) Motors ...............................................................................................................................................2-2-4 (4) Other electrical components..............................................................................................................2-2-5 2-3 Operation of the PWBs 2-3-1 Power source PWB.................................................................................................................................2-3-1 2-3-2 Engine PWB............................................................................................................................................2-3-5 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-4 Appendixes Maintenance parts list .............................................................................................................................2-4-1 Periodic maintenance procedures ..........................................................................................................2-4-3 Chart of image adjustment procedures...................................................................................................2-4-7 General wiring diagram...........................................................................................................................2-4-9 INSTALLATION GUID THE DOCUMENT PROCESSOR BUILT-IN FINISHER JOB SEPARATOR FAX System (M) Data Security Kit (C) 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-1 Specifications 1-1-1 Specifications Type ................................................ Desktop Copying system .............................. Indirect electrostatic system Originals.......................................... Sheets, books and three-dimensional objects Maximum size: A3/Ledger Original feed system ....................... Fixed Copy paper ..................................... Weight Cassette: 60 - 105 g/m2 MP tray: 45 - 200 g/m2 Types Cassette: Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Rough, Letterhead, Color (Colour), Prepunched, High quality and Custom1 - 8 MP tray: Plain, Transparency, Preprinted, Labels, Bond, Recycled, Vellum, Rough, Letterhead, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Envelope, Cardstock, Thick paper, High quality and Custom1 - 8 Copying sizes ................................. Cassette: A3/Ledger - A5R/StatementR MP tray: A3/Ledger - A6R/StatementR Magnification ratios......................... Manual mode: 25 - 400%, 1% increments Auto copy mode: fixed ratios Metric 1:1 ± 1.0%, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.41/1:1.22/1:1.15/1:0.86/1:0.81/1:0.70/1:0.50/1:0.25 Inch 1:1 ± 1.0%, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.29/1:1.21/1:0.78/1:0.64/1:0.50/1:0.25 Copy speed..................................... At 100% magnification in copy mode: 30 ppm model A3/Ledger: 20 sheets/min. B4/Legal: 20 sheets/min. A4/Letter: 30 sheets/min. A4R/Letter R: 22 sheets/min. B5: 30 sheets/min. B5R: 20 sheets/min. A5R/Statement: 14 sheets/min. A6R: 16 sheets/min. 40 ppm model A3/Ledger: 23 sheets/min. B4/Legal: 23 sheets/min. A4/Letter: 40 sheets/min. A4R/Letter R: 27 sheets/min. B5: 40 sheets/min. B5R: 22 sheets/min. A5R/Statement: 16 sheets/min. A6R: 18 sheets/min. 50 ppm model A3/Ledger: 26 sheets/min. B4/Legal: 26 sheets/min. A4/Letter: 50 sheets/min. A4R/Letter R: 31 sheets/min. B5: 50 sheets/min. B5R: 24 sheets/min. A5R/Statement: 18 sheets/min. A6R: 18 sheets/min. First copy time ................................ 3.9 s or less (30 ppm model) 3.5 s or less (40/50 ppm model) Warm-up time ................................. 30 s (room temperature 22°C/71.6°F, 60% RH) Recovery from sleep mode: 15 s (room temperature 22°C/71.6°F, 60% RH) Paper feed system.......................... Automatic feed Capacity: Cassette: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Manual feed Capacity: MP tray: 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Paper eject system ......................... Output tray: 250 sheets (80 g/m2) 1-1-1 2GN/2GP/2GR Multiple copying .............................. 1 - 999 sheets Photoconductor............................... a-Si (drum diameter 40 mm) Charging system............................. Single positive corona charging Recording system ........................... Semiconductor laser Developing system ......................... Dry, reverse developing (single component system) Developer: 1-component, magnetism toner Toner replenishing: automatic from a toner container Transfer system .............................. Transfer roller Separation system .......................... Separation electrode Fusing system................................. Heat roller Heat source: halogen heaters Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermostats Charge erasing system................... Exposure by cleaning lamp Cleaning system ............................. Cleaning blade and roller Scanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor Memory........................................... Standard 512 MB/Maximum 1024 MB Hard disk......................................... 40 GB Resolution....................................... 600 x 600 dpi Light source .................................... Inert gas lamp Dimensions ..................................... 599 (W) x 646 (D) x 745 (H) mm 23 9/16" (W) x 25 7/16" (D) x 29 5/16" (H) Weight............................................. Approx. 85 kg/187 lbs Floor requirements.......................... 1497 (W) x 646 (D) mm 58 15/16" (W) x 25 7/16" (D) Functions ........................................ Original size, Paper selection, Mixed sized originals, Original orientation, Collate/Offset mode, Staple/Punch mode, Output destination, Zoom mode, Combine mode, Margin/Centering mode, Border erase, Booklet from sheets, Duplex, Cover mode, Form overlay, Page numbering, Memo mode, Density adjustment, Selection of image quality, EcoPrint mode, Batch scanning, Auto image rotation, Inverted copying, Mirror image, Job finish notice, File name, Priority override, Multi-page forms, Repeat copy, Programmed copying, Registering shortcuts Power source.................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 12 A or less 220 D 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 6.5 A or less Options ........................................... Document processor, paper feeder, 3000-sheet paper feeder, 3000-sheet document finisher, document finisher, built-in finisher, job separator, key counter, fax kit, security kit, data backup kit and PDF upgrade kit Printer functions Printing speed................................. Same as copying speed First print time ................................. Same as first copy time Resolution....................................... Fast 1200 mode/600 dpi/300 dpi Applicable OS ................................. Microsoft Windows 95 (OSR2) Microsoft Windows 98 (second edition) Microsoft Windows NT4.0 (service pack 5 or later) Microsoft Windows 2000 (service pack 2 or later) Microsoft Windows Me Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Apple Macintosh OS 9.x Apple Macintosh OS X 10.x Interface.......................................... Parallel: Bi-directional parallel (IEEE 1284 Nibble/ECP mode) High-speed USB (USB2.0) USB host interface Optional interface: 2 slots (KUIO-LV, RS-232C) Network interface: 10Base-T/100Base-TX PDL................................................. PRESCRIBE Emulation........................................ PCL6 (5e, XL), KPDL3, KC-GL, Line Printer, IBM Proprinter X24E, EPSON LQ-850, DIABLO 630 Font................................................. Outline font: 80 fonts (PCL6)/136 fonts (KPDL3) Bitmap font: 1 font/79 fonts are processed by outline font. 1-1-2 2GN/2GP/2GR Graphics ......................................... PRESCRIBE+JPEG image command supported One-dimensional barcode: 45 types Two-dimensional barcode: PDF417 1 type Connectivity .................................... Plug & Play SNMP (printer MIB supported) Scanner functions Ethernet .......................................... 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Network Protocol ............................ TCP/IP Transmission system ...................... PC transmission: SMB Scan to SMB, FTP Scan to FTP E-mail transmission: SMTP Scan to E-mail TWAIN scan: TWAIN source Resolution....................................... 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi File Format...................................... Monochrome: TIFF (MMR), PDF (MMR) Gray: JPEG, PDF (JPEG) Color: JPEG, PDF (high compression) Scanning Speed.............................. 1-sided: monochrome 50 sheets/min Color 25 sheets/min 2-sided: monochrome 25 sheets/min Color 12.5 sheets/min NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice. 1-1-3 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-1-2 Parts names (1) Machine 13 14 1 15 3 9 2 34 35 36 10 4 5 6 33 7 25 26 27 11 12 8 29 16 28 30 19 20 31 32 21 22 17 18 23 24 Figure 1-1-1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 1-1-4 Original cover (Option) Original size indicator plates Clip holder Reception indicator Error indicator Left cover 1 Left cover 1 Lever Left cover 2 Platen Operation panel Cassette 1 Cassette 2 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. Toner container Toner container stopper Waste toner box Front cover Paper width adjusting tab Length adjustment plate Top tray Main power switch Paper width guides Multi purpose tray Memory card cover holder Handles 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. USB memory slot (A2) USB memory slot (A3) Memory card slot Network interface connector USB interface connector Parallel interface connector Option interface slot (OPT1) Option interface slot (OPT2) USB memory slot (A1) Green knob (A1) Paper feed unit (A2) Paper feed unit cover (A2) 2GN/2GP/2GR (2) Operation panel 1 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 3 4 8 7 6 19 20 21 22 23 Figure 1-1-2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. System menu key/indicator Status/Job cancel key/indicator Program key/indicator Application key Counter key/indicator Copy key/indicator Send key/indicator Document box key/indicator Accessibility key/indicator Print indicator Transmission indicator Reception indicator 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. Memory indicator Error indicator Help key/indicator Log-out key/indicator Power key Main power indicator Numeric keys Clear key Start key/indicator Stop key Reset key 1-1-5 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-1-3 Machine cross section Light path Paper path Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1-1-6 Paper feed section Main charging section Optical section Developing section Transfer and separation section Cleaning and charge erasing section Fuser section Eject and switchback section Duplex section 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-2 Installation 1-2-1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Installation environment Temperature: 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F Humidity: 15 to 80%RH Power supply: 120 V AC, 12 A or less 220 to 240 V AC, 6.5 A or less Power source frequency: 50 Hz ± 0.3%/60 Hz ± 0.3% Installation location Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams. Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto the machine. Avoid dust and vibration. Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine. Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°). Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents. Select a room with good ventilation. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine. Machine front: 1000 mm/39 3/8" Machine rear: 100 mm/3 15/16" Machine right: 300 mm/11 13/16" Machine left: 300 mm/11 13/16" 100 mm/3 15/16" 300 mm/11 13/16" 300 mm/11 13/16" 1000 mm/39 3/8" Figure 1-2-1 Installation dimensions 1-2-1 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-2-2 Unpacking and installation (1) Installation procedure Start Unpack. Connect the power cord. Remove the tapes, spacers and pad. Install the fixing bracket. Install the optional paper feeder. Carry out initial developer setting (maintenance item U130). Release the lever holding mirror 1 and 2 frames. Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000). Release of cassette lift plate. Exit maintenance mode. Load paper. Print out the user setting list. Install the toner container. Make test copies. Install the waste toner box. Attaching the language label (230 V specifications only). Install the optional original cover or the DP. Completion of the machine installation. Install other optional devices. 1-2-2 2GN/2GP/2GR Moving the machine When moving the machine, pull out the four carrying handles on the right and left sides and hold them. Carrying handle Carrying handle Carrying handle Carrying handle Figure 1-2-2 1-2-3 2GN/2GP/2GR Unpacking. Figure 1-2-3 Unpacking 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Machine Outer case Inner frame Skid Bottom front left pad Bottom front right pad Bottom rear left pad Bottom rear right pad Machine cover Upper pad Caution: Place the machine on a level surface. 1-2-4 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Spacer Document tray Hinge joints Bar code labels Power cord Plastic bag Leaflet Plastic bag M3 x 8 screws Operation guide 2GN/2GP/2GR Remove the tapes, spacers and pad. 1. Remove two tapes. 2. Pull the lever and operation section is lowered. 3. Remove two spacers. Remove waste textile on the operation panel, if any. 4. Remove the pad. 5. Remove the tape holding the power cord. Spacers Pad Tape Tape Figure 1-2-4 Install the optional paper feeder. 1. Install the optional paper feeder as necessary 2. Verify levelness at the four corners of the platen using a level gauge, and adjust the level bolts at the bottom of the machine to optimize levelness. Release the lever holding mirror 1 and 2 frames. 1. Turn the lever of the machine rear side with the tool to release the lever holding the mirror 1 and 2 frames. Lever Figure 1-2-5 1-2-5 2GN/2GP/2GR Release of cassette lift plate. 1. Pull cassette 1 and 2 out. Remove the lift plate stopper from each cassette and attach it to the storage location. When moving the machine, attach the lift plate in original position. Lift plate stopper Figure 1-2-6 Load paper. 1. Pull the cassette out. 2. Holding the paper width adjusting tab both ends, move the paper width guides to fit the paper. Paper width guides Paper width adjusting tab Figure 1-2-7 3. Adjust the length adjustment plate to fit the paper size. Length adjustment plate Figure 1-2-8 1-2-6 2GN/2GP/2GR 4. Align the paper flush against the left side of the cassette. Figure 1-2-9 Install the toner container. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Tap the top of the toner container five to six times. Toner container Figure 1-2-10 3. Shake the toner container approximately 10 times in the horizontal direction to stir toner. Toner container Figure 1-2-11 1-2-7 2GN/2GP/2GR 4. Gently push the toner container into the machine along the rails. Push the container all the way into the machine until it locks in place. Toner container Figure 1-2-12 Install the waste toner box. 1. Install the waste toner box in the machine. 2. Close the front cover. Waste toner box Figure 1-2-13 Install the optional original cover or the DP. 1. Install the optional original cover or DP. Install other optional devices. 1. Install the optional devices (job separator, built-in finisher, document finisher and/or fax kit etc.) as necessary. Connect the power cord. 1. Connect the power cord to the connector on the machine. 2. Insert the power plug into the wall outlet. 1-2-8 2GN/2GP/2GR Install the fixing brackets. Grooves 1. Remove two screws from the rear cover. 2. Hook the catch of fixing bracket onto the groove of round frame, and secure it using two screws removed before step. Fixing brackets Figure 1-2-14 Carry out initial developer setting (maintenance item U130). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn the main power switch on and press the status key. Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys. Enter 130 using the numeric keys and press the start key. Press the start key to execute the maintenance item. The drive stops within approximately 5 minutes. Press the stop key. Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000). 1. Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the start key. 2. Select MAINTENANCE and press the start key to output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items. 3. Press the stop key. Exit maintenance mode. 1. Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the start key. The machine exits the maintenance mode. Print out the user setting list. 1. Select [Report Print] to output the user various setting reports. Make test copies. 1. Place an original and make test copies. Attaching the language label (230 V specifications only). 1. According to need, attach the correspond language label. Completion of the machine installation. 1-2-9 2GN/2GP/2GR (2) Setting initial copy modes Factory settings are as follows: Maintenance item No. 1-2-10 Contents Factory setting U253 Switching between double and single counts Double count U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting After ejection U285 Setting service status page ON U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication ON U328 Side ejection setting OFF U342 Setting the ejection restriction ON U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode OFF 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-2-3 Installing the key counter (option) Key counter installation requires the following parts: Key counter (P/N 82142540) Key counter set (P/N 302A369705) Supplied parts of key counter set: Key counter cover (P/N 2A360010) Key counter retainer (P/N 66060030) Key counter cover retainer (P/N 66060022) Key counter mount (P/N 66060040) Key counter socket assembly (P/N 41529210) Two (2) M3 x 6 bronze flat-head screws (P/N B2303060) One (1) M4 x 30 tap-tight S screw (P/N B1B54300) Four (4) M4 x 6 bronze TP screws (P/N B4304060) Two (2) M4 x 10 bronze TP screws (P/N B4304100) One (1) M3 x 8 bronze binding screw (P/N B1303080) One (1) M4 x 6 chrome TP screw (P/N B4104060) One (1) M4 x 20 tap-tight S screw (P/N 7BB100420H) One (1) M3 bronze nut (P/N C2303000) Two (2) M4 x 10 tap-tight screws (P/N B3024100) Two (2) M4 x 10 tap-tight P screws (P/N B8014100) Procedure 1. Press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. 2. Fit the key counter socket assembly to the key counter retainer using the two screws and nut. 3. Fit the key counter mount to the key counter cover using the two screws, and attach the key counter retainer to the mount using the two screws. M4 x 6 screws (B4304060) Key counter retainer (66060030) Key counter mount (66060040) M3 nut (C2303000) Key counter cover (2A360010) M4 x 6 screws (B4304060) Key counter socket assembly (41529210) M3 x 6 flat-head screws (B2303060) Figure 1-2-15 4. Remove the scanner right cover and the upper right cover. 5. Cut out the aperture plate on the upper right cover using nippers. 6. Pass the connect inside the machine through the aperture and refit the upper right cover and scanner right cover. Scanner right cover Aperture Connector Upper right cover Figure 1-2-16 1-2-11 2GN/2GP/2GR 7. Pass the key counter signal cable through the aperture in the key counter cover retainer, and insert into the connector of the machine. 8. Seat the projection of the key counter cover retainer in the aperture in the upper right cover. 9. Fit the key counter cover with the key counter socket assembly inserted to the key counter cover retainer on the machine using the screw. 10. Insert the key counter into the key counter socket assembly. Key counter cover retainer (66060022) Key conuter cover Connector Key counter signal cable Projection M4 x 30 screw (B1B54300) Figure 1-2-17 11. Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode. 12. Run maintenance item U204 and select ON. 13. Exit the maintenance mode. 14. Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the touch panel when the key counter is pulled out. 15. Check that the counter counts up as prints are made. 1-2-12 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-3 Maintenance Mode 1-3-1 Maintenance mode The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine. (1) Executing a maintenance item Start Press the status key. Enter “10871087” using the numeric keys. Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys. Maintenance mode is entered. The maintenance item is selected. Press the start key. The selected maintenance item is run. Press the stop key. Yes Repeat the same maintenance item? No Yes Run another maintenance item? No Enter “001” using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys and press the start key. Maintenance mode is exited. End 1-3-1 2GN/2GP/2GR (2) Maintenance modes item list Section General Initialization Drive, paper feed, paper conveying and cooling system Item No. U000 Outputting an own-status report Initial setting* - U001 Exiting the maintenance mode - U002 Setting the factory default data - U003 Setting the service telephone number U004 Displaying the machine number U005 Copying without paper - U019 Displaying the ROM version - U020 Initializing all data - U021 Initializing counters and mode settings - U022 Initializing backup memory - U024 HDD formatting - U030 Checking motor operation - U031 Checking switches for paper conveying - ****************1 - U032 Checking clutch operation - U033 Checking solenoid operation - U034 Adjusting the print start timing Adjusting the leading edge registration Adjusting the center line 245/0/-30/-30*1 490/0/0/0/0/0/0*1 Setting the printing area for folio paper Length/Width 330/210*1 U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper 0/0/0/0*1 U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Drive motor Eject motor Polygon motor 2*1 0*1 -5*1 U035 Optical Content of maintenance item U061 Turning the exposure lamp on - U063 Adjusting the shading position 0*1 U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification Main scanning direction/auxiliary scanning direction 0/0*1 U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration 0/0*1 U067 Adjusting the scanner center line 0/0*1 U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP 0/0*1 U070 Adjusting the DP magnification U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing U072 Adjusting the DP center line 0/0/0*1 U073 Checking scanner operation - U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity U080 Setting the economy mode U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern U093 Setting the exposure density gradient Text and photo/text/photo U099 Adjusting original size detection 0/0/0*1 0/0/0/0/0*1 0/0/0*1 -6*1 175/170/160*1 0/0/0*1 105/105/105/60/60/60/*1 150/240*1 *Initial setting for executing U020, *1: The item initialized for executing U020, *2: The item initialized for executing U021 1-3-2 2GN/2GP/2GR Section High voltage Item No. Fuser and cleaning Setting the main high voltage U101 Setting the other high voltages Developing bias AC component frequency at image formation Developing shift bias potential at image formation Developing bias AC component duty at image formation Transfer control voltage Separation control voltage 28*1 2*1 50*1 130*1 20*1 Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger 5*1,*2 - U109 Displaying the drum type - U110 Checking the drum count - U112 Setting toner refresh operation Time of toner refreshment Developing bias on time 120*1 700 (30 ppm)*1 540 (40/50 ppm)*1 U114 Setting separation charger mode U117 Checking the drum number - U118 Displaying the drum history - U130 Initial setting for the developing unit U144 Setting toner loading operation MODE1*1 MODE2*1 U150 Checking sensors for toner - U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time - U158 Checking the developing count - U161 Setting the fuser control temperature Driving start temperature when warm-up starts Control temperature for displaying [Ready for copying.] Control temperature during printing U163 Operation panel and support equipment Initial setting* U100 U102 Developing Content of maintenance item Resetting the fuser problem data 175 (30 ppm)*1,*2 185 (40/50 ppm)*1,*2 190 (30 ppm)*1,*2 200 (40/50 ppm)*1,*2 190 (30 ppm)*1,*2 200 (40/50 ppm)*1,*2 - U167 Checking fuser counts - U196 Turning the fuser heater on - U199 Checking the fuser temperature - U200 Turning all LEDs on - U201 Initializing the touch panel - U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system - U203 Checking DP operation U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter OFF/COUNTER*1,*2 U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender - U207 Checking the operation panel keys - U208 Setting the paper size for the paper feeder U220 Setting the trial functions - U234 Setting punch destination Inch specifications: INCH*1 Metric specifications: EUROPE METRIC*1 U236 Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built-in finisher U237 Setting finisher stack quantity U240 Checking the operation of the finisher - U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher - Inch specifications: Letter*1,*2 Metric specifications: A4*1,*2 OFF*1,*2 0/0*1,*2 *Initial setting for executing U020, *1: The item initialized for executing U020, *2: The item initialized for executing U021 1-3-3 2GN/2GP/2GR Section Operation panel and support equipment Mode setting Image processing Item No. Content of maintenance item Initial setting* U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors - U244 Checking the DP switches - U245 Checking messages - U246 Setting the finisher 3000-sheet document finisher Centerfold unit built-in finisher 0/0/0/0/0/0*1 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0*1 0/0/0*1 U247 Setting the paper feed device - U250 Setting the maintenance cycle 400000 (30 ppm)*1,*2 500000 (40/50 ppm)*1,*2 U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count U252 Setting the destination U253 Switching between double and single counts U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting U265 Setting OEM purchaser code U285 Setting service status page U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication ON/8*1,*2 U328 Side ejection setting OFF*1,*2 U332 Setting the size conversion factor 1.0*1,*2 Japan*1 Double count*1 After ejection*1,*2 0*1 ON*1 U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function U342 Setting the ejection restriction ON*1,*2 - U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode OFF*1,*2 U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication U402 Adjusting margins of image printing U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the platen 2.0/2.0/2.0/2.0*1 U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP 3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0*1 3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0*1 U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically 74/70/68/85/140/55*1 47*1 - U425 Setting the target Network scanner U510 Setting the enterprise mode - Others U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations U902 Checking/clearing the punch-hole scrap counter U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts - U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts - U905 Checking/clearing counts by optional devices - U906 Resetting partial operation control - U908 Checking the total counter value - U910 Clearing the black ratio data - U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes - U920 Checking the copy counts - U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one time only) - U928 Checking machine life counts - Inch specifications: ON*1 Metric specifications: OFF*1 35000/0*1,*2 *Initial setting for executing U020, *1: The item initialized for executing U020, *2: The item initialized for executing U021 1-3-4 2GN/2GP/2GR Section Others Item No. Content of maintenance item U933 Setting the backup kit U935 Relay board maintenance U942 Setting of amount of slack for feeding from DP Initial setting* 0/0*1 U984 Checking the developing unit number - U985 Displaying the developing unit history - U989 HDD scandisk - U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light - U991 Checking the scanner count - U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern - *Initial setting for executing U020, *1: The item initialized for executing U020, *2: The item initialized for executing U021 1-3-5 2GN/2GP/2GR (3) Contents of the maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. U000 Description Outputting an own-status report Description Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences. Outputs the event log or service status page. Purpose To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences. Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be output. Display Output list MAINTENANCE List of the current settings of the maintenance modes EVENT LOG Outputs the event log SERVICE STATUS Outputs the service status page 3. Press the start key. The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output. When A4/Letter paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed location. When output is complete, the screen for selecting an item is displayed. Event log Event Log MFP Firmware version 2GN_2000.001.036 2006.04.17 (1) (2) (3) Paper Jam Log # Count. 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9876543 666554 4988 4988 4988 4988 1103 1103 1103 1103 1027 1027 1027 1027 550 28 (4) Service Call Log Event Descriprions 02.11.41.01.01 02.11.42.02.02 02.11.43.01.09 02.11.44.02.11 02.11.45.03.91 02.01.F0.01.01 (a)01.01.01.01.01 (b) (c) 01.09.01.01.01 02.11.41.01.01 02.11.42.02.02 02.11.43.01.09 02.11.44.02.11 02.11.45.03.91 02.01.F0.01.01 01.01.01.01.01 01.09.01.01.01 02. 11. 41. 01. 01 (d) (e) # Count. Service Code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7881214 578944 5296 5295 2099 1054 809 30 F0.0030 01.0100 F0.4000 F0.3010 01.2100 01.2100 01.2120 01.2100 (5) Maintenance Log # 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Count. 9045571 704511 7045 3454 3454 3454 417 35 Item 00.02 01.01 00.01 00.04 00.03 00.02 00.01 01.21 (6) Counter Log (f) J01:000 J02:000 J03:000 J04:000 J05:002 J06:002 J15:000 J16:000 J17:000 J18:000 J19:000 J20:000 J21:000 J22:000 J23:002 J24:002 J33:000 J34:000 J35:000 J36:000 J37:000 J38:000 J39:000 J40:000 J41:002 J42:002 J51:000 J52:000 J53:000 J54:000 J61:002 J62:000 J63:000 J64:000 (g) C0101:001 C0102:001 C0107:001 C0108:001 C0220:001 C0221:001 C2002:001 C2030:001 C2031:001 C2222:001 Figure 1-3-1 1-3-6 C2223:001 C2225:001 C2228:001 C2259:001 C3002:001 C3003:001 C3411:001 C3412:001 C3421:001 C3431:001 C3502:001 C3503:001 C3552:001 C3553:001 (h) M01:01 M02:01 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U000 Description Detail of event log No. Items (1) System version (2) System date (3) Paper Jam Log (4) (5) Service Call Log Maintenance Log Description # Count. Event Remembers 1 to 16 of The total page count at occurrence. If the the time of the paper occurrence of the previ- jam. ous paper jam is less than 16, all of the paper jams are logged. When the occurrence excessed 16, the oldest occurrence is removed. Log code (2 digit, hexadecimal, 5 categories) # Service Code Count. (a) Cause of a paper jam (b) Paper source (c) Paper size (d) Paper type (e) Paper eject Remembers 1 to 8 of The total page count at occurrence of self diag- the time of the self nostics error. If the diagnostics error. occurrence of the previous diagnostics error is less than 8, all of the diagnostics errors are logged. Self diagnostic error code (See page 1-4-22) # Count. Item Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of replacement. If the occurrence of the previous replacement of toner container is less than 8, all of the occurrences of replacement are logged. The total page count at the time of the replacement of the toner container. Code of maintenance replacing item (1 byte, 2 categories) First byte (Replacing item) 01: Toner container 02: Maintenance kit Second byte (Type of replacing item) 00: (fixed) (6) Counter Log (f) Jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Maintenance item replacing Comprised of three log counters including paper jams, self diagnostics errors, and replacement of the toner container. Indicates the log counter of paper jams depending on location. Indicates the log counter of self diagnostics errors depending on cause. (See P.1-422) Indicates the log counter depending on the maintenance item for maintenance. Refer to Paper Jam Log. All instances including those are not occurred are displayed. Example: C6000: 4 Self diagnostics error 6000 has happened four times. T: Toner container 00: Black M: Maintenance kit 00: (fixed) Example: T00: 1 The toner container has been replaced once. 1-3-7 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U000 Description Service status page (1) Service Status Page MFP Firmware version 2GN_2000.XLG.368 2006.04.17 (1) (2) Controller Information Memory Status (3) Option Slot1 (4) Option Slot2 (5) Total 524288KB 524288KB 1048576KB Time (6) Local Time Zone (7) Data and Time (8) Time Server +01:00_Amsterdam 10/27/2005 09:06 10.183.53.13 (9) FRPO Status User Top Margin User Left Margin User Page Length A1+A2/100 A3+A4/100 A5+A6/100 Auto Continue Mode Auto Continue Timer Y0 Y1 0.00 0.00 17.30 1 Figure 1-3-2 Detail of Service status page No. 1-3-8 Description (1) System version (2) System date (3) Slot 1 RAM size (4) Slot 2 RAM size (5) Total RAM size (6) Local time zone (7) Report output date (8) NTP server name (9) FRPO setting Supplement Day/Month/Year hour:minutes 00 06 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U000 Description Service status page (2) Service Status Page MFP Firmware version 2GN_2000.XLG.368 2006.04.17 Engine Information (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) Engine ROM Version Front Panel ROM Version NVRAM Version Scanner Version FAX Slot1 FAX BOOT Version FAX APL Version FAX IPL Version (15) Serial No. (16) MAC Address Counter (31) Printed Total Printed Pages Copier Printer FAX (32) Scanned Total Scanned Pages Copier Other (33) Paper Size A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 Ledger Folio Legal Letter Statement Other 2GW_1000.003.001 2GW_A000.001.019 _Bb04B29_Bb04B29 2GW_1200.001.088 3KH_5000.001.001 3KH_5100.001.001 3KH_5200.001.001 AFZ3123456 00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D Toner Coverage (17) Period (07/11/05 - 07/12/05 09:05) (18) Usage Page (A4/Letter Conversion) 3043.50 (19) Average (%) Total 2.90 Copy 3.56 Printer 2.87 FAX 3.52 (20) Last Page (%) 2.80 Installed Options (34) FAX Infomation Rings (Normal) Rings (FAX/TEL) Rings (TAD) TX SPEED RX SPEED ECM TX ECM RX V.34 REG.G3 TX EQR REG.G3 RX EQR RX MODEM LEVEL SGL LVL MODEM Installed (21) Document Processor Cassette (22) Paper Feeder 3000-Finisher (23) Finisher Mail Box Not Installed Installed (24) Job Separator Not Installed (25) Memory Card Installed (26) PDF Expansion Kit Not Installed (27) Fax Backup Kit Installed (28) Security Kit (29) Data Security Kit (C) Software (30) Security Library Version 0.50 (35) (36) (37) (38) (39) (40) (41) (42) 631 11 620 0 1 0 1 69 539 0 0 36 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 V.29 9600bps 9600bps ON OFF TX 4db 0db -43dBm -9dBm 1/1 500/530 0/0/0/0 97/0 F00/U00 0A001300/F0A8EF98/000000000000/000000000000/020A1Bt/ 1234/1234/0001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/08/00/07 0000000000/F80C001A37/302A183C00/000100013D/8791BFC305/0000003100/000F5D0000/01FD000000/ 0000000FB7/0000000000/0000260000/0000000000/0000000000/0000008400/0000000000/011F000F51/ 8F0F 2 Figure 1-3-3 1-3-9 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U000 Description Detail of Service status page No. Description (10) Engine ROM version (11) Operation panel ROM version (12) NV RAM version Supplement _ Bb 04B29 _ Bb 04B29 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (a) Consistency of the present software version and the database _ (underscore): OK * (Asterisk): NG (b) Database version (c) The oldest time stamp of database version (d) Consistency of the present software version and the ME firmware version _ (underscore): OK * (Asterisk): NG (e) ME firmware version (f) The oldest time stamp of the ME database version Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and (e) are identical with (c) and (f). 1-3-10 (13) Scanner version (14) Fax firmware version This item is printed only when the optional fax kit is installed. (15) Serial No. 10 digits (16) Mac address (17) Cleared date and output date (18) Page of relation to the A4/Letter (19) Average coverage (20) Coverage on the final output page (21) Presence or absence of the optional DP Installed Not Installed (22) Presence or absence of the optional paper feeder Cassette: paper feeder LCF: 3000-sheet paper feeder Not Installed (23) Presence or absence of the optional document finisher Inner Finisher: built-in finisher 3000-Finisher: 3000-sheet document finisher 1000-Finisher: document finisher Not Installed (24) Presence or absence of the optional job separator Installed Not Installed (25) Presence or absence of the Compact Flash Installed Not Installed (26) Presence or absence of the optional PDF upgrade kit Installed: The formal version is installed Not Installed: The PDF upgrade kit is not installed Trial Version(xx/xx/xx): A trial version is installed (27) Presence or absence of the optional data backup kit Installed Not Installed (28) Presence or absence of the optional security kit Installed Not Installed Total/Copy/Printer/Fax 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. Description U000 No. Description Supplement (29) Identification name for the security kit (30) Security kit version (31) Printed page counts Total/Copy/Printer/Fax (32) Scanned page counts Total/Copy/Other (33) Counts by paper sizes (34) Fax kit information (35) Destination information/Area information (36) Printable area setting (37) Offset for each bin MP tray (top)/MP tray (left)/Cassette 2 (top)/Cassette 2 (left) (38) Margin setting System (top)/System (left) (39) Panel lock information/USB information Panel lock 0: OFF/1: Partial lock/2: Full lock USB 0: Not installed/1: Full speed/2: Hi speed (40) Engine information (41) RFID information (42) Maintenance information This item is printed only when the optional fax kit is installed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Description Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode. Purpose To exit the maintenance mode. Method Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered. U002 Setting the factory default data Description Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings. Purpose To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport (position in which the frame can be fixed). Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [MODE1(ALL)] on the touch panel. 3. Press the start key. The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the position for transport. 4. Turn the main power switch off and on. If initialization error occurs, an error code is displayed. See Error Codes on P.1-3-14. If ERROR 09 occurs, turn the main powe switch off then on, and run maintenance item U024 to format the hard disk. And then, and run maintenance item U002 for initialization again. If other error occurs, turn the main powe switch off then on, and run maintenance item U002 for initialization. 1-3-11 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. Description U003 Setting the service telephone number Description Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected. Purpose To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine. Method Press the start key. The currently set telephone number is displayed. Setting 1. Press the start key. The keys to enter the number are displayed on the touch panel. 2. Press [TEL NO.] on the touch panel. 3. Enter a telephone number (up to 15 digits). 4. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U004 Displaying the machine number Description Displays the machine number. Purpose To check the machine number. Method Press the start key. The currently machine number is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U005 Copying without paper Description Simulates the copy operation without paper feed. Purpose To check the overall operation of the machine. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be operated. Display Operation MFP Only the machine operates. MFP + DP Both the machine and DP operate (continuous operation). 3. Press the system menu key. The copy mode screen is displayed. 4. Set the operation conditions required on the copy mode screen. Changes in the following settings can be made. Paper feed locations Magnifications Simplex or duplex copy mode Number of copies: in simplex copy mode, continuous copying is performed when set to 999; in duplex copy mode, continuous copying is performed regardless of the setting. Copy density Keys on the operation panel 5. To control the paper feed pulley, remove all the paper in the drawers, or the drawers. With the paper present, the paper feed pulley does not operate. 6. Press the start key. The operation starts. Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions. To stop continuous operation, press the stop key. 7. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the system menu key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-12 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U019 Description Displaying the ROM version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB. Purpose To check the part number or to decide, if the newest version of ROM is installed. Method 1. Press the start key. The ROM version are displayed. 2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys Display Description MAIN Main PWB ROM IC MMI Operation PWB ROM IC ENGINE Engine PWB ROM IC ENGINE BOOT Engine PWB booting SCANNER Scanner PWB ROM IC OPTION LANGUAGE Optional language ROM IC DICTIONARY - DP Optional DP main PWB ROM IC LCF Optional 3000-sheet paper feeder main PWB ROM IC OPTION CASSETTE Optional paper feeder main PWB ROM IC DF MAIN Optional 3000-sheet document finisher main PWB ROM IC DF MTRAY Optional 3000-sheet document finisher internal tray PWB ROM IC DF SADDLE Optional centerfold main PWB ROM IC DF MAILBOX Optional mail box main PWB ROM IC INNER DF Optional built-in finisher main PWB ROM IC SIMPLE DF MAIN Optional document sheet finisher main PWB ROM IC FAX BOOT1 Optional fax control PWB booting FAX APL1 Optional fax control PWB APL FAX IPL1 Optional fax control PWB IPL FAX BOOT2 FAX APL2 - FAX IPL2 - Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-13 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U020 Description Initializing all data Description Initializes all the backup RAM on the main PWB to return to the original settings. Refer to *1 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized. Purpose To be executed as required. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the destination. Display Description INCH Inch (North America) specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric (Europe) specifications ASIA PACIFIC Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications 3. Press the start key. All data in the backup RAM is initialized Turn the main power switch off and on. If initialization error occurs, an error code is displayed. If ERROR 09 occurs, turn the main powe switch off then on, and run maintenance item U024 to format the hard disk. And then, and run maintenance item U020 for initialization again. If other error occurs, turn the main powe switch off then on, and run maintenance item U020 for initialization. Error codes Codes 1-3-14 Description ERROR 01 Configuration initialization error ERROR 02 Counter initialization error ERROR 03 One-touch initialization error ERROR 04 Panel program initialization error ERROR 05 Event log initialization error ERROR 06 Account initialization error ERROR 07 Address book initialization error ERROR 08 Department initialization error ERROR 09 Document box initialization error ERROR 0a Permission initialization error ERROR 0b Job log initialization error ERROR 20 Engine PWB initialization error ERROR 40 Scanner PWB initialization error 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U021 Description Initializing counters and mode settings Description Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of copier, namely each counter, service call history and mode setting. Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification selected in maintenance item U252 Setting the destination. Refer to *2 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized. Purpose To return the machine settings to their factory default. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [EXECUTE] on the touch panel. 3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initialized based on the destination setting. 4. Turn the main power switch off and on. If initialization error occurs, an error code is displayed. See Error Codes on P.1-3-14. If ERROR 09 occurs, turn the main powe switch off then on, and run maintenance item U024 to format the hard disk. And then, and run maintenance item U021 for initialization again. If other error occurs, turn the main powe switch off then on, and run maintenance item U021 for initialization. U022 Initializing backup memory Description Initializes only the backup data for image processing. Purpose To be executed as required. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to initialize. Display Description MAIN+ENGINE Initialize the backup data of main PWB and engine PWB. SCANNER Initialize the backup data of scanner PWB. DP Initialize the backup data of DP main PWB. 3. Select the destination. Display Description INCH Inch (North America) specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric (Europe) specifications ASIA PACIFIC Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications 4. Press the start key. All data in the backup RAM is initialized. 5. Turn the main power switch off and on. If initialization error occurs, an error code is displayed. See Error Codes on P.1-3-14. If ERROR 09 occurs, turn the main powe switch off then on, and run maintenance item U024 to format the hard disk. And then, and run maintenance item U022 for initialization again. If other error occurs, turn the main powe switch off then on, and run maintenance item U022 for initialization. 1-3-15 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. Description U024 HDD formatting Description Formats the HDD backup data areas for the document management, network scanner and department administration. Purpose To initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD after shipping. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [EXECUTE] on the touch panel. 3. Press the start key to initialize the hard disk. 4. Turn the main power switch off and on. U030 Checking motor operation Description Drives each motor. Purpose To check the operation of each motor. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the motor to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. Display Operation FEED Paper feed motor operates MAIN Drive motor operates EJECT(FW) Eject motor rotates forward EJECT(REV) Eject motor rotates in reverse 4. To stop operation, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U031 Checking switches for paper conveying Description Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path. Purpose To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status. When a switch is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch will be highlighted. Display Switches FEED1 Feed switch 1 (FSW1) FEED2 Feed switch 2 (FSW2) FEED3 Feed switch 3 (FSW3) MP TRAY MP feed switch (MPFSW) REGIST Registration switch (RSW) EJECT Eject switch (ESW) BRANCH Feedshift switch (FSSW) DUPLEX Duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) JOB SEPARATOR Job separator eject switch (JBESW)* *: Optional. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-16 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U032 Description Checking clutch operation Description Turns each clutch on. Purpose To check the operation of each clutch. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the clutch to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The clutch turns on for 1 s. Display Clutches PF1 Upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) PF2 Lower paper feed clutch (PFCL-L) PF MP TRAY MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) FEED1 Feed clutch 1 (FCL1) FEED2 Feed clutch 2 (FCL2) FEED3 Feed clutch 3 (FCL3) FEED MP TRAY MP feed clutch (MPFCL) REGIST Registration clutch (RCL) DUPLEX Duplex feed clutch (DUPFCL) MOTOR ON The drive motor (DM) and the paper feed motor (PFM) are turned ON. To stop motor driving, press [MOTOR ON] again. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U033 Checking solenoid operation Description Applies current to each solenoid in order to check its ON status. Purpose To check the operation of each solenoid. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the solenoid to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The solenoid turns on for 1 s. Display Solenoids TONER Toner feed solenoid (TNFSOL) BRANCH1 Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) BRANCH2 Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)* MOTOR ON The drive motor (DM) and the paper feed motor (PFM) are turned on. *Optional. To stop motor driving, press [MOTOR ON] again. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-17 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U034 Description Adjusting the print start timing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration or center line. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original. Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed. Display Description LSU OUT TOP Leading edge registration adjustment LSU OUT LEFT Center line adjustment Adjustment: leading edge registration adjustment 1. Select the item to be adjusted. 2. 3. 4. 5. Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step TOP Adjustment of reference value 0 to 500 245 1.0 mm MP TRAY Paper feed from MP tray* -250 to 250 0 1.0 mm CASSETTE Paper feed from cassette* -250 to 250 -30 1.0 mm DUPLEX Duplex mode (second)* -250 to 250 -30 1.0 mm *: Setting the difference value from reference value Press the system menu key. Press the start key to output a test pattern. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For output example 1, decrease the value. For output example 2, increase the value. Leading edge registration Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2 Figure 1-3-4 6. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. U034 1-3-18 U066 (P.1-3-24) U071 (P.1-3-28) 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U034 Description Adjustment: center line adjustment 1. Select the item to be adjusted. 2. 3. 4. 5. Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step LEFT Adjustment of reference value 0 to 1000 490 1.0 mm MP TRAY Paper feed from MP tray* -500 to 500 0 1.0 mm CASSETTE 1 Paper feed from cassette 1* -500 to 500 0 1.0 mm CASSETTE 2 Paper feed from cassette 2* -500 to 500 0 1.0 mm CASSETTE 3 Paper feed from optional cassette 3* -500 to 500 0 1.0 mm CASSETTE 4 Paper feed from optional cassette 4* -500 to 500 0 1.0 mm DUPLEX Duplex mode (second)* -500 to 500 0 1.0 mm *: Setting the difference value from reference value Press the system menu key. Press the start key to output a test pattern. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For output example 1, decrease the value. For output example 2, increase the value. Center line of printing Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2 Figure 1-3-5 6. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. U034 U067 (P.1-3-25) U072 (P.1-3-30) Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper Description Changes the printing area for copying on folio paper. Purpose To prevent cropped images on the trailing edge or left/right side of copy paper by setting the actual printing area for folio paper. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. 3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Setting Setting range Initial setting LENGTH DATA Length 330 to 356 mm 330 WIDTH DATA Width 200 to 220 mm 210 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-19 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U051 Description Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper Description Adjusts the amount of slack in the paper Purpose Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper is Z-folded. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. 3. 4. 5. 6. Display Description Setting range Initial setting MP TRAY Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 0 CASSETTE Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 0 DUPLEX Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 0 MP TRAY (THICK) Paper feed from MP tray (thick paper) -30 to 20 0 Press the system menu key. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value. The greater the value, the larger the amount of slack; the smaller the value, the smaller the amount of slack. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-6 7. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears. 1-3-20 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U053 Description Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Description Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors. Purpose To adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Display Description Setting range Initial setting MAIN MOTOR Drive motor speed adjustment -40 to 40 2 EJECT MOTOR Eject motor speed adjustment -7 to 15 0 POLYGON MOTR Polygon motor speed adjustment -20 to 20 -5 Adjustment 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Press the start key to output an A3/Ledger VTC pattern. Correct values for an A3/Ledger output are: A = 300 ± 0.75mm B = 270 ± 1.35 mm Figure 1-3-7 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. A: Drive motor speed adjustment Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction, and decreasing it makes the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction. B: Polygon motor speed adjustment Increasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction and longer in the auxiliary scanning direction; decreasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction. 5. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears. 1-3-21 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U061 Description Turning the exposure lamp on Description Turns the exposure lamp on. Purpose To check the exposure lamp. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description CCD Exposure lamp CIS CIS (optional DP exposure lamp) 3. Press the start key. The selected lamp lights. 4. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U063 Adjusting the shading position Description Changes the shading position of the scanner. Purpose Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned. This is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Shading position -12 to 18 0 0.11 mm Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right, and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine left. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-22 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U065 Description Adjusting the scanner magnification Description Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect. Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect. Caution Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order. U053 (P.1-3-21) U065 (main scanning direction) U065 U067 (P.1-3-25) (auxiliary scanning direction) U070 (P.1-3-26) Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step MAIN SCAN ADJ Scanner magnification in the main scanning direction -15 to 15 0 0.1 % SUB SCAN ADJ Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction -25 to 25 0 0.1 % Adjustment: main scanning direction 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-8 5. Press the start key. The value is set. Adjustment: auxiliary scanning direction 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-9 5. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-23 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U066 Description Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration Description Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Display 3. 4. 5. 6. Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step ADJUST DATA 1 Scanner leading edge registration -45 to 45 0 0.11 mm ADJUST DATA2 Scanner leading edge registration (rotate copying) -45 to 45 0 0.10 mm Press the system menu key. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Scanner leading edge registration Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-10 7. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. U066 U403 (P.1-3-65) U071 (P.1-3-28) U404 (P.1-3-66) Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-24 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U067 Description Adjusting the scanner center line Description Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Display 3. 4. 5. 6. Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step ADJUST DATA 1 Scanner center line -70 to 70 0 0.08 mm ADJUST DATA2 Scanner center line (rotate copying) -25 to 25 0 0.10 mm Press the system menu key. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Scanner center line Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-11 7. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. U067 U403 (P.1-3-65) U072 (P.1-3-30) U404 (P.1-3-66) Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-25 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U068 Description Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. Performs the test copy at the five scanning positions after adjusting. Purpose Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used. Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed. Setting 1. Press the start key. Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step ADJUST DATA Starting position adjustment for scanning originals -55 to 55 0 0.11 mm TEST POSITION Scanning position for the test copy originals 0 to 3 0 0.71 mm 2. Select [ADJUST DATA] of the screen for selecting an item. 3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. When the setting value is increased, the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to the left when the setting value is decreased. 4. Press the start key. The value is set. 5. Select [TEST POSITION] of the screen for selecting an item. 6. Select the Scanning position using the +/- or numeric keys. 7. Press the start key. The value is set. 8. Set the original (the one which density is known) in the DP and press the system menu key. The screen for the test copy mode is displayed. 9. Press the start key. Test copy is executed. 10. Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 4 and check that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U070 1-3-26 Adjusting the DP magnification Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the main scanning direction or auxiliary scanning direction when the optional DP is used. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step CIS MAIN ADJ Magnification in the main scanning direction of CIS -25 to 25 0 0.1 % CONVEY SPEED Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction of CCD -25 to 25 0 0.1 % CIS SUB ADJ -15 to 10 0 0.05 % Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction of CIS 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U070 Description Adjustment: main scanning direction of CIS 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-12 5. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. U070 U071 (P.1-3-28) U404 (P.1-3-66) Adjustment: auxiliary scanning direction of CCD/CIS 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-13 5. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. U070 U071 (P.1-3-28) U404 (P.1-3-66) Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-27 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U071 Description Adjusting the DP scanning timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step ADJUST DATA1 Leading edge registration (first page) -32 to 32 0 0.09 mm ADJUST DATA2 Trailing edge registration (first page) -32 to 32 0 0.09 mm ADJUST DATA3 Leading edge registration (second page) -45 to 45 0 0.09 mm ADJUST DATA4 Trailing edge registration (second page) -45 to 45 0 0.09 mm ADJUST DATA5 Leading edge registration (rotate copying) -20 to 20 0 0.17 mm Adjustment: leading edge registration 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-14 5. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. U071 1-3-28 U404 (P.1-3-66) 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U071 Description Adjustment: trailing edge registration 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 3, decrease the value. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Copy example 3 Figure 1-3-15 5. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. U071 U404 (P.1-3-66) Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-29 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U072 Description Adjusting the DP center line Description Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. 3. 4. 5. 6. Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step ADJUST DATA1 Center line for the simplex copy mode -39 to 39 0 0.17 mm ADJUST DATA2 Center line for the duplex copy mode -39 to 39 0 0.17 mm ADJUST DATA3 Center line for rotate copying -7 to 7 0 0.17 mm Press the system menu key. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Reference Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-16 7. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. U072 U404 (P.1-3-66) Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-30 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U073 Description Checking scanner operation Description Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions. Purpose To check scanner operation. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be operated. Display Description SCANNER MOTOR Scanner operation HOME POSITION Home position operation DP READING DP scanning position operation DUST CHECK Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on Setting: SCANNER MOTOR 1. Select [SCANNER MOTOR]. 2. Select the item. 3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Operating conditions Setting range ZOOM Magnification 25 to 400% SIZE Original size See below. LAMP On and off of the exposure lamp 0 (off) or 1 (on) Original sizes for each setting in SIZE Setting Paper size Setting Paper size 5000 A4 5000 A5R 4300 B5 7800 Folio 5100 11" x 8 1/2" 10200 11" x 17" 10000 A3 9000 11" x 15" 8600 B4 8400 8 1/2" x 14" 7100 A4R 6600 8 1/2" x 11" 6100 B5R 5100 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" 4. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions. 5. To stop operation, press the stop key. Method: HOME POSITION 1. Select [HOME POSITION]. 2. Press the start key. The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position. Method: DP READING 1. Select [DP READING]. 2. Press the start key. The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position. Method: DUST CHECK 1. Select [DUST CHECK]. 2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights. 3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-31 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U074 Description Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Description Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the DP. Purpose Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass and when scanning an original from the DP. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display Description Setting range Initial setting R DP input light luminosity of R image -12 to 12 0 G DP input light luminosity of G image -12 to 12 0 B DP input light luminosity of B image -12 to 12 0 3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher, and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower. 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U080 Setting the economy mode Description Sets the level in the economy mode. Purpose To increase or decrease the image density in the eco-print mode. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select [ADJUST DATA]. Description Setting range Initial setting Exposure is toner economy mode -12 to 0 -6 3. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. Increasing the setting makes the image darker; decreasing it makes the image lighter. 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-32 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U087 Description Setting DP reading position modification operation Description The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position. If dust is identified, the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals. Purpose When using optional DP, to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to original reading position. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed. Display Description CCD Setting of standard data when dust is detected. BLACK Initialization of original reading position. Setting: standard data when dust is detected 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range Initial setting CCD R Lowest density of the R regard as the dust. 0 to 255 175 CCD G Lowest density of the G regard as the dust. 0 to 255 170 CCD B Lowest density of the B regard as the dust. 0 to 255 160 3. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting: Initialization of original reading position 1. Select [CLEAR]. 2. Press the start key. The setting is cleared. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-33 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U089 Description Outputting a MIP-PG pattern Description Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the machine. Purpose To check copier status other than scanner when adjusting image printing, using MIP-PG pattern output (without scanning). Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output. Display PG pattern to be output Purpose GRAYSCALE To check the laser scanner unit engine output characteristics. MONO-LEVEL To check the drum quality. 256-LEVEL To check resolution reproducibility in printing. 1 dot-LINE To check fine line reproducibility. To adjust the position of the laser scanner unit (lateral squareness) 3. To change the output conditions of MONO-LEVEL and 1dot-LINE, use the +/- or numeric keys to change the preset values and press the start key to register the setting. Description Setting range Output density of MONO-LEVEL 0 to 255 0 1dot-LINE 0 to 21 0 4. Press the system menu key. 5. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output. 6. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the system menu key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-34 Initial setting 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U093 Description Setting the exposure density gradient Description Changes the exposure density gradient in the manual density mode, depending on respective image quality modes. Purpose To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment for respective image quality modes. Also used to make copy images darker or lighter. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the image quality mode. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed. Display Description MIXED Density in text and photo mode TEXT Density in text mode PHOTO Density in photo mode Setting: Density in text and photo mode 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Adjust the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range Initial setting MIXED DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0 MIXED LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller. Image density Dark Setting: 0 Setting: 3 Set to LIGHTER Set to DARKER Light Density adjustment Light Center Dark Figure 1-3-17 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Setting: Density in text mode 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Adjust the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range Initial setting TEXT DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0 TEXT LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. 1-3-35 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U093 Description Setting: Density in photo mode 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Adjust the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range Initial setting PHOTO DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0 PHOTO LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-36 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U099 Description Adjusting original size detection Description Checks the operation of the original size detection sensor and sets the sensing threshold value. Purpose To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size detection sensor malfunctions frequently due to incident light or the like. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. The screen for executing each item is displayed. Display Description DATA Displaying detection sensor transmission data B/W LEVEL Setting detection sensor threshold value Setting original size judgment time Method to display the data for the sensor 1. Place the original and close the original cover or DP. The detection sensor transmission data is displayed. Display Description ORIGINAL AREA R Detected original width size (R) ORIGINAL AREA G Detected original width size (G) ORIGINAL AREA B Detected original width size (B) ORIGINAL AREA Detected original width size SIZE SW L Displays the original detection switch ON/OFF 2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Setting 1. Select an item to be set. 2. Adjust the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range Initial setting ORIGINAL R ORIGINAL G Original threshold value (R) 0 to 255 105 Original threshold value (G) 0 to 255 105 ORIGINAL B Original threshold value (B) LIGHT SOURCE R Light source threshold value (R) 0 to 255 105 0 to 255 60 LIGHT SOURCE G Light source threshold value (G) 0 to 255 60 LIGHT SOURCE B Light source threshold value (B) 0 to 255 60 WAIT TIME Time from activation of the original detection switch (ODSW) to original size judgment 0 to 255 150 A4R AREA Original size detection position display (mm) 220/240 240 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-37 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U100 Description Setting the main high voltage Description Performs main charging. Purpose To check main charging. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be operated. The selected operation starts. Display Description MC ON Turning the main charger on LASER ON/OFF Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off 3. To stop operation, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key when main charger output stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U101 Setting the other high voltages Description Sets the developing bias control voltage, the transfer control voltage, and the separation control voltage or checks the output of these voltages. Purpose To check the developing bias, the transfer voltage and the separation voltage or to take measures against drop of image density or background fog. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. 3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range Initial setting DEV BIAS Developing bias AC component frequency at image formation 20 to 32 28 DEV SBIAS Developing shift bias potential at image formation 0 to 3 2 DEV DUTY Developing bias AC component duty at image formation 0 to 100 50 TC DATA Transfer control voltage 0 to 300 130 SC DATA Separation control voltage 0 to 60 20 Increasing the DEV BIAS setting makes the image darker; decreasing it makes the image lighter. Increasing the DEV SBIAS setting makes the image darker. Increasing the DEV DUTY setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker. Increasing the TC DATA setting makes the transfer voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the voltage lower. Increasing the SC DATA setting makes the separation voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the voltage lower. 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-38 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U102 Description Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger Description Changes the intervals at which the main charger is cleaned. Purpose To change the setting when the background is visible. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Setting range Initial setting Main charger cleaning operation intervals 0 to 20 (unit: 1000 sheets) 5 When set to 0, the cleaning for the main charger is not operated. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U109 Displaying the drum type Description Displays the drum surface potential set as EEPROM of the drum unit. Purpose To check the drum surface potential. Method Press the start key. Drum surface potential (V) is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U110 Checking the drum count Description Displays the drum counts for checking. Purpose To check the drum status. Method Press the start key. The drum counter count is displayed. Setting 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. 2. Press the start key. The count is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U112 Setting toner refresh operation Description Sets the toner refresh operation time and the developing bias on time at power on and after copying. Purpose To change the toner refresh operation time and the developing bias on time at power on and after copying if image flow level is low. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. 3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range Initial setting ON TIME(SEC) Toner refresh operation time 50 to 150 (sec) 120 BIAS TIME(MSEC) Developing bias on time 500 to 1000 (msec) 700 (30 ppm) 540 (40/50 ppm) 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-39 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U114 Description Setting separation charger mode Description Sets the separation charger mode. Purpose To change the setting if the fuser offset or carrier leaking occurs. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the mode. Display Description MODE0 Complete separation mode MODE1 Edging separation mode MODE2 Switches complete and edging separation mode with environmental temperature. Initial setting: MODE1 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U117 Checking the drum number Description Displays the drum number. Purpose To check the drum number. Method Press the start key. The drum number is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U118 Displaying the drum history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the drum counter. Purpose To check the count value of machine number and the drum counter. Method Press the start key. Past record of 5 cases is displayed. Display Description MACHINE No.1 to 5 Past record of machine number COUNT 1 to 5 Past record of drum counter Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U130 Initial setting for the developing unit Description Replenishes toner to the developing unit to a certain level from the toner container that has been installed. Purpose To operate when installing the machine or replacing the developing unit. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Press the start key. Toner installation is started and the output value of the sensor and execution time are displayed. Display Description TONER SENSOR Output value of the sensor TIME(SEC) Execution time Completion Press the stop key after initial setting is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-40 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U144 Description Setting toner loading operation Description Sets toner loading operation after completion of copying. Purpose To set whether or not toner is loaded on the drum after low density copying. Normally no change is necessary from the initial setting. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display Description MODE0 Toner not loaded MODE1 Toner loaded after simplex or duplex copying MODE2 Toner loaded after simplex copying Initial setting: MODE2 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U150 Checking sensors for toner Description Displays the on-off status of each sensor or switch related to toner. Purpose To check if the sensors and switches operate correctly. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status. When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in reverse. Display Switches DEVELOPER SENSOR Toner sensor (TNS) CONTAINER SET Toner container detection switch (TCDSW) CONTAINER SNSR Toner container sensor (TCS) WASTE BOX SET Waste toner detection switch (WTDSW) WASTE BOX SENSOR Overflow sensor (OFS) MOTOR ON The toner feed solenoid (TNFSOL) and the paper feed motor (PFM) are turned on. To stop motor driving, press [MOTOR ON] again Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time Description Displays the developing drive time for checking, or clearing a figure, which is used as a reference when correcting the toner control. Purpose To check the developing drive time after replacing the developing unit. Method Press the start key. The developing drive time is displayed in minutes. Clearing 1. Press the clear key. 2. Press the start key. The time is cleared. Setting 1. Enter a drive time (in minutes) using the numeric keys. 2. Press the start key. The time is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-41 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. Description U158 Checking the developing count Description Displays the developing count for checking. Purpose To check the developing count after replacing the developing unit. Method Press the start key. The developing counter count is displayed. Setting 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. 2. Press the start key. The count is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U161 Setting the fuser control temperature Description Changes the fuser control temperature. Purpose Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve a fuser problem on thick paper. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. 3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range Initial setting DRIVE START TEMP Driving start temperature when warm-up starts 0 to 255 (°C) 175 (30 ppm) 185 (40/50 ppm) READY CONTROL T Control temperature for displaying [Ready for copying.] 0 to 255 (°C) 190 (30 ppm) 200 (40/50 ppm) PRINT CONTROL T Control temperature during printing 0 to 255 (°C) 190 (30 ppm) 200 (40/50 ppm) 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U163 Resetting the fuser problem data Description Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fuser section. Purpose To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fuser temperature. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [EXECUTE] on the touch panel. 3. Press the start key. The fuser problem data is initialized. 4. Turn the main power switch off and on. U167 Checking fuser counts Description Displays fuser counts for checking. Purpose To check fuser counts after replacing the fuser unit. Method Press the start key. The fuser counts are displayed. Setting 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. 2. Press the start key. The count is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-42 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U196 Description Turning the fuser heater on Description Turns the fuser heater M or S on. Purpose To check fuser heaters turning on. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the heater to be turned on. The selected heater turns on for 2 s and then turns off. Display Description MAIN Fuser heater M (FH-M) SUB Fuser heater S (FH-S) Completion Press the stop key when fuser heaters M and S are off. The screen for selecting the maintenance item No. is displayed. U199 Checking the fuser temperature Description Displays the fuser temperature, the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity. Purpose To check the fuser temperature, the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity. Method Press the start key. The fuser temperature and ambient temperature are displayed in centigrade (°C) and the absolute humidity is displayed in percentage (%). Display Description FIX CENTER TEMP Fuser center temperature (°C) FIX EDGE TEMP Fuser edge temperature (°C) SURROUND TEMP Ambient temperature (°C) HUMIDITY Absolute humidity (%) Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U200 Turning all LEDs on Description Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on. Purpose To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light. Method Press the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light. Press the stop key or wait for 10 s. The LEDs turns off, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U201 Initializing the touch panel Description Automatically correct the positions of the X- and Y-axes of the touch panel. Purpose To automatically correct the display positions on the touch panel after it is replaced. Method 1. Press the start key. The + key displayed at the upper left of the touch panel flashes. 2. Press on the center of the + key. The + key on lower right flashes. 3. Press the center of the flashing + key. Initialization of the touch panel is complete, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-43 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. Description U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Description Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system. This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting is necessary. U203 Checking DP operation Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the optional DP. Purpose To check the DP operation. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper. 3. Select the item to be operated. 4. When selecting [TEST2], to set the magnification using the +/- keys. Display Operation Setting range Initial setting TEST 1(NON P) Without paper - - TEST 2 With paper 100 to 200 (%) 100 5. Press the start key. The operation starts. 6. To stop continuous operation, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter. Purpose To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed. Display Description KEY-DEVICE Sets the presence or absence of the key card or key counter MESSAGE Sets the message when optional equipment is not installed. Setting: KEY-DEVICE 1. Select ON or OFF. Display Description ON The key card or the key counter is installed OFF Not installed 2. Press the start key. The setting is set. 3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Setting: MESSAGE 1. Select the [COUNTER], [CARD] or [COIN]. 2. Press the start key. The setting is set. 3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-44 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. Description U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender. Also sets the details for coin vender operation, such as mode and unit price. This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting is necessary. U207 Checking the operation panel keys Description Checks operation of the operation panel keys. Purpose To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. COUNT0 is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights. 3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bottom, the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1. When all the keys in that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right, the top LED in that line will light. 4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U208 Setting the paper size for the paper feeder Description Sets the size of paper used in optional 3000-sheet paper feeder. Purpose To change the setting when the size of paper used in the paper feeder is changed. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the paper size (A4, B5 or Letter). Initial setting: Letter (Inch specifications)/A4 (Metric specifications) 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-45 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U220 Description Setting the trial functions Description Enables the trial of USB functions by period limitation. Purpose To try USB activation functions. Method Press the start key. Display Description FUNCTION Selecting trial functions TRIAL STATUS Displays the current setting (1: Under trial, 0: Not trial) COUPON COUNT Displays remaining times TIME LIMIT Displays the end term of the function under present trial. TRIAL START Starts the trial of the function selected with FUNCTION. TRIAL STOP Stops the trial of the function selected with FUNCTION. Setting: FUNCTION 1. Select [FUNCTION]. 2. Select the function using the +/- keys. 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. [COUPON COUNT], [TIME LIMIT], [TRIAL START] and [TRIAL STOP] are displayed. Method: TRIAL START 1. Select [TRIAL STRAT]. 2. Press the start key. Trial of the function selected with [FUNCTION] is started. The display of [COUPON COUNT] decreases one. The display of [TIME LIMIT] will be the date of the present date plus 30 days. Method: TRIAL STOP 1. Select [TRIAL STOP]. 2. Press the start key. Trial of the function selected with [FUNCTION] is stopped. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U234 Setting punch destination Description Sets the destination of optional punch unit of 3000-sheet document finisher. Purpose To be set when installing a different punch unit from the destination of the machine. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the destination. Display Description AUTO With no punch unit JAPAN METRIC Metric (Japan) specifications INCH Inch (North America) specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric (Europe) specifications Initial setting: INCH (Inch specifications)/EUROPE METRIC (Metric specifications) 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-46 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U236 Description Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built-in finisher Description If the machine is equipped with an optional built-in finisher, this mode sets whether A5R/B5R/statement size paper is output to the machine eject tray or not. Purpose If the machine is equipped with an optional built-in finisher and if paper jams occur due to curling of paper in the built-in ejection section when two-sided copying onto A5R/B5R/statement size paper is performed, this mode is used to change the setting to ON to disable ejection to the machine eject tray. Method Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select ON or OFF. Display Description ON Does not eject to the machine eject tray. OFF Eject to the machine eject tray. Initial setting: OFF 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U237 Setting finisher stack quantity Description Sets the number of sheets of each stack on the main tray and on the internal tray in the optional 3000-sheet document finisher. Purpose To change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display Description MAIN TRAY Number of sheets of stack on the main tray MIDDLE TRAY Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for sort copying or staple copying Setting the number of sheets of stack on the main tray 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Setting Description 0 3000 sheets 1 1500 sheets Initial setting: 0 2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the number of sheets of stack on the internal tray 1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Setting Description 0 For sort copying: 10 sheets, for staple copying: 50 sheets 1 For sort copying: 10 sheets, for staple copying: 30 sheets Initial setting: 0 2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-47 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U240 Description Checking the operation of the finisher Description Turns each motor and solenoid of the 3000-sheet document finisher ON. Purpose To check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the 3000-sheet document finisher. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be checked. The screen for executing each item is displayed. Display Description FINISHER MOTOR Checking the motor of the 3000-sheet document finisher FINISHER SOL Checking the solenoid of the 3000-sheet document finisher MAIL BOX Checking the motor and solenoid of the mail box BOOKLET Checking the motor of the centerfold unit Method: Checking the motor of the 3000-sheet document finisher 1. Select the item to be operated. The operation starts. Display Motor FEED IN MOTOR M Paper entry motor (PEM) is turned on counterwise. FEED IN MOTOR L Paper entry motor (PEM) is turned on clockwise. CONV MOTOR H Paper conveying motor is turned on at high speed. CONV MOTOR M Paper conveying motor is turned on at middle speed. CONV MOTOR L Paper conveying motor is turned on at low speed. EJECT MOTOR H Eject motor (EJM) is turned on at high speed. EJECT MOTOR M Eject motor (EJM) is turned on at middle speed. EJECT MOTOR L Eject motor (EJM) is turned on at low speed. SUB PATH MOTOR H Relief path motor (RPM) is turned on counterwise. SUB PATH MOTOR M Relief path motor (RPM) is turned on clockwise. BUNDLE UP MOTOR Paper conveying belt motor 1 (PCBM1) is turned on. BUNDLE DOWN MTR Paper conveying belt motor 2 (PCBM2) is turned on. WIDTH TEST(A3) Side registration motor 1/2 (SRM1/2) is turned on. WIDTH TEST(LD) Side registration motor 1/2 (SRM1/2) is turned on. STAPLE FR MOTOR Staple shift motor 1 (STSM1) is turned on. STAPLE S MOTOR Staple shift motor 2 (STSM2) is turned on. STAPLE MOTOR Staple motor (STM) is turned on. TRAY MOTOR Main tray motor (MTM) is turned on. PUNCH MOTOR Punch motor (PUNM) is turned on. PUDDLE MOTOR Paddle motor (PDM) is turned on. 2. To stop operation, press the stop key. 1-3-48 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U240 Description Method: Checking the solenoid of the 3000-sheet document finisher 1. Select the item to be operated. The solenoid turns on for 1 s. Display Solenoid FEED IN SOL Paper entry solenoid (PESOL) REAR DOWN SOL 1 Trailing edge holder solenoid 1 (TEHSOL1) REAR DOWN SOL 2 Trailing edge holder solenoid 2 (TEHSOL2) SUB PATH SOL Relief path solenoid (RPSOL) SUB TRAY R SOL Feedshift solenoid 1 (FSSOL1) SUB TRAY L SOL Feedshift solenoid 2 (FSSOL2) BOOKLET SOL Feedshift solenoid 3 (FSSOL3) PADDLE SOL Paddle solenoid (PDSOL) HOLD DOWN SOL Paper holder solenoid (PHSOL) EJECT SOL Pressure switching solenoid (PSWSOL) PUNCH SOL Punch pattern solenoid (PPSOL) M-TRAY LOCK SOL Lock solenoid (LSOL) Method: Checking the motor and solenoid of the mail box 1. Select the item to be operated. The operation starts. Display Motors and solenoids FEED IN MOTOR Mail box drive motor (MBDM) BRANCH SOL 2 Tray feedshift solenoid 1 (TFSSOL1) BRANCH SOL 3 Tray feedshift solenoid 2 (TFSSOL2) BRANCH SOL 4 Tray feedshift solenoid 3 (TFSSOL3) BRANCH SOL 5 Tray feedshift solenoid 4 (TFSSOL4) BRANCH SOL 6 Tray feedshift solenoid 5 (TFSSOL5) BRANCH SOL 7 Tray feedshift solenoid 6 (TFSSOL6) FEED IN SOL Mail paper entry solenoid (MPESOL) 2. To stop operation, press the stop key. Method: Checking the motor of the centerfold unit 1. Select the item to be operated. The operation starts. Display Motor CONV MOTOR Centerfold main motor (CMM) BLADE MOTOR Blade motor (BLM) BUNDLE UP MOTOR Centerfold paper conveying belt motor 1 (CPCBM1) BUNDLE DOWN MTR Centerfold paper conveying belt motor 2 (CPCBM2) WIDTH TEST(A3) Centerfold side registration motor 1/2 (CSRM1/2) WIDTH TEST(LD) Centerfold side registration motor 1/2 (CSRM1/2) STAPLE MOTOR Centerfold staple motor (CSTM) 2. To stop operation, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key with the operation stopped. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-49 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U241 Description Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher Description Displays the status of each switch of the 3000-sheet document finisher. Purpose To check the operation of each switch of the 3000-sheet document finisher. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be checked. Display Description FINISHER Checking the switch of the 3000-sheet document finisher MAIL BOX Checking the switch of the mail box BOOKLET Checking the switch of the centerfold unit Method: Checking the switch of the 3000-sheet document finisher 1. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status. When a switch is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch will be highlighted. 1-3-50 Display Switches FRONT COVER SW Front cover switch (FCSW) TOP COVER SW Top cover switch (TCSW) RIGHT COVER SW Sub tray right switch (STRSW) SET SW Joint switch (JSW) BOOKLET SW Centerfold set switch (CSSW) PUNCH TANK SW Punch waste box sensor (PWBS) TRAY L-LIMIT SW Main tray lower limit detection sensor (MTLLDS) TRAY U-LIMIT SW Main tray upper limit detection sensor (MTULDS) TRAY MIDDLE SW Main tray middle position detection sensor (MTMPDS) PAP HOLD DOWN SW Paper holder home position sensor (PHHPS) LOAD DET SW Main tray load detection sensor (MTLDS) FEED IN SW Paper entry sensor (PES) EJECT SW 1 Eject switch 1 (ESW1) EJECT SW 2 Eject switch 2 (ESW2) EJECT SW 3 Eject switch 3 (ESW3) STAPLE HP SW 1 Staple home position switch 1 (STHPSW1) STAPLE HP SW 2 Staple home position switch 2 (STHPSW2) MIDDLE FEED SW1 Internal tray paper entry sensor 1 (ITPES1) MIDDLE FEED SW2 Internal tray paper entry sensor 2 (ITPES2) BUNDLE DET SW 1 Paper detection sensor 1 (PDS1) BUNDLE DET SW 2 Paper detection sensor 2 (PDS2) BUNDLE UP HP SW Paper conveying belt home position sensor 1 (PCBHPS1) BNDL DOWN HP SW Paper conveying belt home position sensor 2 (PCBHPS2) WIDTH HP SW 1 Side registration home position sensor 1 (SRHPS1) WIDTH HP SW 2 Side registration home position sensor 2 (SRHPS2) BUNDLE INTERF SW Paper conveying belt position detection sensor (PCBDS) VCARRY SW Centerfold paper conveying sensor (CPCS) 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U241 Description Method: Checking the switch of the mail box 1. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status. When a switch is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch will be highlighted. Display Switches FEED IN SW Mail paper entry switch (MPESW) EJECT SW Tray eject sensor (TEJS) COVER SW Mail box cover open/close switch (MBCOSW) OVER FLOW SW 1 Tray overflow switch 1 (TOFSW1) OVER FLOW SW 2 Tray overflow switch 2 (TOFSW2) OVER FLOW SW 3 Tray overflow switch 3 (TOFSW3) OVER FLOW SW 4 Tray overflow switch 4 (TOFSW4) OVER FLOW SW 5 Tray overflow switch 5 (TOFSW5) OVER FLOW SW 6 Tray overflow switch 6 (TOFSW6) OVER FLOW SW 7 Tray overflow switch 7 (TOFSW7) Method: Checking the switch of the centerfold unit 1. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status. When a switch is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch will be highlighted. Display Switches BUNDLE UP HP SW Centerfold paper conveying belt sensor 1 (CPCBS1) BNDL DOWN HP SW Centerfold paper conveying belt sensor 2 (CPCBS2) BLADE HP SW Blade home position sensor (BLHPS) WIDTH HP SW U Centerfold side registration sensor 2 (CSRS2) WIDTH HP SW L Centerfold side registration sensor 1 (CSRS1) FEED IN SW Centerfold paper entry sensor (CPES) PAPER DET SW Centerfold paper detection sensor (CPDS) TRAY PAP DET SW Tray paper detection sensor (TPDS) EJECT SW Centerfold eject switch (CESW) TRAY DET SW Centerfold top cover switch (CTCSW) Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors Description Turns the motors in the optional DP on. Purpose To check the operation of the DP motors. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. Display Motors DP FEED MOTOR Original feed motor (OFM) is turned on. DP REG MOTOR Original registration motor (ORM) is turned on. DP CONV MOTOR Original conveying motor (OCM) is turned on. DP LIFT MOTOR DP lift motor (DPLM) is turned on. CIS FAN MOTOR DP fan motor 1,2,3 (DPFM1,2,3) is turned on. DP FEED MOT REV Original feed motor (OFM) is turned on reversing. 4. To stop operation, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-51 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U244 Description Checking the DP switches Description Displays the status of the respective switches in the optional DP. Purpose To check if respective switches in the optional DP operate correctly. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status. When a switch is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch will be highlighted. Display Switches LIFT LOW LIM SW DP lift upper limit switch (DPLULSW) LIFT UP LIM SW DP lift lower limit switch (DPLLLSW) DP SET SW Original set switch (OSSW) DP PSD SW Original size length switch (OLSW) DP FEED SW Original feed switch (OFSW) DP REG SW Original registration switch (ORSW) CCD TMING SW DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) CIS TMING SW DP timing switch 2 (DPTSW2) DP COVER SW DP safety switch 2 (DPSSW2) DP OPEN SW DP safety switch 1 (DPSSW1) Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U245 1-3-52 Checking messages Description Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel. Purpose To check the messages to be displayed. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be displayed. 3. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys to display each message one at a time. When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed, the message corresponding the specified number is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U246 Description Setting the finisher Description Provides various settings for the optional finisher, if furnished. Purpose Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode Adjust if skewed paper conveying occurs or if the copy paper is Z-folded in punch mode. Adjustment of paper stop timing in the punch mode To adjust this item when the position of a punch hole is different from the specified one. Adjustment of front/rear side registration home position of internal tray Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the internal tray adjuster guides to paper. Adjusting of front and back/slanted stapling home position Adjusts the stapling position in the staple mode if the position is not proper. Provides adjustment of slanted stapling. Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position of centerfold unit Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the centerfold adjuster guides to paper. Adjustment of booklet stapling position Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper. Adjustment of center folding position Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The screen for setting each item is displayed. Display Description FINISHER 3000 Adjustment of the 3000-sheet document finisher BOOKLET FOLDER Adjustment of the centerfold unit FINISHER B-IN Adjustment of the built-in finisher Setting: 3000-sheet document finisher 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description PUNCH REG ADJ Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode PUNCH POS ADJ Adjustment of the paper stop timing in punch mode WIDTH F HP ADJ Adjustment of front side registration home position WIDTH R HP ADJ Adjustment of rear side registration home position STAPLE HP ADJ Adjustment of front and back stapling home position T-STAPLE HP ADJ Adjustment of slanted stapling home position Setting: adjustment of registration stop timing 1. Select [PUNCH REG ADJ]. 2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Adjustment of registration stop timing Setting range -20 to 20 Initial setting 0 Change in value per step 1 ms If skewed paper conveying occurs (sample 1), increase the preset value. If the copy paper is Z-folded (sample 2), decrease the preset value. Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1-3-18 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. 1-3-53 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U246 Description Setting: adjustment of the paper stop timing 1. Select PUNCH POS ADJ. 2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of the paper stop timing -10 to 10 0 0.49 mm If the distance of the position of a punch hole is smaller than the specified value A, increase the preset value. If the distance is larger than the value A, decrease the preset value. A Preset value A: 5.5 + - 2 mm (inch) 9.5 + - 2 mm (metric) Figure 1-3-19 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Setting: adjustment of front/rear side registration home position 1. Select [WIDTH F HP ADJ] or [WIDTH R HP ADJ]. 2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Setting range Description Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of front side registration home position -10 to 10 0 0.314 mm Adjustment of rear side registration home position -10 to 10 0 0.314 mm 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [FINISHER MOTOR], then [WIDTH TEST(A3)]. The width guides of the internal tray will move to A3-size position. 6. Pull the internal tray, insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides. 7. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position. Setting: adjustment of front and back stapling home position 1. Select [STAPLE HP ADJ]. 2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of front and back stapling home position -10 to 10 0 0.32 mm When staple positions are off toward the front side of the machine (sample 1), increase the preset value. When staple positions are off toward the rear side of the machine (sample 2), decrease the preset value. Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1-3-20 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. 1-3-54 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U246 Description Setting: adjustment of slanted stapling home position 1. Select T-STAPLE HP ADJ. 2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of slanted stapling home position -10 to 10 0 0.99° To increase the angle for slanted stapling (sample 1), decrease the preset value. To decrease the angle for slanted stapling (sample 2), increase the preset value. Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1-3-21 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Setting: centerfold unit 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description WIDTH U HP ADJ Adjustment of upper side registration home position WIDTH L HP ADJ Adjustment of lower side registration home position STAPLE POS ADJ1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/letter size STAPLE POS ADJ2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/legal size STAPLE POS ADJ3 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/ledger size BOOKLET POS ADJ1 Adjustment of center folding position for A4/letter size BOOKLET POS ADJ2 Adjustment of center folding position for B4/legal size BOOKLET POS ADJ3 Adjustment of center folding position for A3/ledger size Setting: adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position 1. Select [WIDTH U HP ADJ] or [WIDTH L HP ADJ]. 2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of upper side registration home position -20 to 20 0 0.1 mm Adjustment of lower side registration home position -46 to 46 0 0.1 mm 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [BOOKLET], then [WIDTH TEST(A3)]. The width guides of the centerfold unit will move to A3-size position. 6. Pull the centerfold unit, insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides. 7. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position. 1-3-55 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U246 Description Setting: adjustment of booklet stapling position 1. Select the [STAPLE POS ADJ 1], [STAPLE POS ADJ 2] or [STAPLE POS ADJ 3]. 2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/letter size -10 to 10 0 0.55 mm Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/legal size -10 to 10 0 0.55 mm Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/ledger size -10 to 10 0 0.55 mm When staples are placed too far right (sample 1), decrease the preset value. When staples are placed too far left (sample 2), increase the preset value. Reference value: within ± 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm Sample 2 Sample 1 Figure 1-3-22 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Setting: adjustment of center folding position 1. Select the [BOOKLET POS ADJ1], [BOOKLET POS ADJ2] or [BOOKLET POS ADJ3]. 2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of center folding position for A4/letter size -10 to 10 0 0.55 mm Adjustment of center folding position for B4R/legal size -10 to 10 0 0.55 mm Adjustment of center folding position for A3R/ledger size -10 to 10 0 0.55 mm When the centerfold position too far right (sample 1), increase the preset value. When the centerfold position too far left (sample 2), decrease the setting value. Reference value: within ± 3 mm 3 mm Center line Sample 1 Figure 1-3-23 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. 1-3-56 3 mm Sample 2 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U246 Description Setting the side registration cursor stop position 1. Select the desired cursor position. 2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range Initial setting FRONT Front side registration cursor stop position -4 to +4 0 REAR Rear side registration cursor stop position -4 to +4 0 END Trailing edge registration cursor stop position -4 to +4 0 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U247 Setting the paper feed device Description Turns on motors and clutches of optional 3000-sheet paper feeder or paper feeder. Purpose To check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device. Method 1. Press the start key. The value varies depending to the option furnished. 3000-sheet paper feeder Display Motor and clutches LCF FEED Paper feeder conveying motor (PFCM) CLUTCH B Paper feeder conveying clutch (PFCCL) CLUTCH P1 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) CLUTCH P2 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) Paper feeder Display Motor and clutches DESK FEED Paper feeder drive motor (PFDM) CLUTCH FEED Paper feeder feed clutch (PFFCL) CLUTCH U Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) CLUTCH L Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) 2. Select the item to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. 4. To stop operation, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-57 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U250 Description Setting the maintenance cycle Description Displays and changes the maintenance cycle. Purpose To check and change the maintenance cycle. Method Press the start key. The currently set maintenance cycle is displayed. Setting 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys. Description Setting range Initial setting Maintenance cycle 0 to 9999999 400000 (30 ppm), 500000 (40/50 ppm) 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U251 1-3-58 Checking/clearing the maintenance count Description Displays, clears and changes the maintenance count. Purpose To check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service. Method Press the start key. The maintenance count is displayed. Clearing 1. Press the clear key. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Setting 1. Enter a count using the numeric keys. 2. Press the start key. The count is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U252 Description Setting the destination Description Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination. Purpose To be executed after initializing the backup RAM by running maintenance item U020, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the destination. Display Description INCH Inch (North America) specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric (Europe) specifications ASIA PACIFIC Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. 4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Supplement The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below. To change the initial settings in those items, be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destination. Initial setting according to the destinations U253 Maintenance item No. Title Japan Inch Europe Metric, Asia Pacific 208 Setting the paper size for the paper feeder A4 Letter A4 253 Switching between double and single counts Single Double Double Switching between double and single counts Description Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters. Purpose Used to select, according to the preference of the user (copy service provider), if A3/Ledger paper is to be counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count). Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select double or single count. Display Description SINGLE COUNT Single count for all size paper DBL CNT(A3/LGR) Double count for A3/Ledger size or larger DBL COUNT(B4) Double count for B4 size or larger Initial setting: DBL CNT(A3/LGR) 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-59 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U260 Description Selecting the timing for copy counting Description Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters. Purpose To be set according to user (copy service provider) request. If a paper jam occurs frequently in the optional document finisher when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper ejection, copies are provided without copy counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying. To prevent this, the copy timing should be made earlier. If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fuser sections when the number of copies is counted before the paper reaches those sections, copying is charged without a copy being made. To prevent this, the copy timing should be made later. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the copy count timing. Display Description FEED When secondary paper feed starts EJECT When the paper is ejected Initial setting: EJECT 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U265 Setting OEM purchaser code Description Sets the OEM purchaser code. Purpose Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Adjust the preset value using the +/- or numeric keys. 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U285 Setting service status page Description Determines displaying the toner coverage report on reporting. Purpose According to user request, changes the setting. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [COVERAGE]. Highlighted: ON, Non-highlighted: OFF Initial setting: ON 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-60 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U326 Description Setting the black line cleaning indication Description Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line. Purpose Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish on the platen when scanning from the DP. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select ON or OFF. Display Description ON Displays the cleaning guidance OFF Not to display the cleaning guidance COUNT Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication Initial setting: ON 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting the count value 1. Select [COUNT]. 2. Enter a count using the +/- or numeric keys. Setting range: 0 to 999 Initial setting: 8 When setting is 0, the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is detected. 3. Press the start key. The count is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U328 Side ejection setting Description Sets whether to eject to the side of the machine when an optional curl eliminator is installed. Purpose Set according to the preference of the user. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select ON or OFF. Display Description ON To eject to the side of the machine OFF Not to eject to the side of the machine Initial setting: OFF 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-61 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U332 Description Setting the size conversion factor Description Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in user simulation. Purpose To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select [CALCULATION RATE]. 3. Change the setting using the +/- keys. Description Setting range Initial setting Size parameter 0.1 to 3.0 1.0 4. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U341 1-3-62 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Description Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output. Purpose To use a paper feed location only for printer output. A paper feed location specified for printer output cannot be used for copy output. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the paper feed location for the printer. Two or more cassette can be selected. 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U342 Description Setting the ejection restriction Description Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject tray is selected as the eject location. Purpose According to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select ON or OFF. Display Description ON Sets restriction on the number of sheets OFF Cancels restriction on the number of sheets Initial setting: ON Details of restriction (number of sheets to be ejected continuously after the start key is pressed) Condition Number of sheets When no optional ejection device is installed 250 When the job separator is installed 150 When the finisher is installed 100 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Description Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy. Purpose To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select ON or OFF. Display Description ON Duplex copy OFF Simplex copy Initial setting: OFF 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication Description Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached, by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends. When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance count reaches the set value, the message is displayed. This maintenance mode is effective for only Japanese specification. 1-3-63 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U402 Description Adjusting margins of image printing Description Adjusts margins for image printing. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. 3. 4. 5. 6. Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step LEAD Printer leading edge margin 0 to 236 74 0.1 mm A Printer left margin -80 to 236 70 0.1 mm C Printer right margin -118 to 236 68 0.1 mm TRAIL Printer trailing edge margin -118 to 236 85 0.1 mm TRAIL(DUP) Printer trailing edge margin in duplex mode (second side) -118 to 236 140 0.1 mm TRIAL(MP) Printer trailing edge margin (MP tray) -118 to 236 55 0.1 mm Press the system menu key. Press the start key to output a test pattern. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower. Printer leading edge margin (3.0±2.5mm) Ejection direction (reference) Printer left margin (2.0+2.0 –1.5mm) Printer right margin (2.0+2.0 –1.5mm) Printer trailing edge margin (3.0±2.5mm) Figure 1-3-24 7. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. U402 U403 (P.1-3-65) U404 (P.1-3-66) Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-64 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U403 Description Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the platen Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the contact glass. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step A MARGIN Scanner left margin 0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm B MARGIN Scanner leading edge margin 0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm C MARGIN Scanner right margin 0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm D MARGIN Scanner trailing edge margin 0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm Display 3. 4. 5. 6. Press the system menu key. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower. Scanner leading edge margin (3±1.5mm) Ejection direction (reference) Scanner left margin (2±1.0mm) Scanner right margin (2±1.0mm) Scanner trailing edge margin (2±1.0mm) Figure 1-3-25 7. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. U403 U404 (P.1-3-66) Completion Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears. 1-3-65 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U404 Description Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect when the optional DP is used. Caution Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U402 (P.1-3-64) U403 (P.1-3-65) U404 Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step A MARGIN Left margin (first page) 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm B MARGIN Leading edge margin (first page) 0 to 10.0 2.5 0.1 mm Display 3. 4. 5. 6. C MARGIN Right margin (first page) 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm D MARGIN Trailing edge margin (first page) 0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm A MARGIN(BACK) Left margin (second page) 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm B MARGIN(BACK) Leading edge margin (second page) 0 to 10.0 2.5 0.1 mm C MARGIN(BACK) Right margin (second page) 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm D MARGIN(BACK) Trailing edge margin (second page) 0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm Press the system menu key. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower. Leading edge margin (3±1.5mm) Ejection direction (reference) Left margin (2±1.0mm) Right margin (2±1.0mm) Trailing edge margin (2±1.0mm) Figure 1-3-26 7. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-66 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U407 Description Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration during memory copying. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original during memory copying. Caution Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U034 (P.1-3-18) U402 (P.1-3-64) U404 (P.1-3-66) U407 U066 (P.1-3-24) U403 (P.1-3-65) U071 (P.1-3-28) Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. 3. 4. 5. Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Leading edge registration for memory image printing -47 to 47 47 1.0 mm Press the system menu key. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. For copy example 1, decrease the value. For copy example 2, increase the value. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-27 6. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-67 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U411 Description Adjusting the scanner automatically Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections. Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. The screen for executing is displayed. Display Description Original to be used for adjustment (P/N) SCANNER Automatic adjustment in the scanner section 302FZ56990 DP(FACE UP) Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section (first page) 2AC68241 DP(FACE DOWN) Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section (second page) 2AC68241/303JX57010/ 303JX57020 Remarks Cut the trailing edge of the original as shown when the specified original (P/N: 2AC68241) is used. 128 +- 1mm 60 +- 1mm Cut with the edge of black belt. Figure 1-3-28 Method: SCANNER 1. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 302FZ56990) executing maintenance item U425. 2. Set a specified original (P/N: 302FZ56990) on the platen. 3. Select the item. Display Description ALL Automatic adjustment using the platen for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/center line, input gamma, chromatic aberration filter, MTF filter and matrix. INPUT Automatic adjustment using the platen for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/center line. GAMMA Automatic adjustment using the platen for: input gamma. C.A. Automatic adjustment using the platen for: chromatic aberration filter. MTF Automatic adjustment using the platen for: MTF filter. MATRIX Automatic adjustment using the platen for: matrix. 4. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [RESULT OK 00] is displayed. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, [ERROR XX] (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items. 5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. 1-3-68 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U411 Description Method: DP(FACE UP) 1. Set a specified original (P/N: 2AC68241) in the DP. 2. Select [INPUT]. Display Description INPUT Automatic adjustment of first page using the DP for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/center line. 3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [RESULT OK 00] is displayed. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, [ERROR XX] (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Method: DP(FACE DOWN) 1. Select the item. The screen for executing is displayed. Display Description NORMAL TARGET Uses the value determined using maintenance item U425 as the target data. ORIGINAL TARGET Uses the specified original for acquiring data as the target data. Method: NORMAL TREGET 1. Select the item. Display Description Original to be used for adjustment (P/N) ALL Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/ center line, input gamma, chromatic aberration filter, MTF filter and matrix. Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/ center line. 2AC68241/303JX57010/ 303JX57020 GAMMA Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: tolerance of input gamma. 303JX57010 MTF/MATRIX Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: tolerance of MTF filter and matrix. 303JX57020 INPUT 2AC68241 [ALL] 1. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 2AC68241/303JX57010/ 303JX57020) executing maintenance item U425. 2. Set specified originals (P/N: 2AC68241/303JX57010/303JX57020) in the DP. Stack the originals in the order of 2AC68241, 303JX57010, and 303JX57020. 3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. [INPUT] 1. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 2AC68241) executing maintenance item U425. 2. Set a specified original (P/N: 2AC24681) in the DP. 3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. [GAMMA] 1. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 303JX57010) executing maintenance item U425. 2. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57010) in the DP. 3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. [MTF/MATRIX] 1. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 303JX57020) executing maintenance item U425. 2. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57020) in the DP. 3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. 1-3-69 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U411 Description When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [RESULT OK 00] is displayed. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, [ERROR XX] (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items. Method: ORIGINAL TARGET 1. Place the specified original for acquiring gamma target data (P/N: 303JX57010) on the platen, and press the start key. 2. Place the specified original for acquiring matrix target data (P/N: 303JX57010) on the platen, and press the start key. 3. Select the item. Display Description Original to be used for adjustment (P/N) ALL Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/ center line, input gamma, chromatic aberration filter, MTF filter and matrix. Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: original size magnification/leading edge timing/ center line. 2AC68241/303JX57010/ 303JX57020 GAMMA Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: input gamma. 303JX57010 MTF/MATRIX Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP for: MTF filter and matrix. 303JX57020 INPUT 2AC68241 [ALL] 1. Set specified originals (P/N: 2AC68241/303JX57010/303JX57020) in the DP. Stack the originals in the order of 2AC68241, 303JX57010, and 303JX57020. 2. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. [INPUT] 1. Set a specified original (P/N: 2AC24681) in the DP. 2. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. [GAMMA] 1. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57010) in the DP. 2. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. [MTF/MATRIX] 1. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57020) in the DP. 2. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [RESULT OK 00] is displayed. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, [ERROR XX] (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items. 1-3-70 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U411 Description Error Codes Codes ERROR 01 Description Black band detection error (scanner leading edge registration) ERROR 02 Black band detection error (scanner center line) ERROR 03 Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction magnification) ERROR 04 Black band is not detected (scanner leading edge registration) ERROR 05 Black band is not detected (scanner center line) ERROR 06 Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction magnification) ERROR 07 Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction magnification) ERROR 08 Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction magnification far end) ERROR 09 Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction magnification near end) ERROR 0a Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction magnification leading edge) ERROR 0b Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction magnification leading edge original check) ERROR 0c Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge) ERROR 0d Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge 2) ERROR 0e DMA time out ERROR 0f Auxiliary scanning direction magnification error ERROR 10 Auxiliary scanning direction leading edge detection error ERROR 11 Auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge detection error ERROR 12 Auxiliary scanning direction skew 1.5 error ERROR 13 Maintenance request error ERROR 14 Main scanning direction center line error ERROR 15 Main scanning direction skew 1.5 error ERROR 16 Main scanning direction magnification error ERROR 17 Carriage error ERROR 18 Service call error ERROR 19 DP status error ERROR 1a DP open error ERROR 1b Original is not detected ERROR 2X N950 patch for the original error ERROR 3X N850 patch for the original error ERROR 4X N770 patch for the original error ERROR 5X N650 patch for the original error ERROR 6X N500 patch for the original error ERROR 7X N300 patch for the original error ERROR 8X N300 patch for the original error ERROR 9X N950 patch for the original error ERROR aX Cyan patch for the original error ERROR bX Magenta patch for the original error ERROR cX Yellow patch for the original error ERROR dX Red patch for the original error ERROR eX Green patch for the original error ERROR fX Blue patch for the original error ERROR ff Other error Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed. If the stop key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed. 1-3-71 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U425 Description Setting the target Description The value that is indicated on the back of the chart to be used for adjustment should be entered. Purpose Performs data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. The screen for executing is displayed. Display Description Original to be used for adjustment (P/N) CCD Entering the target values for scanner automatic adjustment 302FZ56990 CIS Entering the target values for DP automatic adjustment 2AC68241/303JX57010/ 303JX57020 Setting: CCD 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description N850 Setting the N850 patch for the original for adjustment N500 Setting the N500 patch for the original for adjustment N200 Setting the N200 patch for the original for adjustment CYAN Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment MAGENTA Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment YELLOW Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment RED Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment GREEN Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment BLUE Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment ADJUST ORIGINAL Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions 2. Select the item to be set. 3. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range L Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0 a Setting the a value -200.0 to 200.0 b Setting the b value -200.0 to 200.0 4. Press the start key. The value is set. 5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Setting: ADJUST ORIGINAL/MAIN 1. Measure distance from the left edge of the original for adjustment to the black band in three points. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distances A (50 mm), B (105 mm) and C (190 mm) along the auxiliary scanning direction. 2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2 2. Enter the values solved using the +/- or numeric keys in [MAIN ADJ]. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Setting: ADJUST ORIGINAL/SUB 1. Measure distance from the leading edge of the original for adjustment to the black band in three points. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distances D (30 mm), E (148.5 mm) and C (267 mm) along the main scanning direction. 2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2 2. Enter the values solved using the +/- or numeric keys in [SUB ADJ]. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. 1-3-72 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U425 Description Setting: CIS 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description N950 Setting the N950 patch for the original for adjustment N850 Setting the N850 patch for the original for adjustment N770 Setting the N770 patch for the original for adjustment N650 Setting the N650 patch for the original for adjustment N500 Setting the N500 patch for the original for adjustment N300 Setting the N300 patch for the original for adjustment CYAN Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment MAGENTA Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment YELLOW Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment RED Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment GREEN Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment BLUE Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment 2. Select the item to be set. 3. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range L Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0 a Setting the a value -200.0 to 200.0 b Setting the b value -200.0 to 200.0 4. Press the start key. The value is set. 5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U510 Setting the enterprise mode Description Sets whether or not the enterprise mode setting is enabled. Purpose According to user request, changes the setting. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select ON or OFF. Display Description ON Enterprise mode setting is enabled. OFF Enterprise mode setting is disabled. Initial setting: ON (Inch specifications)/OFF (Metric specifications) 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-73 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U901 Description Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations. Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts. Method Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed. Display Paper feed locations MP TRAY MP tray CASSETTE 1 Cassette 1 CASSETTE 2 Cassette 2 CASSETTE 3 Optional cassette 3 CASSETTE 4 Optional cassette 4 LCF Optional 3000-sheet paper feeder DUPLEX Duplex section When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed. Clearing 1. Select the count to be cleared. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U902 Checking/clearing the punch-hole scrap counter Description To set the punch limit, display and clear the punch counter of optional 3000-sheet document finisher. Purpose To set the maximum number of punches possible in order to instruct the user of the time to replace punch waste. Also, used to manually clear the punch-hole scrap count if a message requiring collection of punchhole scrap is shown on the touch panel after collection. If punch-hole scrap is collected with the machine power turned off, the punch-hole scrap count is not cleared and consequently this problem occurs. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description Setting range Initial setting PUNCH LIMIT The maximum number of punches (maximum number of punching times) 0 to 999000 35000 PUNCH COUNT Punch-hole scrap count (current number of punching times) 0 to 999999 0 3. Change the setting using the numeric keys or clear key. 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-74 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U903 Description Checking/clearing the paper jam counts Description Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations. Purpose To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. The screen for executing is displayed. Display Description COUNT Displays/clears the jam counts TOTAL COUNT Displays the total jam counts Method: Displays/clears the jam counts 1. Select [COUNT]. The count for jam detection by type is displayed. 2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys. 3. Select the counts for all jam codes and press the clear key. 4. Press the start key. The count is cleared. The individual counter cannot be cleared. 5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Method: Displays the total jam counts 1. Select [TOTAL COUNT]. The total number of jam counts by type is displayed. 2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys. The total number of jam count cannot be cleared. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts Description Displays or clears the service call code counts by types. Purpose To check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. The screen for executing is displayed. Display Description COUNT Displays/clears the service call counts TOTAL COUNT Displays the total service call counts Method: Displays/clears the service call counts 1. Select [COUNT]. The count for service call detection by type is displayed. 2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys. 3. Select the counts for all service call codes and press the clear key. 4. Press the start key. The count is cleared. The individual counter cannot be cleared. 5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Method: Displays the total jam counts 1. Select [TOTAL COUNT]. The total number of service call counts by type is displayed. 2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys. The total number of service call count cannot be cleared. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-75 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U905 Description Checking/clearing counts by optional devices Description Displays or clears the counts of optional DP or finisher. Purpose To check the use of optional DP and finisher. Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed. Display Description DP Counts of optional DP FINISHER Counts of optional finisher DP Display Description ADP No. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP RADP No. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP Finisher Display Description CP CNT No. of copies that has passed STAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activated PUNCH Frequency the punch has been activated STACK Frequency the stacker has been activated SADDLE Frequency the center holding has been activated Clearing 1. Select the item to be cleared. To clear the counts for all, press the clear key. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U906 Resetting partial operation control Description Resets the service call code for partial operation control. Purpose To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the casettes or other sections, and the related parts are serviced. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [EXECUTE] on the touch panel. 3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control. The maintenance mode is exited, and the machine returns to the same status as when the main power switch is turned on. U908 Checking the total counter value Description Displays the total counter value. Purpose To check the total counter value. Method Press the start key. The screen for total count value is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-76 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. Description U910 Clearing the black ratio data Description Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheet. Purpose To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [EXCUTE] on the touch panel. 3. Press the start key. The accumulated black ratio data is cleared. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes Description Displays and clears the paper feed counts by paper sizes. Purpose To check or clear the counts after replacing consumable parts. Method Press the start key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed. Clearing 1. Select the paper size. To clear all counts, press the clear key. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U920 Checking the copy counts Description Checks the copy counts. Purpose To check the copy counts. Method Press the start key. The current counts of copy counter, printer counter and fax counter are displayed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one time only) Description Resets all of the counts back to 0. Purpose To start the counters with value 0 when installing the machine. Supplement The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [EXECUTE] on the touch panel. 3. Press the start key. All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared. [CANNOT EXECUTE] is displayed if the count cannot be cleared. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U928 Checking machine life counts Description Displays the machine life counts. Purpose To check the machine life counts. Method Press the start key. The current machine life counts is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-77 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U933 Description Setting the backup kit Description Initializes optional data backup kit (CF) and restore the backup data. Purpose To initialize the CF when call for service (C0700) occurs. Also, to restore data when the hard disk has been damaged. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description INITIALIZE CF Initializes the data backup kit (CF) and backs up the job accounting data in the hard disk into the data backup kit (CF). FAX IMAGE Prints the fax reception data backed up in the data backup kit (CF). JOB ACCOUNTING Restores the job accounting data stored in the data backup kit (CF) to the hard disk. 3. Press the start key. The selected item is executed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U935 Relay board maintenance Description Sets the machine status temporarily when call for service (C0060) occurs. However, after the setting, call for service (C0060) occurs again when progress of period. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description MODE 0 Setting mode: OFF MODE 1 Setting mode: ON (Usable up to three times of use) Initial setting: MODE 0 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. 4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Supplement After removing the cause of the problem, be sure to change the setting in OFF. 1-3-78 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U942 Description Setting of amount of slack for feeding from DP Description Adjusts the amount of slack generated when the optional DP is used. Purpose Use this mode if an original non-feed jam, oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the DP is used. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted. Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step REGST Amount of slack in the reading original from the DP -31 to 31 0 0.17 mm REGST MIX Amount of slack in the reading original from the DP in the auto selection mode -31 to 31 0 0.17 mm 3. 4. 5. 6. Press the system menu key. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. Press the system menu key. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys. The greater the value, the larger the amount of slack; the smaller the value, the smaller the amount of slack. If an original non-feed jam or oblique feed occurs, increase the setting value. If wrinkling of original occurs, decrease the value. 7. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U984 Checking the developing unit number Description Displays the developing unit number. Purpose To check the developing unit number. Method Press the start key. The number is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U985 Displaying the developing unit history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the developing counter. Purpose To check the count value machine number and the developing counter. Method Press the start key. Past record of 5 cases is displayed. Display Description MACHINE No.1 to 5 Past record of machine number COUNT 1 to 5 Past record of developing counter Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-79 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. Description U989 HDD scandisk Description Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk. Purpose If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed, the control information in the hard disk drive may be damaged. Use this mode to restore the data. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [EXECUTE] on the touch panel. 3. Press the start key. When scanning of the disk is complete, the execution result is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light Description Displays, clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light. Purpose To check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after replacement. Method Press the start key. The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes. Display Description CCD Accumulated time for the exposure lamp CIS Accumulated time for CIS Clearing 1. Select the item to be cleared. 2. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U991 Checking the scanner count Description Displays the scanner operation count. Purpose To check the status of use of the scanner. Method Press the start key. Display Description COPY SCAN COUNT Scanner operation count for copying OTHERS SCAN CNT Scanner operation count except for copying Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-80 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance item No. U993 Description Outputting a VTC-PG pattern Description Selects and outputs a VTC-PG pattern created in the machine. Purpose When performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that of the scanner with a non-scanned output VTC-PG pattern. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the VTC-PG pattern to be output. Display PG pattern to be output Purpose PG1 Leading edge registration adjustment Center line adjustment Margin adjustment PG2 Lateral squareness adjustment Magnification adjustment PG3 Driving unevenness of drum 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Press the start key. A VTC-PG pattern is output. 5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the system menu key. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-81 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-3-82 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-4 Troubleshooting 1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection (1) Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel. Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903. To remove paper jammed in the machine, open the front cover, left cover or pull the cassette out. To remove original jammed in the optional DP, open the document processor top cover or document processor reverse unit. To remove the jammed paper in optional document finisher, detach the finisher from the machine. Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on. 1-4-1 2GN/2GP/2GR (2) Paper misfeed detection conditions OFSW ORSW Document processor DPTSW2 DPTSW1 Built-in finisher PCSW FSSW ESW DUPPCSW DUPFCL RCL RSW FCL1 MPFCL MPPFCL FSW1 PFCL-U MPFSW FCL2 FSW2 PFCL-L FCL3 FSW3 PFPFCL1 PPSENS1 PPSENS2 PPSENS3 PFPFCL2 PFPFCL1 PFFCL PFFSW PFPFCL2 Paper feeder 3000-sheet paper feeder Figure 1-4-1 1-4-2 2GN/2GP/2GR Section System Paper feed section Description Conditions Specified time 04 Cover open Cover is open during copying. - 05 Secondary paper feed does not start Secondary paper feed does not start within specified time of arrival of paper at the registration section. 30 s 09 3000-sheet paper feeder sequence error jam A communication sequence error occurs between the machine and the 3000-sheet paper feeder. - 10 No paper feed from cassette 1 Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn on within the specified time of upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time. 1489 ms (30 ppm)/ 1152 ms (40/50 ppm) 11 No paper feed from cassette 2 Feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn on within the specified time of lower paper feed clutch (PFCL-L) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time. 1562 ms (30 ppm)/ 1209 ms (40/50 ppm) 12 No paper feed from optional cassette 3 Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within the specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time (paper feed from optional paper feeder). 1562 ms (30 ppm)/ 1209 ms (40/50 ppm) Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within the specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time (paper feed from optional 3000sheet paper feeder). 2044 ms (30 ppm)/ 1582 ms (40/50 ppm) 13 No paper feed from optional cassette 4 The paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) does not turn on 1562 ms (30 ppm)/ within the specified time of paper feeder paper feed 1209 ms (40/50 ppm) clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time (paper feed from optional paper feeder). 14 No paper feed from MP tray The MP feed switch (MPFSW) does not turn on within the specified time of the MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time. 5056 ms (30 ppm)/ 3913 ms (40/50 ppm) 15 Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section 1 Paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) does not turn on within specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) turning on (paper feed from optional 3000sheet paper feeder). 823 ms (30 ppm)/ 637 ms (40/50 ppm) 16 Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section 2 Paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) does not turn on within specified time of the paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) turning on (paper feed from optional 3000-sheet paper feeder). 879 ms (30 ppm)/ 681 ms (40/50 ppm) 17 Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section 3 Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1) does not turn on within specified time of the paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) turning on (paper feed from optional 3000-sheet paper feeder). 539 ms (30 ppm)/ 417 ms (40/50 ppm) 1-4-3 2GN/2GP/2GR Section Paper feed section 1-4-4 Description 18 Misfeed in vertical paper conveying section Conditions Specified time The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within specified time of feed switch 1 (FSW1) turning on. 1657 ms (30 ppm)/ 1283 ms (40/50 ppm) Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn on within specified time of feed switch 2 (FSW2) turning on. 1910 ms (30 ppm)/ 1478 ms (40/50 ppm) Feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn on within specified time of feed switch 3 (FSW3) turning on. 1904 ms (30 ppm)/ 1474 ms (40/50 ppm) 19 Misfeed in paper feeder vertical paper conveying section Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within specified 1573 ms (30 ppm)/ time of the paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) turning on. 1217 ms (40/50 ppm) 20 Misfeed in MP tray vertical paper conveying section The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within specified time of the MP feed switch (MPFSW) turning on. 3933 ms (30 ppm)/ 3043 ms (40/50 ppm) 21 Multiple sheets in paper feed section The feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on. Paper length + 4337ms (30 ppm)/ Paper length + 3357ms (40/50 ppm) The feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on. Paper length + 4337ms (30 ppm)/ Paper length + 3357ms (40/50 ppm) The feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on (paper feed from optional paper feeder). 3382ms (30 ppm)/ 2617ms (40/50 ppm) The feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on (paper feed from optional 3000sheet paper feeder). Paper length + 1595ms (30 ppm)/ Paper length + 1234ms (40/50 ppm) The paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on. 3382ms (30 ppm)/ 2617ms (40/50 ppm) The MP feed switch (MPFSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on. Paper length + 4337ms (30 ppm)/ Paper length + 3357ms (40/50 ppm) The feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within specified time of the upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) turning on. 1489 ms (30 ppm)/ 1152 ms (40/50 ppm) The feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within specified time of the lower paper feed clutch (PFCL-L) turning on. 1562 ms (30 ppm)/ 1209 ms (40/50 ppm) The feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within specified time of the paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turning on. 3416 ms (30 ppm)/ 2643 ms (40/50 ppm) The paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) does not turn off within specified time of the paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) turning on. 5056 ms (30 ppm)/ 3913 ms (40/50 ppm) The MP feed switch (MPFSW) does not turn off within specified time of the MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) turning on. 5056 ms (30 ppm)/ 3913 ms (40/50 ppm) 2GN/2GP/2GR Section Paper feed section Description Conditions Specified time 22 Multiple sheets in vertical conveying section The feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within specified time of the feed switch 2 (FSW2) turning off. 1910 ms (30 ppm)/ 1478 ms (40/50 ppm) The feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within specified time of the feed switch 3 (FSW3) turning off. 1989 ms (30 ppm)/ 1539 ms (40/50 ppm) The feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within specified time of the feed switch 2 (FSW2) turning on 1910 ms (30 ppm)/ 1478 ms (40/50 ppm) The feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within specified time of the feed switch 3 (FSW3) turning on. 1904 ms (30 ppm)/ 1474 ms (40/50 ppm) The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within specified time of the MP feed switch (MPFSW) turning off. 3539 ms (30 ppm)/ 2739 ms (40/50 ppm) The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within specified time of the MP feed switch (MPFSW) turning on. 3933 ms (30 ppm)/ 3043 ms (40/50 ppm) 23 Multiple sheets in MP tray conveying section Paper conveying section 30 Misfeed in registration/ transfer section The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within specified time of the feed switch 1 (FSW1) turning off. 1511 ms (30 ppm)/ 1170 ms (40/50 ppm) The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within specified time of the feed switch 1 (FSW1) turning on. 1652 ms (30 ppm)/ 1278 ms (40/50 ppm) Fuser section 40 Misfeed in fuser section (MP tray) 41 Misfeed in fuser section (cassette 1) 42 Misfeed in fuser section (cassette 2) 43 Misfeed in fuser section (optional cassette 3) 44 Misfeed in fuser section (optional cassette 4) 45 Misfeed in fuser section (optional 3000-sheet paper feeder) 46 Misfeed in fuser section (duplex section) The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. 2899 ms (30 ppm)/ 2243 ms (40/50 ppm) The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. 2899 ms (30 ppm)/ 2243 ms (40/50 ppm) 50 The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within specified Misfeed in eject section time of the registration switch (RSW) turning off. 2899 ms (30 ppm)/ 2243 ms (40/50 ppm) The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. 2899 ms (30 ppm)/ 2243 ms (40/50 ppm) The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. 2051 ms (30 ppm)/ 1587 ms (40/50 ppm) The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off. 2051 ms (30 ppm)/ 1587 ms (40/50 ppm) The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. 2051 ms (30 ppm)/ 1587 ms (40/50 ppm) Eject section 51 Misfeed in job separator eject section 1-4-5 2GN/2GP/2GR Section Feedshift section Description 52 Misfeed in feedshift section Conditions Specified time The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within specified time of the start of eject motor (EM) reverse rotation. 1545 ms (30 ppm)/ 1196 ms (40/50 ppm) During paper switchback operation, the feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on. 2989 ms (30 ppm)/ 2313 ms (40/50 ppm) The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within 2899 ms (30 ppm)/ specified time of the registration switch (RSW) turning off. 2243 ms (40/50 ppm) Duplex section The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. 2899 ms (30 ppm)/ 2243 ms (40/50 ppm) The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. 2837 ms (30 ppm)/ 2196 ms (40/50 ppm) The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off. 2837 ms (30 ppm)/ 2196 ms (40/50 ppm) The feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn on within specified time of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) turning on. 1994 ms (30 ppm)/ 1543 ms (40/50 ppm) The feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within specified time of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) turning off. 1994 ms (30 ppm)/ 1543 ms (40/50 ppm) The original feed switch (OFSW) does not turn on within specified time during the first sheet feeding. 2436 pulse The original feed switch (OFSW) does not turn on within specified time during the second sheet feeding. 4430 pulse 71 An original jam in the original feed/conveying section 1 DP timing switch 2 (DPTSW2) does not turn off within specified time. 2500 pulse 72 An original jam in the original feed/conveying section 2 The original feed switch (OFSW) and original registration switch (ORSW) does not turn off within specified time. 16675 pulse 73 An original jam in the original conveying section DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) does not turn off within specified time. 4979 pulse 74 An original jam in the original registration section The original registration switch (ORSW) does not turn on within specified time and after 5 retries. 4979 pulse 60 Duplex paper conveying section 1 61 Duplex paper conveying section 2 Optional DP 1-4-6 70 No original feed 2GN/2GP/2GR Section Optional DP Optional finisher Description Conditions Specified time 75 An original jam in the original registration section The original registration switch (ORSW) does not turn off within specified time. 19533 pulse DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) does not turn on within specified time. 4979 pulse 76 An original jam in the original feed/conveying section DP timing switch 2 (DPTSW2) does not turn on within specified time. 2500 pulse 78 Document processor top cover open The document processor top cover is opened during orig- inal feeding. 80 Jam between the finisher and machine (3000-sheet document finisher only) Paper ejection is not output from the machine to the document finisher within specified time of the paper entry sensor (PES) turning on. 15 s 81 Paper entry sensor nonarrival jam (3000-sheet document finisher) The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned off even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received. 1360 ms (30 ppm)/ 1052 ms (40/50 ppm) (3000-sheet document finisher) The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received. 1360 ms (30 ppm)/ 1052 ms (40/50 ppm) (3000-sheet document finisher) The paper entry sensor (PES) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on. 2989 ms (30 ppm)/ 2313 ms (40/50 ppm) (Document finisher) The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received. 2627 ms (Built-in finisher) The paper conveying switch (PCSW) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received. 1573 ms (30 ppm) 1217 ms (40/50 ppm) (Built-in finisher) The paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on when paper is conveyed to the intermediate tray from the paper conveying unit. Paper length + 1123 ms (30 ppm) Paper length + 869 ms (40/50 ppm) (3000-sheet document finisher) The home position is not detected within the specified time when driving the staple motor. 600 ms (Document finisher) The staple home position sensor (STSPS) is not turned on within the specified time when driving the staple motor (STM). 1000 ms (Built-in finisher) The staple home position sensor (STHPS) is not turned on within the specified time when driving the staple motor (STM). 600 ms 82 Jam in stapler 1-4-7 2GN/2GP/2GR Section Optional finisher Description 83 Exit sensor stay jam Specified time (3000-sheet document finisher) Eject switch 1 (ESW1) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 1182 ms (Document finisher) In the straight mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 1680ms (Document finisher) In the offset or staple mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 5375ms (Built-in finisher) The paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on when paper is ejected to the finisher tray from the intermediate tray. Paper length + 1123 ms (30 ppm) Paper length + 869 ms (40/50 ppm) Eject switch 2 (ESW2) is not turned off even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received. 1562 ms (30 ppm)/ 1209 ms (40/50 ppm) Eject switch 2 (ESW2) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received. 1562 ms (30 ppm)/ 1209 ms (40/50 ppm) Eject switch 2 (ESW2) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 2989 ms (30 ppm)/ 2313 ms (40/50 ppm) Eject switch 3 (ESW3) does not turn off within specified time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning on. 1843 ms (30 ppm)/ 1426 ms (40/50 ppm) Eject switch 3 (ESW3) does not turn on within specified time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning on. 1843 ms (30 ppm)/ 1426 ms (40/50 ppm) Eject switch 3 (ESW3) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 2989 ms (30 ppm)/ 2313 ms (40/50 ppm) 86 Jam in eject section of internal tray 1 (3000sheet document finisher only) Internal tray entry sensor 1 (ITPES1) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the eject signal was received. 2674 ms (30 ppm)/ 2070 ms (40/50 ppm) 87 Jam in eject section of internal tray 2 (3000sheet document finisher only) Internal tray entry sensor 2 (ITPES2) does not turn on within specified time of internal tray entry sensor 1 (ITPES1) turning on. 1708 ms (30 ppm)/ 1322 ms (40/50 ppm) Internal tray entry sensor 2 (ITPES2) does not turn off within specified time of internal tray entry sensor 1 (ITPES1) turning off. 676 ms 88 Jam in eject section of main tray (3000-sheet document finisher only) Eject switch 1 (ESW1) is not turned on within specified time. 1324 ms Side registration home position sensor 1 (SRHPS1) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 500 ms Side registration home position sensor 2 (SRHPS2) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 500 ms The paper conveying belt detection sensor (PCBDS) is not turned off within specified time. 2000 ms 84 Jam in eject section of right sub tray (3000sheet document finisher only) 85 Jam in eject section of left sub tray (3000sheet document finisher only) 1-4-8 Conditions 2GN/2GP/2GR Section Optional finisher Description 89 Jam in centerfold unit (3000-sheet document finisher only) 89 Jam in centerfold unit (3000-sheet document finisher only) 90 Jam in mail box (3000-sheet document finisher only) Conditions Specified time The centerfold paper entry sensor (CPES) does not turn 1770 ms (30 ppm)/ off within specified time of centerfold paper detection sen- 1370 ms (40/50 ppm) sor (CPDS) turning on. The centerfold paper entry sensor (CPES) does not turn 1770 ms (30 ppm)/ on within specified time of centerfold paper detection sen- 1370 ms (40/50 ppm) sor (CPDS) turning on. The centerfold paper entry sensor (CPES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 2989 ms (30 ppm)/ 2313 ms (40/50 ppm) The centerfold eject switch (CESW) is not turned on within specified time. 3040 ms The centerfold eject switch (CESW) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 4213 ms Centerfold side registration sensor 1 (CSRS1) is not turned on within specified time. 600 ms Centerfold side registration sensor 2 (CSRS2) is not turned on within specified time. 600 ms The home position is not detected within the specified time after driving the centerfold staple motor (CSTM). 1000 ms The centerfold paper detection sensor (CPDS) is not turned off within specified time. 4528 ms (30 ppm)/ 3504 ms (40/50 ppm) The centerfold paper detection sensor (CPDS) is not turned on within specified time. 4528 ms (30 ppm)/ 3504 ms (40/50 ppm) The centerfold paper detection sensor (CPDS) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 2989 ms (30 ppm)/ 2313 ms (40/50 ppm) The mail paper entry switch (MPESW) is not turned on within specified time. 1315 ms (30 ppm)/ 1017 ms (40/50 ppm) The mail paper entry switch (MPESW) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 2989 ms (30 ppm)/ 2313 ms (40/50 ppm) The tray eject sensor (TEJS) does not turn on within specified time of mail paper entry switch (MPESW) turning on. Tray 1 to 4 2618 ms (30 ppm)/ 2026 ms (40/50 ppm) Tray 5 to 7 1483 ms (30 ppm)/ 1148 ms (40/50 ppm) The tray eject sensor (TEJS) is not turned off within spec- 2989 ms (30 ppm)/ ified time of its turning on. 2313 ms (40/50 ppm) 91 Finisher cover open 92 Exit sensor non-arrival jam (document finisher only) (3000-sheet document finisher) The front cover, top cover or right sub tray is opened when starting the finisher operation. The centerfold unit top cover is opened when starting the centerfold operation. The mail box cover is opened when starting the operation. - (Document finisher) The finisher cover becomes open during paper is running. Paper is remaining in paths at power on. - In the straight mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the paper entry sensor (PES) was turned on. 1770 ms 1-4-9 2GN/2GP/2GR Section Optional finisher Description 93 Reverse sensor jam (document finisher only) Conditions Specified time The reverse sensor (REVS) does not turn on within spec- 1071 ms ified time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning on. The reverse sensor (REVS) is not turned on within speci- 435 ms fied time. The reverse sensor (REVS) does not turn off within spec- 622 ms ified time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning off. The reverse sensor (REVS) is not turned off within speci- Depends on paper fied time its turning on. size 1-4-10 94 Paper entry sensor stay/remaining jam (document finisher only) The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned off within specified time its turning on. Depends on paper size 95 Paper conveying sensor jam (document finisher only) The paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on within specified time of reverse sensor (REVS) turning on. 735 ms The paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off within specified time of reverse sensor (REVS) turning off. 1004 ms 96 Jam between the builtin finisher and machine (built-in finisher only) Paper ejection is not output from the machine to the document finisher within specified time of the intermediate tray sensor (ITS) turning on. 1573 ms (30 ppm) 1217 ms (40/50 ppm) 2GN/2GP/2GR (3) Paper misfeeds Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures (1) A paper jam in the paper feed, conveying or eject section is indicated as soon as the main power switch is turned on. A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around feed switch 1/2/3, registration switch, eject switch or feedshift switch. Check visually and remove it, if any. Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Feed switch 1/2/3, registration switch, eject switch, feedshift switch (2) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from cassette 1). Jam code 10 Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. (3) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from cassette 2). Jam code 11 Check if the paper feed pul- Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys. ley, separation pulley or forwarding pulley of the cassette 1 are deformed. Broken feed switch 1 actua- Check visually and replace switch. tor. Defective feed switch 1. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Check if the upper paper feed clutch malfunctions. Run maintenance item U032 and select the upper paper feed clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with the upper paper feed clutch. Check (see page 1-4-51). Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. Check if the paper feed pul- Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys. ley, separation pulley or forwarding pulley of the cassette 2 are deformed. Broken feed switch 2 actua- Check visually and replace switch. tor. Defective feed switch 2. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 2 on and off manually. Replace feed switch 2 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Check if the lower paper feed clutch malfunctions. Run maintenance item U032 and select the lower paper feed clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with the lower paper feed clutch. Check (see page 1-4-51). 1-4-11 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem (4) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from optional cassette 3). Jam code 12 Causes/check procedures Corrective measures Optional paper feeder Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. Check if the paper feed pul- Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys. ley, forwarding pulley and separation pulley of optional cassette 3 are deformed. Broken feed switch 3 actua- Check visually and replace switch. tor. Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually. Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1. Check (see service manual of paper feeder). Optional 3000-sheet paper feeder Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. Broken feed switch 3 actua- Check visually and replace switch. tor. Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually. Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Check if the clutch malfunc- Run maintenance item U247 and select following clutch on the tions. touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2, paper feeder paper conveying clutch (5) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from optional cassette 4). Jam code 13 1-4-12 Electrical problem with clutch. Check (see service manual of 3000-sheet paper feeder). Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. Check if the paper feed pul- Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys. ley, forwarding pulley and separation pulley of optional cassette 4 are deformed. Broken paper feeder feed switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective paper feeder feed switch. With 5 V DC present at CN2-8 on the paper feeder main PWB, check if CN2-7 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when the paper feeder feed switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper feeder feed switch. Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 2. Check (see service manual of paper feeder). 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem (6) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from MP tray). Jam code 14 (7) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in 3000sheet paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section). Jam code 15 (8) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in 3000sheet paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section). Jam code 16 Causes/check procedures Corrective measures Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. Check if the MP paper feed pulley, MP forwarding pulley and MP separation pulley are deformed. Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys. Broken MP feed switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective MP feed switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn MP feed switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Check if the MP paper feed clutch malfunctions. Run maintenance item U032 and select MP paper feed clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with the MP paper feed clutch. Check (see page 1-4-51). Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. Check if the paper side guides are deformed. Check visually and replace. Defective paper path sensor 3. With 5 V DC present at CN6-12 on the paper feeder main PWB, check if CN6-11 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 3 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path sensor 3. Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 2. Check (see service manual of 3000-sheet paper feeder). Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. Check if the paper side guides are deformed. Check visually and replace. Defective paper path sensor 2. With 5 V DC present at CN6-9 on the paper feeder main PWB, check if CN6-8 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 2 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path sensor 2. Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1. Check (see service manual of 3000-sheet paper feeder). 1-4-13 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem (9) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in 3000sheet paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section). Jam code 17 Causes/check procedures Corrective measures Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. Check if the paper side guides are deformed. Check visually and replace. Defective paper path sensor 1. With 5 V DC present at CN6-6 on the paper feeder main PWB, check if CN6-5 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 1 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path sensor 1. Check if paper feeder paper conveying clutch malfunctions. Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper conveying clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with Check (see service manual of 3000-sheet paper feeder). paper feeder paper conveying clutch. (10) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in vertical paper conveying section). Jam code 18 Broken feed switch 1/2/3 actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn following switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Feed switch 1/2/3, registration switch Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers. Check visually and replace. (11) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in optional paper feeder vertical paper conveying section). Jam code 19 Broken feed switch 3 actua- Check visually and replace switch. tor. (12) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in MP tray vertical paper conveying section). Jam code 20 1-4-14 Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Broken paper feeder feed switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective paper feeder feed switch. With 5 V DC present at CN2-8 on the paper feeder main PWB, check if CN2-7 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when the paper feeder feed switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper feeder feed switch. Broken MP feed switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn following switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. MP feed switch, registration switch 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures (13) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in paper feed section). Jam code 21 Broken feed switch 1/2/3 or MP feed switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Feed switch 1/2/3, MP feed switch Broken paper feeder feed switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective paper feeder feed switch. With 5 V DC present at CN2-8 on the paper feeder main PWB, check if CN2-7 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when the paper feeder feed switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper feeder feed switch. Check if the clutch malfunc- Run maintenance item U247 and select following clutch on the tions. touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Upper paper feed clutch, lower paper feed clutch, MP paper conveying clutch Electrical problem with clutch. Check (see page 1-4-51). Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers. Check visually and replace. (14) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in vertical conveying section). Jam code 22 Broken feed switch 1/2/3 actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Feed switch 1/2/3 Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers. Check visually and replace. (15) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in bypass conveying section). Jam code 23 Broken MP feed switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. MP feed switch, registration switch (16) A paper jam in the paper conveying section is indicated during copying (jam in registration/transfer section). Jam code 30 Broken feed switch 1 actua- Check visually and replace switch. tor. Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Feed switch 1, registration switch The contact between the right and left registration rollers is not correct. Check visually and replace. 1-4-15 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem (17) A paper jam in the fuser section is indicated during copying (jam in fuser section). Jam codes 40 to 44, 46 and 47 Causes/check procedures Broken eject switch or feed- Check visually and replace switch. shift switch actuator. Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Eject switch, feedshift switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions. Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with the registration clutch. Check (see page 1-4-51). (18) Broken eject switch actuaA paper jam in the tor. eject section is indiDefective switch. cated during copying (jam in eject section). Jam code 50 (19) A paper jam in the eject section is indicated during copying (jam in optional job separator eject section). Jam code 51 (20) A paper jam in the feedshift section is indicated during copying (jam in feedshift section). Jam code 52 1-4-16 Corrective measures Check visually and replace switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Registration switch, eject switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions. Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with the registration clutch. Check (see page 1-4-51). Broken feedshift switch or job separator eject switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Feedshift switch, job separator eject switch Check if the feedshift solenoid malfunctions. Run maintenance item U033 and select the feedshift solenoid on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with the feedshift solenoid. Check (see page 1-4-51). Broken feedshift switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Feedshift switch, registration switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions. Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with the registration clutch. Check (see page 1-4-51). 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures (21) A paper jam in the switchback section is indicated during copying (jam in optional switchback unit). Jam code 53 Broken feedshift switch or switchback eject switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective feedshift switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on and off manually. Replace the feedshift switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Defective switchback eject switch. With 5 V DC present at CN5-2 on the switchback unit main PWB, check if CN5-4 on the switchback unit main PWB remains low when the switchback eject switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the switchback eject switch. (22) A paper jam in the duplex section is indicated during copying (jam in duplex paper conveying section 1). Jam code 60 Broken feedshift switch or duplex paper conveying switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Feedshift switch, duplex paper conveying switch (23) A paper jam in the duplex section is indicated during copying (jam in duplex paper conveying section 2). Jam code 61 Broken duplex paper conveying switch or feed switch 1 actuator. Check visually and replace switch. Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Duplex paper conveying switch, feed switch 1 (24) An original jams in optional DP is indicated during copying (no original feed). Jam code 70 Defective original feed switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Check if the original feed motor malfunctions. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. (25) An original jams in optional DP is indicated during copying (a jam in the original feed/conveying section). Jam code 71 Defective DP timing switch 2. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 2 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. (26) An original jams in optional DP is indicated during copying (a jam in the original feed/conveying section). Jam code 72 Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Original feed switch, original registration switch (27) An original jams in optional DP is indicated during copying (a jam in the original conveying section). Jam code 73 Defective DP timing switch 1. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 1 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. 1-4-17 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures (28) An original jams in optional DP is indicated during copying (a jam in the original registration section). Jam code 74 Defective original registration switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original registration switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. (29) An original jams in optional DP is indicated during copying (a jam in the original registration section). Jam code 75 Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Original registration switch, DP timing switch 1 (30) An original jams in optional DP is indicated during copying (a jam in the original feed/conveying section). Jam code 76 Defective DP timing switch 2. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 2 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. (31) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (jam between finisher and machine). Jam code 80 Defective paper entry sensor. Run maintenance item U241 and turn the paper entry sensor on and off manually. Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. (32) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (paper jam during paper insertion to the finisher). Jam code 81 3000-sheet document finisher/document finisher Extremely curled paper. Change the paper. Defective paper entry sensor. (3000-sheet document finisher) Run maintenance item U241 and turn the paper entry sensor on and off manually. Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. (Document finisher) With 5 V DC present at CN14-1 and CN14-3 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-2 and CN14-4 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper entry sensor. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Built-in finisher 1-4-18 Extremely curled paper. Change the paper. Defective paper conveying switch. With 5 V DC present at YC2-23 on the finisher control PWB, check if YC2-21 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying switch. Check if the feedshift roller or feedshift pulley is deformed. Check and remedy. 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem (33) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (finisher stapler jam). Jam code 82 (34) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (eject sensor stay jam). Jam code 83 Causes/check procedures Corrective measures 3000-sheet document finisher/document finisher Defective staple home posi- Run maintenance item U241 and turn the staple home position tion sensor. sensor on and off manually. Replace the sensor if indication of the corresponding sensor on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Built-in finisher The stapler is blocked with a staple. Remove the stapler cartridge, and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the stapler. Remove the staple if any. Defective stapler section. With 5 V DC present at YC2-24 on the finisher control PWB, check if YC2-19 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high. If it does, replace the stapler section. 3000-sheet document finisher Defective eject switch 1. Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 1 on and off manually. Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Document finisher Defective eject sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN5-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN5-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the eject sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the eject sensor. Check if the paper conveying motor malfunctions. Check and remedy. Check if the eject roller and eject pulley contact each other. Check and remedy. Check if the eject guide is deformed. Check and remedy. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Built-in finisher Defective paper conveying switch. With 5 V DC present at YC2-23 on the finisher control PWB, check if YC2-21 on the finisher control PWB remains low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying switch. Check if the feedshift roller or feedshift pulley is deformed. Check and remedy. (35) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (sub tray eject jam). Jam code 84 Defective eject switch 2. Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 2 on and off manually. Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. (36) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (sub tray eject jam). Jam code 85 Defective eject switch 3. Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 3 on and off manually. Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. 1-4-19 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures (37) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (internal tray paper entry sensor 1 jam). Jam code 86 Defective internal tray paper entry sensor 1. Run maintenance item U241 and turn internal tray paper entry sensor 1 on and off manually. Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. (38) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (internal tray paper entry sensor 2 jam). Jam code 87 Defective internal tray paper entry sensor 2. Run maintenance item U241 and turn internal tray paper entry sensor 2 on and off manually. Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. (39) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (main tray eject jam). Jam code 88 Defective sensor/switch. Run maintenance item U241 and turn the following switch on and off manually. Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Eject switch 1, side registration home position sensor 1/2, paper conveying belt position detection sensor (40) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (centerfold unit jam). Jam code 89 Defective sensor/switch. Run maintenance item U241 and turn the following switch on and off manually. Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Centerfold paper entry sensor, centerfold eject switch, centerfold paper detection switch (41) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (mail box jam). Jam code 90 Defective sensor/switch. Run maintenance item U241 and turn the following switch on and off manually. Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. Mail paper entry switch, tray eject sensor (42) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (eject sensor non-arrival jam). Jam code 92 Defective eject sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN5-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN5-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the eject sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the eject sensor. Check if the paper conveying motor malfunctions. Check. Check if the eject roller and eject pulley contact each other. Check and remedy. Check if the eject guide is deformed. Check and remedy. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. 1-4-20 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem Causes/check procedures (43) Defective reverse sensor. A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying Check if the reverse motor (reverse sensor jam). malfunctions. Jam code 93 Check if the reverse roller and reverse pulley contact each other. (44) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (paper entry sensor stay jam). Jam code 94 (45) A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying (paper conveying sensor jam). Jam code 95 Corrective measures With 5 V DC present at CN14-5 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-7 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the reverse sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the reverse sensor. Check. Check and remedy. Check if the reverse guide is deformed. Check and remedy. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Extremely curled paper. Change the paper. Defective paper entry sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN14-1and CN14-3 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-2 and CN14-4 on the main PCB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper entry sensor. Check if the paper entry guide is deformed. Check and remedy. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective paper conveying sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN4-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN4-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying sensor. Check if the paper conveying motor malfunctions. Check. Check if the paper convey- Check and remedy. ing roller and paper conveying pulley contact each other. Check if the paper conveying guide is deformed. Check and remedy. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. (46) Defective intermediate tray A paper jam in sensor. optional built-in finisher is indicated during copying (jam between finisher and machine). Jam code 96 With 5 V DC present at YC3-1 on the finisher control PWB, check if YC3-2 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the intermediate tray sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the intermediate tray sensor. 1-4-21 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-4-2 Self-diagnosis (1) Self-diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service. After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches off and back on. List of system errors When an unexpected error is detected for some reason, a system error will be indicated. After a system error is indicated, the error can be cleared by turning the main power switch off and then on. If the error is detected continuously, however, perform the operation shown in Table 1-4-1. If a system error occurs frequently, a fault may have occurred. Check the details of the C call to take proper measures. System error Contents Operation 0800 Image processing problem System error → Normal service call processing 1800 Paper feeder unit communication problem System error → service call → partial operation 4200 BD steady-state problem System error → Normal service call processing 8800 Document finisher communication problem System error → service call → partial operation 9000 DP communication problem System error → service call → partial operation Table 1-4-1 Partial operation control If any of the following calls for service is detected, partial operation control will be activated. After taking measures against the cause of trouble, run maintenance item U906 to reset partial operation control. Code 1-4-22 Contents C0170 Copy counts problem C0180 Machine number mismatch error 2GN/2GP/2GR (2) Self diagnostic codes Remarks Code Contents Causes Check procedures/corrective measures C0030 Fax control PWB system problem (optional fax) Processing with the fax software was disabled due to a hardware or software problem. Defective fax control PWB. Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation. C0060 Main PWB type mismatch error Defective PWB. Contact the Service Administrative Division. C0070 Fax control PWB incompatibility detection problem (optional fax) Fax software is not compatible with main software. FAX and the machine are not compatible. Use the FAX control PWB that is designed for use with the machine. C0130 Backup memory (EEPROM) device problem (Main PWB) Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed. Defective main PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. Device damage of EEPROM. Contact the Service Administrative Division. C0140 Backup memory (EEPROM) data Data damage of problem (Main PWB) EEPROM. Reading data from EEPROM is abnormal. Contact the Service Administrative Division. C0150 Backup memory device problem (Engine PWB) Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Device damage of EEPROM. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Backup memory data problem (Engine PWB) Reading data from EEPROM is abnormal. Read and write data does not match five times continuously. Problem with the backup memory data. Run maintenance item U022 to initialize the backup memory data. Defective engine PWB. If the C0160 is displayed after initializing the backup memory, replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Copy counts problem A checksum error is detected in the main and engine backup memories for the copy counters. Data damage of EEPROM. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Defective PWB. Replace the main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation. C0180 Machine number mismatch error Machine number of main PWB and engine PWB does not match. Data damage of EEPROM. Contact the Service Administrative Division. C0600 DIMM installed incorrectly DIMM is not installed correctly. DIMM installed incorrectly. Check if the DIMM is inserted into the socket on the main PWB correctly. C0610 DIMM problem The DIMM on the main PWB does not operate correctly. Defective main PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective DIMM. Replace the DIMM and check for correct operation. C0160 C0170 1-4-23 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C0630 DMA problem DMA transmission of compressed, decompressed, rotated, relocated or blanked-out image data does not complete within the specified period of time. Defective main PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. C0640 Hard disk drive problem The hard disk cannot be accessed. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC49 on the main PWB and the connector on the hard disk. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective hard disk. Run U024 (HDD formatting) without turning the power off to initialize the hard disk. Replace the hard disk drive and check for correct operation if the problem is still detected after initialization. Defective main PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. CF error for backup Optional data backup kit (CF) is not suitable as backup. CF installed incorrectly. Install CF correctly. Defective CF. Install normal CF. C0800 Image processing problem JAM05 is detected twice. Defective main PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. C0830 Flash ROM program area checksum error (optional fax) A checksum error occurred with the program in the Flash ROM on the fax control PWB. Defective fax control PWB. Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation. C0870 Fax control PWB to main PWB high capacity data transfer problem (optional fax) High-capacity data transfer between the fax control PWB and the main PWB was not normally performed even if the data transfer was retried the specified times. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC1 on the fax control PWB and YC4 on the interface PWB, connection of connector YC30 on the main PWB and YC6 on the interface PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective fax control PWB or main PWB. Replace the fax control PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation. C0880 Fax control PWB program archive problem (optional fax) When power is turned on, the compressed program in the Flash ROM on the fax control PWB was not successfully decompressed. Defective fax control PWB. Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation. C0920 Fax file system error (optional fax) The backup data is not retained for file system abnormality of flash memory of the fax control PWB. Defective fax control PWB. Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation. C0700 1-4-24 Causes Check procedures/corrective measures 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code C1010 C1020 Contents Upper lift motor error When cassette 1 is inserted, upper lift limit switch does not turn on within 12 s of upper lift motor turning on. Lower lift motor error When cassette 2 is inserted, lower lift limit switch does not turn on within 12 s of lower lift motor turning on. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector of upper lift motor and the connector YC13 on the engine PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Broken gears or couplings of upper lift motor. Replace upper lift motor. Defective upper lift motor. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace upper lift motor. Defective upper lift limit switch. Check if YC13-B9 on the engine PWB goes low when upper lift limit switch is turned off. If not, replace upper lift limit switch. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector of upper lift limit switch and the connector YC13 on the engine PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector of lower lift motor and the connector YC13 on the engine PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Broken gears or couplings of lower lift motor. Replace lower lift motor. Defective lower lift motor. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace lower lift motor. Defective lower lift limit switch. Check if YC13-B15 on the engine PWB goes low when lower lift limit switch is turned off. If not, replace lower lift limit switch. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector of lower lift limit switch and the connector YC13 on the engine PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. 1-4-25 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C1030 Paper feeder lift motor 1 error (optional paper feeder) When optional cassette 3 is inserted, paper feeder lift switch 1 does not turn on within 12 s of paper feeder lift motor 1 turning on. C1040 C1100 C1110 1-4-26 Paper feeder lift motor 2 error (optional paper feeder) When optional cassette 4 is inserted, paper feeder lift switch 2 does not turn on within 12 s of paper feeder lift motor 2 turning on. Paper feeder lift motor 1 error (optional 3000-sheet paper feeder) A motor over-current signal is detected continuously for 1 s or longer. Paper feeder lift motor 2 error (optional 3000-sheet paper feeder) A motor over-current signal is detected continuously for 1 s or longer. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Broken gears or couplings of paper feeder lift motor 1. Replace paper feeder lift motor 1. Defective paper feeder lift motor 1. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feeder lift motor 1. Defective paper feeder lift switch 1. Check if YC1-5 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 1 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift switch 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Broken gears or couplings of paper feeder lift motor 2. Replace paper feeder lift motor 2. Defective paper feeder lift motor 2. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feeder lift motor 2. Defective paper feeder lift switch 2. Check if YC1-7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 2 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift switch 2. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Paper feeder lift motor 1 does not rotate correctly (the motor is overloaded). Check the gears and remedy if necessary. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Paper feeder lift motor 2 does not rotate correctly (the motor is overloaded). Check the gears and remedy if necessary. 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C1120 Paper feeder left lift position problem (optional 3000-sheet paper feeder) Paper feeder switch 2 does not turn on within 30 s of paper feeder lift motor 1 turning on. C1130 C1800 C1900 Paper feeder right lift position problem (optional 3000-sheet paper feeder) Paper feeder switch 1 does not turn on within 30 s of paper feeder lift motor 2 turning on. Paper feeder unit communication problem (optional paper feeder/3000sheet paper feeder) No communication: there is no reply after 5 retries. Abnormal communication: a communication error (parity or checksum error) is detected five times in succession. Paper feeder EEPROM error (optional paper feeder) When writing the data, the write data and the read data is not continuously in agreement three times. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective paper feeder lift switch 2. Check if YC5-7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 2 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift switch 2. Defective paper feeder lift motor 1. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feeder lift motor 1. The paper feeder left lift does not rise properly. Check the gears and belts, and remedy if necessary. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective paper feeder lift switch 1. Check if YC5-4 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 1 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift switch 1. Defective paper feeder lift motor 2. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feeder lift motor 2. The paper feeder right lift does not rise properly. Check the gears and belts, and remedy if necessary. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Defective paper feeder main PWB. Replace the paper feeder main PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Defective paper feeder. Replace the paper feeder with another unit and check the operation. If the operation is normal, replace or repair optional paper feeder. 1-4-27 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code C2000 C2250 C2500 1-4-28 Contents Drive motor problem Stable OFF is detected for 1 s continuously after drive motor stability. Main charger cleaning motor error A locking error has been detected three times in a row during a reciprocating cleaning motion. Paper feed motor error Stable OFF is detected for 1 s continuously after paper feed motor stability. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC11 on the engine PWB and the connector on the drive motor, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective drive transmission system. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Defective drive motor. Replace the drive motor. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC9 on the engine PWB and the connector on the main charger cleaning motor, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective drive transmission system. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Defective main charger cleaning motor. Replace the main charger cleaning motor. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC11 on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feed motor, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective drive transmission system. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Defective paper feed motor. Replace the paper feed motor. 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code C2600 C3100 C3200 Contents Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Paper feeder paper conveying motor / paper feeder drive motor does not rotate correctly (the motor is overloaded). Check the gears and remedy if necessary. Defective PWB. Replace the paper feeder main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation. Defective motor. Replace the paper feeder paper conveying motor / paper feeder drive motor. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC4 on the scanner PWB and the connector on the scanner home position switch, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective scanner PWB. Replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation. Defective scanner home position switch. Replace the scanner home position switch. Defective scanner motor. Replace the scanner motor. The mirror frame, exposure lamp, or scanner wire is defective. Check if the mirror flames and exposure lamp are on the rail. And check the scanner wire winds correctly. Exposure lamp problem Poor contact in the After the reading starting, when input connector termivalue at the time of exposure lamp illumi- nals. nation does not exceed the threshold value between 5 s. Check the connection of connector YC6 on the scanner PWB and the connector on the inverter PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Paper feeder paper conveying motor error (optional 3000-sheet paper feeder) The lock signal of the motor is detected avobe 450 ms. Paper feeder drive motor error (optional paper feeder) The lock signal of the motor is detected avobe 500 ms. Scanner carriage problem The home position is not correct when the power is turned on or at the start of copying using the table. Defective scanner PWB. Replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation. Defective CCD PWB. Replace the CCD PWB and check for correct operation. Defective exposure lamp or inverter PWB. Replace the exposure lamp or inverter PWB. Incorrect shading position. Adjust the position of the contact glass (shading plate). If the problem still occurs, replace the scanner home position switch. 1-4-29 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C3210 CIS lamp problem After the reading starting, when input value at the time of CIS illumination does not exceed the threshold value between 5 s. C3300 C3310 C3500 CCD AGC problem After AGC, correct input is not obtained at CCD. CIS AGC problem After AGC, correct input is not obtained at CIS. Communication error between scanner and SHD An error code is detected. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the main PWB and the connector on the DP main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective DP main PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective DP inverter PWB. Replace the DP inverter PWB and check for correct operation. Defective CIS. Replace the CIS and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the SHD PWB and the connector on the CCD PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective exposure lamp. Replace the exposure lamp or inverter PWB. Defective PWB. Replace the SHD PWB or CCD PWB and check for correct operation. Defective DP main PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. CIS output problem. Replace the CIS and check for correct operation. Defective DP inverter PWB. Replace the DP inverter PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC3 on the scanner PWB and the connector YC4 on the SHD PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective PWB. Replace the scanner PWB or SHD PWB and check for correct operation. C3900 Backup memory read/write problem (scanner PWB) Read and write data does not match. Defective backup RAM or scanner PWB. Replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation. C3910 Backup memory data problem (scanner PWB) Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values. Problem with the backup memory data. Run maintenance item U022 to initialize the backup memory data. Defective scanner PWB. If the C3910 is displayed after initializing the backup memory, replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation. Polygon motor synchronization problem The polygon motor does not reach the stable speed within 20 s of the START signal turning on. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC8 on the engine PWB and laser scanner unit, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective polygon motor. Replace the laser scanner unit. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. C4000 1-4-30 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C4010 Polygon motor steady-state problem The polygon motor rotation is not stable for 20 s after the polygon motor rotation has been stabilized. C4200 C5300 C6000 C6020 C6030 Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC8 on the engine PWB and laser scanner unit, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective polygon motor. Replace the laser scanner unit. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC8 on the engine PWB and laser scanner unit, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective laser scanner unit. Replace the laser scanner unit. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Broken cleaning lamp wire While the cleaning lamp is on, the broken cleaning lamp wire detection signal is detected for 2 s continuously. Defective cleaning lamp. Replace the cleaning lamp. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Fuser heater break Fuser thermistor 1 is detected 40°C/ 104°F below with 10 s continuously during warm-up and ready in. Defective fuser heater M or S. Replace the fuser heater M or S. Installation defectiveness on fuser thermistor 1. Check the mounting state of the fuser thermistor 1. If any problem is found, repair it. Defective fuser thermostat. Replace the fuser thermostat. Defective PWB. Replace the power source PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation. Installation defectiveness on fuser thermistor 1 or 2. Check the mounting state of the fuser thermistor 1 or 2. If any problem is found, repair it. Defective fuser thermistor 1 or 2. Replace the fuser thermistor 1 or 2. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Installation defectiveness on fuser thermistor 1 or 2. Check the mounting state of the fuser thermistor 1 or 2. If any problem is found, repair it. Defective fuser thermistor 1 or 2. Replace the fuser thermistor 1 or 2. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. BD steady-state problem ASIC detects a BD error A for 2 s after the polygon motor rotation has been stabilized. Abnormally high fuser thermistor temperature Fuser thermistor 1 or 2 is detected 230°C/446°F or more for 40 ms. Fuser thermistor break error The thermistor break signal is detected continuously for 500 ms. 1-4-31 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C6050 Abnormally low fuser thermistor 3 temperature Fuser thermistor 1 is detected 100°C/ 212°F less than 1 s continuously during copying. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Defective fuser heater M or S. Replace the fuser heater M or S. Installation defectiveness on fuser thermistor 1. Check the mounting state of the fuser thermistor 1. If any problem is found, repair it. Defective PWB. Replace the power source PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation. C6400 Zero-cross signal error While fuser heater ON/OFF control is performed, the zero-cross signal is not input within 3 s. Defective PWB. Replace the engine PWB or power source PWB and check for correct operation. C6410 Fuser unit connector insertion problem Absence of the fuser unit is detected. Fuser unit connector inserted incorrectly. Reinsert the fuser unit connector if necessary. Defective fuser unit connector. Replace the fuser unit. C6420 C7300 C7400 C7410 C7800 1-4-32 Fuser unit fuse cut problem Poor contact in the The fuse in the fuser unit did not blow connector termiwithin three seconds. nals. Check the connection of connector YC10 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Fuser unit connector inserted incorrectly. Reinsert the fuser unit connector if necessary. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC9 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective toner container sensor. Replace the toner container sensor. Developing unit connector insertion problem Absence of the developing unit is detected. Developing unit connector inserted incorrectly. Reinsert the developing unit connector if necessary. Defective developing unit connector. Replace the developing unit. Drum unit connector insertion problem Absence of the drum unit is detected. Drum unit connector inserted incorrectly. Reinsert the drum unit connector if necessary. Defective drum unit connector. Replace the drum unit. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC14 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective humidity sensor. Replace the humidity sensor. Toner container problem Toner level is not detected when toner empty is detected. Broken external thermistor wire The thermistor output value is 4.5 V or more. 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code C7810 C7900 C7910 C8020 C8030 Contents Short-circuited external thermistor The thermistor input value is 0.5 V or less. Drum EEPROM error Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed. Developing unit EEPROM error Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed. Punch motor problem (optional 3000sheet document finisher) The LOCK signal of the punch motor is detected for more than 500 ms while the punch motor is operating. Tray upper limit detection problem (optional document finisher) When the tray elevation motor raises a tray, the ON status of the tray upper limit sensor is detected. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC14 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective humidity sensor. Replace the humidity sensor. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective drum unit. Replace the drum unit. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective developing unit. Replace the developing unit. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the punch PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective punch motor. Replace the punch motor. Defective PWB. Replace the punch PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. The tray upper limit sensor/push paper sensor/surface view sensor connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective tray Replace the sensor. upper limit sensor/ push paper sensor/ surface view sensor. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. 1-4-33 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C8050 Paper conveying belt motor 1 problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher) Paper conveying belt home position sensor 1 does not turn off within 1.5 s. Paper conveying belt home position sensor 1 does not turn on within 2.5 s. Jam 88 is indicated. C8060 C8070 1-4-34 Paper conveying belt motor 2 problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher) Paper conveying belt home position sensor 2 does not turn off within 1.5 s. Paper conveying belt home position sensor 2 does not turn on within 2.5 s. Internal tray communication error (optional 3000-sheet document finisher) Communication with the internal tray is not possible although the connection is detected. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC2 on the internal tray PWB and the connector on paper conveying belt motor 1, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective paper conveying belt home position sensor 1. Replace paper conveying belt home position sensor 1. Defective paper conveying belt motor 1. Replace paper conveying belt motor 1. Defective PWB. Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC6 on the internal tray PWB and the connector on paper conveying belt motor 2, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective paper conveying belt home position sensor 2. Replace paper conveying belt home position sensor 2. Defective paper conveying belt motor 2. Replace paper conveying belt motor 2. Defective PWB. Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC6 on the finisher main PWB and the connector YC1 on the internal tray PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective PWB. Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C8140 Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Main tray problem (optional 3000sheet document finisher) The main tray is not detected by the main tray top limit detection sensor or the main tray capacity detection sensor within 20s since the tray has started ascending. The main tray upper limit detection sensor or the main tray load detection sensor is not detected to be turned off in 20 seconds after the main tray has descended. The main tray low limit detection sensor is not detected to be turned on in 20 seconds after the main tray has descended. During main tray ascent, the main tray upper limit detection sensor or the main tray load detection sensor stays on for more than 2 s. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC6 on the finisher main PWB and the connector on the main tray motor, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective main tray motor. Replace the main tray motor. Defective main tray upper limit detection sensor/main tray load detection sensor/main tray lower limit detection sensor. Replace the sensor. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Tray elevation motor problem (optional document finisher) When the tray elevation motor is driving, the ON status of the tray lower limit sensor or surface view sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed. The tray elevation motor connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. The tray elevation motor malfunctions. Replace the tray elevation motor. The tray lower limit sensor/push paper sensor/surface view sensor connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective tray Replace the sensor. lower limit sensor/ push paper sensor/ surface view sensor. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. 1-4-35 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C8170 Side registration motor 1 problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher) When operation returned to a home position is performed at the time of initial operation and a home position is not detected even if 3 s passed. Jam 88 is indicated. Adjustment motor problem (optional document finisher) When the adjustment motor is driving, the ON status of the adjustment home position sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed. When adjustment operation starts, the ON status of the adjustment home position sensor is not detected. Finisher front side registration motor problem (optional built-in finisher) When the front-side registration homeposition sensor is turned on during initialization, the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses. When the front-side registration homeposition sensor is turned off during initialization, the sensor did not turn on in three seconds. 1-4-36 Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC2 on the internal tray PWB and the connector on side registration motor 1, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective side registration motor 1. Replace side registration motor 1. Defective PWB. Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. The adjustment motor connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective adjustment motor. Replace adjustment motor. The adjustment home position sensor connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective adjustment home position sensor. Replace the adjustment home position sensor. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. The front side reg- Reinsert the connector. Also check for contiistration motor con- nuity within the connector cable. If none, nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable. contact. Defective front side registration motor. Replace front side registration motor. The front side registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective front side registration home position sensor. Replace the front side registration home position sensor. Defective finisher control PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation. 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C8180 Side registration motor 2 problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher) When operation returned to a home position is performed at the time of initial operation and a home position is not detected even if 3 s passed. Jam 88 is indicated. Finisher rear side registration motor problem (optional built-in finisher) When the rear-side registration homeposition sensor is turned on during initialization, the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses. When the rear-side registration homeposition sensor is turned off during initialization, the sensor did not turn on in three seconds. C8190 Finisher trailing edge registration motor problem (optional built-in finisher) When the trailing edge registration home-position sensor is turned on during initialization, the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses. When the trailing edge registration home-position sensor is turned off during initialization, the sensor did not turn on in three seconds. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC8 on the internal tray PWB and the connector of side registration motor 2, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective side registration motor 2. Replace side registration motor 2. Defective PWB. Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. The rear side regReinsert the connector. Also check for contiistration motor con- nuity within the connector cable. If none, nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable. contact. Defective rear side registration motor. Replace rear side registration motor. The rear side registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective rear side registration home position sensor. Replace the rear side registration home position sensor. Defective finisher control PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation. The trailing edge registration motor connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective trailing edge registration motor. Replace trailing edge registration motor. The trailing edge registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective trailing edge registration home position sensor. Replace the trailing edge registration home position sensor. Defective finisher control PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation. 1-4-37 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C8210 Stapler moving motor 1 error (optional 3000-sheet document finisher) When operation returned to a home position is performed at the time of initial operation and a home position is not detected even if 1.5 s passed. Stapler problem (optional document finisher) When the stapler motor is driving, the ON status of the stapler home position sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed. Finisher stapler problem (optional built-in finisher) The stapler home position sensor does not change state from nondetection to detection within 200 ms of the start of stapler motor counterclockwise (forward) rotation. During initialization, the stapler home position sensor does not change state from non-detection to detection within 600 ms of the start of stapler motor clockwise (reverse) rotation. C8220 C8230 1-4-38 Stapler moving motor 2 error (optional 3000-sheet document finisher) When operation returned to a home position is performed at the time of initial operation and a home position is not detected even if 3.5 s passed. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC9 on the finisher main PWB and the connector of stapler moving motor 1, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective stapler moving motor 1. Replace stapler moving motor 1. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. The stapler connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. The stapler is blocked with a staple. Remove the stapler cartridge, and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the stapler. The stapler is broken. Replace the stapler and check for correct operation. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. The stapler connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. The stapler is blocked with a staple. Remove the stapler cartridge, and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the stapler. The stapler is broken. Replace the front stapler and check for correct operation. Defective finisher control PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC10 on the finisher main PWB and the connector of stapler moving motor 2, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective stapler moving motor 2. Replace stapler moving motor 2. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Stapler motor problem (optional 3000- Poor contact in the sheet document finisher) connector termiJam 82 is indicated. nals. Check the connection of connector YC10 on the finisher main PWB and the connector of stapler motor, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective stapler motor. Replace the stapler motor. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C8300 Centerfold unit communication error (optional centerfold unit of 3000-sheet document finisher) Communication with the centerfold unit is not possible although the connection is detected. C8310 C8320 C8330 C8340 Centerfold side registration motor 1 problem (optional centerfold unit of 3000-sheet document finisher) The home position is not detected when initial operation even if 1000 ms passed. Centerfold paper conveying belt motor problem (optional centerfold unit of 3000-sheet document finisher) The home position is not detected when initial operation even if 2500 ms passed. Blade motor problem (optional centerfold unit of 3000-sheet document finisher) The home position is not detected when initial operation even if 1500 ms passed. Centerfold staple motor problem (optional centerfold unit of 3000-sheet document finisher) Jam89 is indicated. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC22 on the finisher main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective centerfold unit set switch. Replace the centerfold unit set switch. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC6 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of centerfold side registration motor 1, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective centerfold side registration motor 1. Replace centerfold side registration motor 1. Defective PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC6/ YC7 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of centerfold paper conveying belt motor 1/2, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective centerfold paper conveying belt motor 1/2. Replace centerfold paper conveying belt motor 1/2. Defective PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC8 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of the blade motor, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective blade motor. Replace the blade motor. Defective PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC9 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of the centerfold staple motor, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective centerfold staple motor. Replace the centerfold staple motor. Defective PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. 1-4-39 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C8350 Centerfold side registration motor 2 problem (optional centerfold unit of 3000-sheet document finisher) The home position is not detected when initial operation even if 1000 ms passed. C8360 C8440 Centerfold main motor problem (optional centerfold unit of 3000-sheet document finisher) The motor lock signal is detected above 1000 ms during driving the centerfold main motor. Sensor adjusting problem (optional document finisher) The sensor cannot be adjusted within the specified range. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC7 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of centerfold side registration motor 2, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective centerfold side registration motor 2. Replace centerfold side registration motor 1. Defective PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC12 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of the centerfold main motor, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective centerfold main motor. Replace the centerfold main motor. Defective PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. The paper entry sensor connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective paper entry sensor. Replace the paper entry sensor and check for correct operation. The optical path of the paper entry sensor is blocked by foreign matter. Remove the foreign matter. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. C8460 EEPROM problem (optional document finisher) Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed. Defective EEPROM or finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. C8500 Mail box communication error (optional mail box of 3000-sheet document finisher) Communication with the mail box is not possible although the connection is detected. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of the connector of the mail box and the connector YC7 on the finisher main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective PWB. Replace the mail box main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. 1-4-40 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents C8510 Mail box drive motor problem (optional mail box of 3000-sheet document finisher) The motor lock signal is detected above 500 ms during driving the mail box drive motor. C8800 C8900 C8910 C8920 C8930 Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC2 on the mail box main PWB and the connector of the mail box drive motor, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective mail box drive motor. Replace the mail box drive motor. Defective PWB. Replace the mail box main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Document finisher communication problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher) No communication: there is no reply after 5 retries. Abnormal communication: a communication error (parity or checksum error) is detected five times in succession. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the finisher main PWB and the connector on the engine PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation. Backup memory data problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher) Read and write data does not match. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the finisher main PWB and the connector on the engine PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective finisher main PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the punch PWB and the connector YC4 on the finisher main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective punch PWB. Replace the punch PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the mail box main PWB and the connector YC7 on the finisher main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective mail box main PWB. Replace the mail box main PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector on the centerfold main PWB and the connector YC5 on the finisher main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective centerfold main PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB and check for correct operation. Backup memory data problem (optional punch unit of 3000-sheet document finisher) Read and write data does not match. Backup memory data problem (optional mail box of 3000-sheet document finisher) Read and write data does not match. Backup memory data problem (optional centerfold unit of 3000-sheet document finisher) Read and write data does not match. 1-4-41 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code C9000 C9040 C9050 C9060 C9070 C9080 1-4-42 Contents Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC7 on the scanner PWB and the connector of the DP, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective DP main PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Loose connection of the DP lift motor connector. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Malfunction of the DP lift motor. Replace the DP lift motor and check for correct operation. Malfunction of the DP lift upper limit switch. Replace the DP lift upper limit switch and check for correct operation. Loose connection of the DP lift upper limit switch connector. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective DP main PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Loose connection of the DP lift motor connector. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Malfunction of the DP lift motor. Replace the DP lift motor and check for correct operation. Malfunction of the DP lift lower limit switch. Replace the DP lift lower limit switch and check for correct operation. Loose connection of the DP lift lower limit switch connector. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective DP main PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. DP EEPROM error (optional DP) Read and write data does not match. Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values. Defective DP main PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Device damage of EEPROM. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Communication problem between DP and SHD (optional DP) A communication error is detected. Loose connection of the SHD PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective SHD PWB. Replace the SHD PWB and check for correct operation. Loose connection of CIS. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective CIS. Replace CIS and check for correct operation. DP communication problem (optional DP) A communication error is detected. DP lift motor going up error (optional DP) The pulse count raised to 10000 at lifting, however, the DP lift switch could not be turned on. After one time retry, the DP lift limit switch could not be turned on. DP lift motor going down error (optional DP) The pulse count lowered to 10000 at lifting down, however, the DP bottom limit switch could not be turned on. After one time retry, the DP bottom limit switch could not be turned on. Communication problem between DP and CIS (optional DP) Reading cannot be performed correctly. 2GN/2GP/2GR Remarks Code Contents F000 Operation panel PWB communication error Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Defective main PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective operation panel PWB. Replace the operation panel PWB and check for correct operation. F010 Main PWB checksum error Defective main PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. F020 Memory checksum error Defective main PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective expansion memory. Replace the expansion memory and check for correct operation. F030 Main PWB system error Defective main PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. F040 Engine PWB communication error Defective main PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Defective main PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective scanner PWB. Replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation. F041 Scanner PWB communication error F050 Engine ROM checksum error Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. F060 Engine RAM error Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. F070 Flash ROM error Defective flash ROM. Replace the flash ROM and check for correct operation. F080 Flash ROM error (during download) Defective flash ROM. Replace the flash ROM and check for correct operation. F090 Fax control PWB communication error Defective main PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. 1-4-43 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-4-3 Image formation problems (1)No image appears (entirely white). (2)No image appears (entirely black). See page 1-4-45. See page 1-4-45. (6)A black line appears longitudinally. (7)A black line appears laterally. See page 1-4-47. See page 1-4-47. (11)The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. (12)The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. See page 1-4-48. See page 1-4-48. (16)Fusing is poor. See page 1-4-49. 1-4-44 (17)Image is out of focus. See page 1-4-49. (3)Image is too light. See page 1-4-46. (8)One side of the copy image is darker than the other. See page 1-4-47. (13)Paper creases. See page 1-4-48. (18)Image center does not align with the original center. See page 1-4-50. (4)Background is visible. See page 1-4-46. (9)Black dots appear on the image. See page 1-4-47. (14)Offset occurs. See page 1-4-49. (19)Image is not square. See page 1-4-50. (5)A white line appears longitudinally. See page 1-4-46. (10)Image is blurred. See page 1-4-48. (15)Image is partly missing. See page 1-4-49. 2GN/2GP/2GR (1) No image appears (entirely white). Copy example Causes No transfer charging. Check procedures/corrective measures The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Check if YC7-10 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB. Defective high voltage PWB. Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-5 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the high voltage PWB. No LSU laser is output. Defective laser scanner unit. Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-5-21). Defective main PWB. Check if YC21-A3 on the main PWB goes low when maintenance item U100 is run. If not, replace the main PWB. No developing bias output. The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Check if YC7-1 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB. Defective high voltage PWB. Check if developing bias is output when CN1-14 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the high voltage PWB. (2) No image appears (entirely black). Copy example Causes No main charging. Exposure lamp fails to light. Check procedures/corrective measures Broken main charger wire. Replace the main charger unit (see page 1-5-25). Leaking main charger housing. Clean the main charger wire and grid. The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Check if YC7-4 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U100 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB. Defective high voltage PWB. Check if main charging takes place when CN1-11 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run. If not, replace the high voltage PWB. Poor contact in the expo- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the sure lamp connector ter- connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. minals. Defective inverter PWB. Check if the exposure lamp lights when YC1-3 on the inverter PWB goes low while maintenance item U061 is run. If not, replace the inverter PWB. Defective scanner PWB. Check if YC6-3 on the scanner PWB goes low when maintenance item U061 is run. If not, replace the scanner PWB. 1-4-45 2GN/2GP/2GR (3) Image is too light. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Insufficient toner. If the display shows the message requesting toner replenishment, replace the container. Deteriorated toner. Perform the drum refresh operation. Defective transfer charging output. The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Check if YC7-10 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB. Defective high voltage PWB. Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-5 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the high voltage PWB. (4) Background is visible. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Deteriorated toner. Perform the drum refresh operation. Dirty main charger wire. Clean the wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it (see page 1-5-25). (5) A white line appears longitudinally. Copy example 1-4-46 Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Foreign matter in the developing unit. Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly. Replace the developing unit if any foreign matter (see page 1-5-26). Dirty shading plate. Clean the shading plate. 2GN/2GP/2GR (6) A black line appears longitudinally. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Dirty contact glass. Clean the contact glass. Dirty or flawed drum. Perform the drum refresh operation. If the drum is flawed, replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-24). Deformed or worn cleaning blade. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-24). Dirty scanner mirror. Clean the scanner mirror. Dirty main charger wire. Clean the wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it (see page 1-5-25). (7) A black line appears laterally. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Flawed drum. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-24). Dirty developing section. Clean any part contaminated with toner in the developing section. Leaking main charger housing. Clean the main charger wire and grid. Leaking separation electrode. Clean the separation electrode. (8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Dirty main charger wire. Clean the wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it (see page 1-5-25). Defective exposure lamp. Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly. If not, replace the exposure lamp (see page 1-5-11). (9) Black dots appear on the image. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Dirty or flawed drum. Perform the drum refresh operation. If the drum is flawed, replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-24). Dirty contact glass. Clean the contact glass. Deformed or worn cleaning blade. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-24). Dirty drum separation claws. Clean the drum separation claws. Dirty the heat roller separation claws. Clean the heat roller separation claws. 1-4-47 2GN/2GP/2GR (10) Image is blurred. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Scanner moves erratically. Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner rails. If any, remove it. Deformed press roller. Replace the press roller (see page 1-5-30). Paper conveying section drive problem. Check the gears and belts and, if necessary, grease them. (11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Misadjusted leading edge registration. Run maintenance mode U034 to readjust the leading edge registration (see page 1-3-18). Misadjusted scanner leading edge registration. Run maintenance mode U066 to readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 1-3-24). (12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. Copy example Causes Feed clutch, paper feed clutch, MP paper feed clutch or registration clutch installed or operating incorrectly. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the installation position and operation of each clutch. If any of them operates incorrectly, replace it. (13) Paper creases. Copy example 1-4-48 Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Paper curled. Check the paper storage conditions. Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions. Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs. Defective separation. Check the drum separation claws and heat roller separation claws. 2GN/2GP/2GR (14) Offset occurs. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Defective cleaning blade. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-24). Defective fuser unit. Check the heat roller and press roller. Wrong types of paper. Check if the paper meets specifications. Replace paper. (15) Image is partly missing. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions. Paper creased. Change the paper. Drum condensation. Perform the drum refresh operation. Dirty or flawed drum. Perform the drum refresh operation. If the drum is flawed, replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-24). (16) Fusing is poor. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Wrong types of paper. Check if the paper meets specifications. Replace paper. Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs. Flawed press roller. Replace the press roller (see page 1-5-30). Flawed fuser heater. Replace the fuser heater (see page 1-5-31). (17) Image is out of focus. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Defective image scanning unit. Replace the image scanning unit (see page 1-5-18). Drum condensation. Perform the drum refresh operation. 1-4-49 2GN/2GP/2GR (18) Image center does not align with the original center. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Misadjusted image center line. Run maintenance item U034 to readjust the center line of image printing (see page 1-3-19). Misadjusted scanner center line. Run maintenance item U067 to readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 1-3-25). Original is not placed correctly. Place the original correctly. (19) Image is not square. Copy example Causes Laser scanner unit positioned incorrectly. 1-4-50 Check procedures/corrective measures Adjust the installation position of the laser scanner unit (see page 1-5-23). 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-4-4 Electric problems Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms. Problem (1) The machine does not operate when the main power switch is turned on. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures 1. The power cord is not plugged in properly. Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet. 2. No electricity at the power outlet. Measure the input voltage. 3. Broken power cord. Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord. 4. Defective main power switch. Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the main power switch. 5. Defective power source PWB. With AC present, check for 24 V DC at YC1-7 on the power source PWB, 5 V DC at YC1-6 and 3.3 V DC at YC1-5. If none, replace the power source PWB. 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. 2. Defective drive transmission system. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any. 3. Defective eject motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor operates. If not, replace the eject motor. 4. Defective engine PWB. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor operates. If not, replace the engine PWB. (3) The scanner motor or cooling fan motor 1 to 13 does not operate. 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. 2. Broken motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor. (4) The upper/lower paper feed clutch, feed clutch 1/2/3, MP paper feed clutch, MP feed clutch, registration clutch or duplex feed clutch does not operate. 1. Broken clutch coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the clutch. 2. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. 3. Defective engine PWB. Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on the engine PWB goes low. If not, replace the engine PWB. Upper paper feed clutch: YC14-B1 on the engine PWB Lower paper feed clutch: YC14-B4 on the engine PWB Feed clutch 1: YC11-14 on the engine PWB Feed clutch 2: YC13-A12 on the engine PWB Feed clutch 3: YC13-A5 on the engine PWB MP paper feed clutch: YC6-A9 on the engine PWB MP feed clutch: YC6-A11 on the engine PWB Registration clutch: YC14-B6 on the engine PWB Duplex feed clutch: YC10-B2 on the engine PWB (5) The feedshift solenoid or toner feed solenoid does not operate. 1. Broken solenoid coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the solenoid. 2. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. 3. Defective engine PWB. Run maintenance item U033 and check if the solenoid operates. If not, replace the engine PWB. (2) The eject motor does not operate. 1-4-51 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem (6) The exposure lamp does not turn on or off. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. 2. Defective scanner PWB. Run maintenance item U061 and check if YC6-3 on the scanner PWB goes low. If not, replace the scanner PWB. If YC6-3 on the scanner PWB is always low, replace the scanner PWB. 3. Defective inverter PWB. Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp turns on with YC1-3 on the inverter PWB go low. If not, replace the inverter PWB. If the exposure lamp does not turn off with YC1-3 on the inverter PWB high, replace the inverter PWB. 4. Defective exposure lamp. Replace the exposure lamp even if checking or correcting other measures. (7) Main charging is not performed. 1. Broken main charger wire. (See page 1-4-45.) 2. Leaking main charger housing. 3. The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. 4. Defective engine PWB. 5. Defective high voltage PWB. (8) No developing bias is output. 1. The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. (See page 1-4-45.) 2. Defective engine PWB. 3. Defective high voltage PWB. (9) Transfer charging is not performed. 1. The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. (See page 1-4-45.) 2. Defective engine PWB. 3. Defective high voltage PWB. (10) The original size is not detected correctly. 1-4-52 1. Original is not placed cor- Check the original and correct if necessary. rectly. 2. Poor contact in the original detection switch or original size detection sensor connector terminals. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. 3. Defective original detection switch. If the level of YC4-5 on the scanner PWB does not go low when the original detection switch is turned on and off, replace the original detection switch. 4. Defective original size detection sensor. Check if sensor operates correctly. If not, replace it. 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem Causes (11) The touch panel keys do not work. 1. Poor contact in the touch panel connector terminals. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. 2. Defective touch panel or main operation PWB. If any keys do not work after running the maintenance item U201 to initialize the touch panel, replace the touch panel or main operation PWB. (12) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the cassette 1/2 or MP tray. 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals of upper/lower paper switch or MP paper switch. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. 2. Defective upper/lower paper switch or MP paper switch. If the level of following terminal on PWB does not go low when the switch is turned on and off, replace the switch. Upper paper switch: YC13-B12 on the engine PWB Lower paper switch: YC13-B18 on the engine PWB MP paper switch: YC6-A6 on the engine PWB (13) The size of paper on the cassette 1/2 or MP tray is not displayed correctly. 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals of upper/lower paper size length switch, upper/ lower paper size width switch, MP paper size length switch or MP paper size width switch. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. 2. Defective upper/lower paper size length switch or MP paper size length switch. If the level of following terminal on PWB does not go low when the switch is turned on and off, replace the switch. Upper paper size length switch: YC13-B2 on the engine PWB Lower paper size length switch: YC13-A19 on the engine PWB MP paper size length switch: YC6-B11 on the engine PWB 3. Defective upper/lower paper size width switch or MP paper size width switch. If the level of following terminal on PWB does not change when the width guide in the cassette 1/2 or insert guide on the MP tray is moved, replace the switch. Upper paper size width switch: YC12-3, 4, 5 on the engine PWB Lower paper size width switch: YC12-9, 10, 11 on the engine PWB MP paper size width switch: YC6-A1, A2, A3 on the engine PWB 1. A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around feed switch 1/2/3, registration switch, feedshift switch, eject switch or duplex paper conveying switch. Check visually and remove it, if any. 2. Defective feed switch 1/ 2/3, registration switch, feedshift switch, eject switch or duplex paper conveying switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn each switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse. (14) A paper jam in the paper feed, paper conveying, fuser, eject or duplex section is indicated when the main power switch is turned on. Check procedures/corrective measures 1-4-53 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem Causes (15) The message requesting cover to be closed is displayed when the front cover or left cover 1/2 is closed. 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals of front cover switch, left cover 1 switch or left cover 2 switch. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. 2. Defective front cover switch, left cover 1 switch or left cover 2 switch. Check for continuity across each switch. If there is no continuity when the switch is on, replace it. (16) Others. 1. Wiring is broken, shorted or makes poor contact. Check for continuity. If none, repair. 1-4-54 Check procedures/corrective measures 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-4-5 Mechanical problems Problem (1) No primary paper feed. Causes/check procedures Corrective measures Check if the surfaces of the following rollers or pulleys are dirty with paper powder: upper/ lower forwarding pulleys, upper/lower paper feed pulleys, upper/lower separation pulleys, feed rollers, registration rollers, MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley. Clean with isopropyl alcohol. Check if the upper/lower forwarding pulleys, upper/lower paper feed pulleys or upper/lower separation pulleys is deformed. Replace the pulley if it is deformed (see page 1-5-2). Check if the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley or MP separation pulley is deformed. Replace the pulley if it is deformed (see page 1-5-4). Electrical problem with the following clutches: upper/lower paper feed clutches, feed clutches 1/2/3, MP paper feed clutch and MP feed clutch. See page 1-4-51. Check if the surfaces of the right and left registration rollers are dirty with paper powder. Clean with isopropyl alcohol. Electrical problem with the registration clutch. See page 1-4-51. Width guide in a cassette installed incorrectly. Check the width guide visually and correct or replace if necessary. Deformed width guide in a cassette. Check visually and replace any deformed guide. Check if a pressure spring along the paper conveying path is deformed or out of place. Repair or replace. (4) The scanner does not travel. Check if the scanner wire is loose. Reinstall the scanner wire (see page 1-513). The scanner motor malfunctions. See page 1-4-51. (5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. Check if the upper or lower separation pulley is worn. Replace the upper or lower separation pulley if it is worn (see page 1-5-2). Check if the MP separation pulley is worn. Replace the MP separation pulley if it is worn (see page 1-5-4). (2) No secondary paper feed. (3) Skewed paper feed. 1-4-55 2GN/2GP/2GR Problem (6) Paper jams. (7) Toner drops on the paper conveying path. Causes/check procedures Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper. Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Check visually and replace any deformed guides. Check if the contact between the right and left registration rollers is correct. Check visually and remedy if necessary. Check if the contact between the feed roller and feed pulley is correct. Check visually and remedy if necessary. Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or deformed. Clean or replace the press roller. Check if the contact between the heat roller and its separation claws is correct. Repair if any springs are off the separation claws. Check if the contact between the eject roller and pulley is correct. Check visually and remedy if necessary. The feedshift solenoid malfunctions. See page 1-4-51. Check if the duplex feed pulley, upper duplex feed roller or lower duplex feed roller is deformed. Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed. Check if the developing unit is extremely dirty. Clean the developing unit. (8) Check if the pulleys, rollers and gears operate Abnormal noise is heard. smoothly. Check if the following clutches are installed correctly: upper/lower paper feed clutches, feed clutches 1/2/3, MP paper feed clutch and MP feed clutch. 1-4-56 Corrective measures Grease the bearings and gears. Correct. 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-5 Assembly and Disassembly 1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly (1) Precautions Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk. When optional fax kit is installed, be sure to disconnect the modular code before starting disassembly. When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static charge. Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge. Use only the specified parts to replace the fuser unit thermostat. Never substitute electric wires, as the machine may be seriously damaged. When replacing battery on a PWB, dispose properly according to laws and regulations. When removing the hook of the connector, be sure to release the hook. (2) Drum Note the following when handling or storing the drum. When removing the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light. Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 0°C/32°F and 35°C/95°F and at a relative humidity not higher than 85% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity. Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum. Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it. (3) Toner Store the toner container in a cool, dark place. Avoid direct light and high humidity. 1-5-1 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-5-2 Paper feed section (1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys Follow the procedure below to replace the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys. Procedure Removing the primary paper feed units 1. Open the front cover and pull out the cassettes 1 and 2. 2. Remove the screw and remove the primary paper feed unit. Primary paper feed unit Figure 1-5-1 Removing the forwarding pulley 3. Remove the stopper from the primary paper feed unit. 4. Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the direction the arrow, and remove from the primary paper feed unit. Forwarding pulley retainer Stopper Figure 1-5-2 5. Remove the stop ring from the forwarding pulley retainer. 6. Remove the forwarding pulley from the forwarding pulley shaft. Forwarding pulley retainer Forwarding pulley shaft Stop ring Forwarding pulley Figure 1-5-3 1-5-2 2GN/2GP/2GR Removing the paper feed pulley 7. Remove two stop rings from the primary paper feed unit. 8. Pull the paper feed pulley shaft in the direction of the arrow and remove the paper feed pulley. Stop ring Stop ring Paper feed pulley shaft Paper feed pulley Figure 1-5-4 Removing the separation pulley 9. Remove the stop ring from the primary paper feed unit. 10. Pull the separation pulley shaft in the direction of the arrow and remove the separation pulley. Separation pulley shaft Stop ring Separation pulley Figure 1-5-5 11. Replace the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys. 12. Install the separation and paper feed pulleys to the primary paper feed unit. 13. Install the forwarding pulley to the forwarding pulley retainer. When refitting the forwarding pulley, orient it correctly as shown in Figure 1-5-6. 14. Refit the forwarding pulley retainer to the primary paper feed unit. 15. Refit the primary paper feed unit. Machine front Machine rear Forwarding pulley Figure 1-5-6 16. When the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley, separation pulley or the primary paper feed unit is replaced, perform maintenance mode U903 to clear the jam counter (see page 1-3-75). 1-5-3 2GN/2GP/2GR (2) Detaching and refitting the MP separation, MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys Follow the procedure below to replace the MP separation, MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys. Procedure Removing the MP unit 1. Remove four screws and remove the right lower cover. Right lower cover Figure 1-5-7 2. Remove two screws and two MP holder plates. 3. Remove two pins, two screws and two connectors, and then remove the MP unit. MP unit Connectors Pin MP holder plate Pin MP holder plate Figure 1-5-8 Removing the MP separation pulley 4. Reverse the MP unit and remove the spring and stop ring from the MP separation pulley shaft and move the bushing inside. Bushing MP separation pully shaft Spring Figure 1-5-9 1-5-4 Stop ring 2GN/2GP/2GR 5. Raise the MP separation shaft as shown in the figure, remove the holder plate and the bushing, and then remove the MP separation pulley. Take care not to remove the spring pin of the gear at the rear of the MP separation pulley shaft. If it is removed, refit it to its original position. Holder plate Bushing MP separation pully shaft MP separation pully Figure 1-5-10 Removing the MP paper feed pulley 6. Remove the connector of the MP paper switch and remove the wire from the three clamps. 7. Remove the screw and remove the MP unit cover. MP unit cover Clamps Connector Figure 1-5-11 8. Remove the stop ring and bushing on the front of the MP paper feed pulley shaft. Stop ring MP paper feed pully shaft Bushing Figure 1-5-12 1-5-5 2GN/2GP/2GR 9. Raise the MP paper feed pulley shaft as shown in the figure, remove the stop ring, and then remove the MP paper feed pulley. Stop ring MP paper feed pully shaft MP paper feed pully Figure 1-5-13 Removing the MP forwarding pulley 10. Remove the sponge. 11. Remove the stop ring and MP paper feed clutch. When refitting, insert the cutout in the MP paper feed clutch over the stopper on the machine. Stop ring Sponge MP paper feed clutch Figure 1-5-14 12. Remove the screw from the cam at the rear of the MP forwarding pulley shaft and move the cam and the bushing toward the inner side. Bushing MP forwarding pully shaft Cam Figure 1-5-15 1-5-6 2GN/2GP/2GR 13. Remove the stop ring of the MP paper feed pulley shaft and slide the bushing in the direction of the arrow. Stop ring Bushing MP paper feed pully shaft Figure 1-5-16 14. Slide the MP forwarding pulley shaft temporarily toward the rear side and then raise it to remove from the MP unit. Remove the shaft while raising the actuator of the MP paper switch. MP forwarding pully shaft Actuator Figure 1-5-17 15. Remove the bushing an cam on the rear of the MP forwarding pulley shaft. Cam Bushing MP forwarding pully shaft Figure 1-5-18 1-5-7 2GN/2GP/2GR 16. Remove the stop ring and slide the MP forwarding pulley with the forwarding pulley retainer from the shaft to remove it. 17. Replace the MP separation, MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys. Stop ring MP forwarding pully Forwarding pully retainer Figure 1-5-19 18. Install the MP forwarding pulley to the MP forwarding pulley shaft. 19. Refit the MP forwarding pulley shaft to the MP unit. 20. Install the MP paper feed pulley to the MP unit. 21. Refit the MP unit cover to the MP unit. When refitting the MP unit cover, the film on the cover is positioned under the MP paper feed pulley shaft. 22. Install the MP separation pulley to the MP unit. 23. Refit the MP unit. MP paper feed pully shaft Film Figure 1-5-20 24. When the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley or the MP separation pulley is replaced, perform maintenance mode U903 to clear the jam counter (see page 1-3-75). 1-5-8 2GN/2GP/2GR (3) Detaching and refitting the left and right registration cleaner Take the following procedure when the left or right registration cleaner is to be replaced. Procedure Removing the left registration cleaner 1. Open the left cover 1 and remove the transfer roller unit. (see page 1-5-27). 2. Remove two roller stoppers and remove the left registration roller. 3. Remove two registration guides. Registration guide Left registration roller Registration guide Roller stopper Roller stopper Figure 1-5-21 4. Remove the left registration cleaner 5. Replace the left registration cleaner and registration guides. Install the left registration cleaner and registration guides. 6. Refit the left registration roller, roller stoppers and transfer roller unit. Left registration cleaner Figure 1-5-22 1-5-9 2GN/2GP/2GR Removing the right registration cleaner 1. Remove the developing unit and drum unit. (see pages 1-5-26 and 24). 2. Remove the right registration cleaner. 3. Replace the right registration cleaner and Install the cleaner. 4. Refit the drum unit and developing unit. Right registration cleaner Frame Figure 1-5-23 1-5-10 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-5-3 Optical section (1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp as follows. Procedure 1. Remove the original cover or the DP. 2. Remove ten screws and remove the rear cover. Rear cover Figure 1-5-24 3. Remove two screws and remove the scanner right cover. 4. Remove the platen. Platen Scanner right cover Figure 1-5-25 5. Remove the connector of the inverter PWB. 6. Release the wire from the wire saddles and pull the connector out from the opening on the rear of the scanner unit. Opening Wire saddles Connector Figure 1-5-26 1-5-11 2GN/2GP/2GR 7. Remove the sponge from the wire guide and release the wire. 8. Move the mirror 1 frame to notch position and release the wire from the wire holder. Wire holder Wire Wire guide Sponge Figure 1-5-27 9. Remove the screw and remove the exposure lamp. 10. Replace the exposure lamp and install the lamp. 11. Refit the platen, scanner right cover and rear cover. Exposure lamp Figure 1-5-28 1-5-12 2GN/2GP/2GR (2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced. NOTE When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below. Machine front: (P/N: 302GR17110), gray Machine rear: (P/N: 302GR17100), black Fitting requires the following tools Two frame securing tools (P/N 302C968310) Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N 3596811) Procedure Detaching the scanner wires 1. Remove the exposure lamp (see page 1-511). 2. Remove the clip holder. 3. Open the front cover and left cover 1. 4. Remove four screws and remove front left cover. Clip holder Front left cover Figure 1-5-29 5. Remove the screw and pin and then remove the left upper cover. Left upper cover Pin Screw Figure 1-5-30 1-5-13 2GN/2GP/2GR 6. Remove two screws and remove the scanner left cover. Scanner left cover Figure 1-5-31 7. Remove each screw and then remove front and rear wire holder plates from mirror 1 frame. 8. Remove the mirror 1 frame. Mirror 1 frame Front wire holder plate Rear wire holder plate Figure 1-5-32 9. Remove the round terminals from the scanner wire springs on scanner unit left side. 10. Remove the scanner wire. Scanner wire springs Round terminal Round terminal Figure 1-5-33 1-5-14 2GN/2GP/2GR Fitting the scanner wires 11. Move the mirror 2 frame as shown in the figure and insert two frame securing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the machine center to fix the mirror 2 frame in position. Frame securing tool Mirror 2 frame Frame securing tool Figure 1-5-34 1-5-15 2GN/2GP/2GR 12. Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside of the scanner unit. (1) 13. Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from below to above. (2) 14. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit right, winding from above to below. (3) 15. Wind the scanner wires around the scanner wire drum five turns from the rear toward the hole in the drum. (4) 16. Insert the locating ball on the scanner wire into the hole in the scanner wire drum. (5) 17. Wind the scanner wires three turns from the inner toward the hole in the drum. (6) 18. Install the scanner wire stoppers to the scanner wire drum to fix the wires. (7) 19. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit left, winding from below to above. (8) 20. Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from below to above. (9) 21. Hook the scanner wires around the scanner wire guides at the machine left. (10) 22. Hook the round terminal onto the scanner wire spring. (11) Five turns from the rear toward Locating ball Three turns from the inner toward Three turns from the inner toward Figure 1-5-35 1-5-16 Five turns from the rear toward 2GN/2GP/2GR 23. Remove the two scanner wire stoppers and frame securing tools. 24. Focusing on the locating ball of the wire drum, move aside the wires to inside. 25. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in position. 26. Refit the mirror 1 frame. 27. Move the mirror 1 and 2 frames to the machine left, and insert the two frame securing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to secure the frames in position. 28. Hold the wires and fix each front and rear wire holder plate to mirror 1 frame with the screw. 29. Remove the two frame securing tools. 30. Refit the exposure lamp. Frame securing tool Mirror 2 frame Frame securing tool Mirror 1 frame Figure 1-5-36 1-5-17 2GN/2GP/2GR (3) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference) Follow the procedure below to replace the ISU. Fitting requires the following tools Two positions pins (P/N 1856812) Procedure Detaching the ISU 1. Remove the platen (see page 1-5-11). 2. Remove seven screws and then remove the ISU cover. ISU cover Figure 1-5-37 3. Remove three screws and two connectors, and then remove the ISU. 4. Replace the ISU. Connector Connector ISU Figure 1-5-38 1-5-18 2GN/2GP/2GR Fitting the ISU 5. Adjust the position of ISU to the frame hole of number and the same number which are recorded in the lens of ISU and then insert two positioning pins. Example: When a lens number is 5, move ISU so that the positioning hole of 5 of the number stamped in the scanner unit suit and insert two pins. 6. Remove two positioning pins after fixing ISU with three screws. 7. Refit two connectors and ISU cover. 8. Refit the platen. ISU Positioning pins Positioning holes Lens number Figure 1-5-39 1-5-19 2GN/2GP/2GR (4) Adjusting the position of the ISU (reference) Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed (lateral squareness not obtained). Caution: Adjust the amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller first (see page 1-3-20). Check for the longitudinal squareness of the copy image, and if it is not obtained, perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment. Before making the following adjustment, output a VTC-PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for the adjustment. Procedure Start Original Place the original on the platen. Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-5-40 Retighten the two screws and refit the platen. Press the start key and make a test copy at 100% magnification. Is the image correct? Yes No Remove the platen. Loosen the two screws and adjust the position of the mirror 2 frame. For copy example 1, move the frame in the direction of the white arrow ( ). For copy example 2, move the frame in the direction of the black arrow ( ). End Mirror 2 frame Screws Figure 1-5-41 1-5-20 2GN/2GP/2GR (5) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit Take the following procedure when the laser scanner unit is to be replaced. Procedure 1. Remove the developing unit and drum unit (see pages 1-5-24 and 26). 2. Remove the right lower cover and front left cover (see pages 1-5-4 and 13). 3. Remove four screws and remove the front right cover. Front right cover Figure 1-5-42 4. Remove three screws and remove the top tray. Top tray Figure 1-5-43 5. Remove five screws and remove the inner cover. Inner cover Figure 1-5-44 1-5-21 2GN/2GP/2GR 6. Remove two screws and two connectors, and then remove the fan duct. Connectors Fan duct Figure 1-5-45 7. Remove six screws and remove the toner container retainer. Toner container retainer Figure 1-5-46 8. Remove four screws and the connector, and then remove the laser scanner unit. 9. Replace the laser scanner unit and install the unit. 10. Refit the toner container retainer, fan duct and inner cover. 11. Refit the top tray, front right cover, right lower cover and front left cover. 12. Refit the drum unit and the developing unit. Connector Laser scanner unit Figure 1-5-47 1-5-22 2GN/2GP/2GR (6) Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit (reference) Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed (lateral squareness not obtained). Procedure Start Enter maintenance mode. Correct image Enter 993 using the numeric keys. Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-5-48 Press the start key. Refit the laser scanner unit and turn the main power switch on. Select PG2. Press the system menu key. Press the start key and make a copy at 100% magnification. Is the image correct? Yes Press the stop key to exit maintenance mode. No Turn the main switch off and carry out steps 1 to 7 of (5) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit (see page 1-5-21). For copy example 1: Loosen the screw in the direction of the white arrow ( ). Reduce the height of the LSU spacer in the direction of the white arrow ( ). For copy example 2: Tighten the screw in the direction of the black arrow ( ). Increase the height of the LSU spacer in the direction of the black arrow ( ). End Screw LSU spacer Figure 1-5-49 1-5-23 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-5-4 Drum section (1) Detaching and refitting the drum unit Follow the procedure below to replace the drum unit. Cautions: Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit. Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit. Procedure 1. Remove the developing unit (see page 1-526). 2. Remove the main charger unit (see page 15-25). 3. Remove the screw and the drum unit. 4. Replace the drum unit and install the unit. 5. Perform maintenance mode U110 to clear the counter value (see page 1-3-39). Drum unit Figure 1-5-50 1-5-24 2GN/2GP/2GR (2) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit Follow the procedure below to replace the main charger unit. Procedure 1. Remove the developing unit (see page 1-526). 2. Release the inserted part and remove the connector cover. 3. Remove the connector. Inserted part Connector cover Connector Figure 1-5-51 4. While pushing the hole with a sharp-pointed object, remove the main charger unit. Hole Main charger unit Figure 1-5-52 5. Release the inserted part and remove the cleaning motor unit from the main charger unit. 6. Replace the main charger unit. 7. Refit the cleaning motor unit to the main charger unit. 8. Install the main charger unit Main charger unit Inserted part Cleaning motor unit Figure 1-5-53 1-5-25 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-5-5 Developing section (1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit Follow the procedure below to replace the developing unit. Procedure 1. Open the front cover. 2. Remove the toner container and waste toner box. 3. Remove the pin and turn the developing release lever in the direction of the arrow. Developing release lever Pin Figure 1-5-54 4. Remove the developing unit. 5. Replace the developing unit and install the unit. 6. Perform maintenance mode U157 and U158 to clear the counter value (see page 1-3-41, 42). Developing unit Figure 1-5-55 1-5-26 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-5-6 Transfer section (1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller unit Follow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller unit. Procedure 1. Open the left cover 1. 2. While holding down the projection, slide the transfer roller unit toward the front to remove it. 3. Replace the transfer roller unit and install the unit. Transfer roller unit Projection Figure 1-5-56 1-5-27 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-5-7 Fuser section (1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fuser unit. Procedure 1. Remove the clip holder. 2. Open the front cover and left cover 1. 3. Remove four screws and remove front left cover. Clip holder Front left cover Figure 1-5-57 4. Remove the screw and remove the fuser unit. 5. Check or replace the fuser unit and install the unit. 6. Perform maintenance mode U167 to clear the counter value (see page 1-3-42). Fuser unit Figure 1-5-58 1-5-28 2GN/2GP/2GR (2) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws. Procedure 1. Remove the fuser unit. (see page 1-5-28) 2. Remove the two screws and remove the upper fuser cover while holding the four claws. Pin Upper fuser cover Pin Claws Claws Figure 1-5-59 3. Remove the heat roller separation claws from the upper fuser cover. 4. Replace the heat roller separation claws and install the claws to upper fuser cover. 5. Refit the upper fuser cover. 6. Refit the fuser unit. Heat roller separation claws Figure 1-5-60 1-5-29 2GN/2GP/2GR (3) Detaching and refitting the press roller Follow the procedure below to replace the press roller. Procedure 1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-28). 2. Remove the upper fuser cover (see page 15-29). 3. Remove the front and rear press springs. Press spring Press spring Figure 1-5-61 4. Remove the press roller from the fuser unit. 5. Replace the press roller and install the roller to fuser unit. 6. Refit the upper fuser cover. 7. Refit the fuser unit. Press roller Figure 1-5-62 1-5-30 2GN/2GP/2GR (4) Detaching and refitting the fuser heater Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser heater. Procedure 1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-28). 2. Remove the upper fuser cover (see page 15-29). 3. Remove two screws and two connectors. Connector Connector Figure 1-5-63 4. Pull out the fuser heater from the fuser unit. Fuser heater Figure 1-5-64 5. Replace the fuser heater and install the heater to fuser unit. 6. Refit the upper fuser cover. 7. Refit the fuser unit. 1-5-31 2GN/2GP/2GR (5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller. Procedure 1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-28). 2. Remove the upper fuser cover (see page 15-29). 3. Remove the press roller and fuser heater (see page 1-5-30 and 31). 4. Remove the fuser gear. Fuser gear Figure 1-5-65 5. Remove the heat roller from the fuser unit. Remove the C ring, gear, bearing and bushing on the rear side of the heat roller and remove the C ring, ground plate, bearing and bushing on the front side. 6. Replace the heat roller and install the roller to fuser unit. C ring Bushing Heat roller Gear Bearing Bearing Ground plate Bushing C ring Figure 1-5-66 7. Refit the fuser gear. 8. Refit the fuser heater, press roller and upper fuser cover. 9. Refit the fuser unit. 1-5-32 2GN/2GP/2GR (6) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit thermistor 1 and 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser unit thermistor 1 and 2. Procedure 1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-28). 2. Remove the upper fuser cover (see page 15-29). 3. Release the stopper of the fuser unit thermistor 1. 4. Remove the connector and remove the fuser unit thermistor 1. 5. Replace the fuser unit thermistor 1 and install the thermistor to fuser unit. Stopper Connector Fuser unit thermistor 1 Figure 1-5-67 6. Remove the press roller and fuser heater (see page 1-5-30 and 31). 7. Remove the heat roller (see page 1-5-32). 8. Remove the screw and the connector, and then remove the fuser unit thermistor 2. 9. Replace the fuser unit thermistor 2 and install the thermistor to fuser unit. 10. Refit the heat roller, fuser heater, press roller and upper fuser cover. 11. Refit the fuser unit. Connector Fuser unit thermistor 2 Figure 1-5-68 1-5-33 2GN/2GP/2GR (7) Adjusting front position of the fuser unit (adjusting lateral squareness) Follow the procedure below if the drum is not parallel to the fuser unit and therefore paper is not fed straight to the fuser section and the trailing edge of image on either the front or rear side becomes longer. Procedure Start Original Place the original on the contact glass. Figure 1-5-69 Press the start key and make a test copy at 100% magnification. Is the image correct? Yes End Copy example 1 Tighten the two screws. Refit the front left cover and close the front cover. No Open the front cover and remove the front left cover (see page 1-5-13). Loosen the screw holding each of the fuser unit and adjusting spacer. For copy example 1: Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the black arrow ( ) to raise the front position of the fuser unit. For copy example 2: Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the white arrow ( ) to lower the front position of the fuser unit. Fuser unit Screw Screw Adjusting spacer Figure 1-5-70 1-5-34 Copy example 2 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-5-8 Others (1) Detaching and refitting the ozone filter 1 and 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the ozone filter 1 and 2 Procedure 1. Remove the ozone filter 1 from the machine left side. Ozone filter 1 Figure 1-5-71 2. Open the filter cover of the machine rear side and remove the ozone filter 2. 3. Replace the ozone filter 1 and 2 and install the filter. Ozone filter 2 Filter cover Figure 1-5-72 1-5-35 2GN/2GP/2GR (2) Detaching and refitting the dust filter 1 and 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the dust filter 1 and 2 Procedure 1. Open the MP tray. 2. Remove the dust filter 1 and 2 from the machine. 3. Replace the dust filter 1 and 2 and install the filter. Dust filter 1 Dust filter 2 Figure 1-5-73 1-5-36 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement 1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main PWB, engine PWB, scanner PWB and MMI. Firmware upgrading requires the following tools: Compact Flash (Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended.) or USB memory NOTE When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer, be sure to format it in advance. Procedure 1. Press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. 2. Insert Compact Flash or USB memory in a notch hole of the machine. The Compact Flash must be inserted into the machine with its rear side facing up. 3. Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on. Upgrading firmware starts for 9 minutes. Caution: Never turn the main power switch off during upgrading. Compact Flash USB memory Figure 1-6-1 4. [Completed] is displayed on the touch panel when upgrading is complete. 5. Press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. 6. Remove Compact Flash or USB memory from the machine. 7. Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on. 1-6-1 2GN/2GP/2GR 1-6-2 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR) The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field. High voltage PWB: VR2, VR42, VR201, VR204 1-6-3 Remarks on main PWB replacement When replacing the main PWB, remove EEPROM from the main PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new main PWB. EEPROM Main PWB Figure 1-6-2 1-6-4 Remarks on scanner PWB replacement When replacing the scanner PWB, remove the EEPROM from the scanner PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new scanner PWB. EEPROM Figure 1-6-3 1-6-2 Scanner PWB 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-1 Mechanical construction 2-1-1 Paper feed section The paper feed section consists of the primary feed and secondary feed subsections. Primary feed conveys paper from the cassettes 1, 2 or MP tray to the left and right registration rollers, at which point secondary feed takes place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing. Each cassette consists of a lift driven by the lift motor and other components. Each cassette can hold up to 500 sheets of paper. Paper is fed from the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley. The separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time, via the torque limiter. Figure 2-1-1 Paper feed from the cassettes 1 and 2 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) Upper forwarding pulley Lower forwarding pulley Upper paper feed pulley Lower paper feed pulley Upper separation pulley Lower separation pulley Upper paper switch (PSW-U) Lower paper switch (PSW-L) Upper lift limit switch (LICSW-U) Lower lift limit switch (LICSW-L) Upper paper width switch (PWSW-U) Lower paper width switch (PWSW-L) Upper paper length switch (PLSW-U) Lower paper length switch (PLSW-L) Cassette lift Right registration roller (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) Left registration roller Registration switch (RSW) Feed roller 1 Feed pulley Feed switch 1 (FSW1) Feed roller 2 Feed pulley Feed switch 2 (FSW2) Feed roller 3 Feed pulley Feed switch 3 (FSW3) Front registration guide Paper conveying guide Vertical paper conveying guide 1 Vertical paper conveying guide 2 2-1-1 2GN/2GP/2GR The MP tray can be hold up to 200 sheets of paper at one time. Paper is fed from the MP tray by the rotation of the MP forwarding pulley and MP paper feed pulley. Also during paper feed, the MP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the torque limiter. Figure 2-1-2 Paper feed from the MP tray (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) 2-1-2 MP tray MP lift guide MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley MP separation pulley MP feed pulley MP feed roller 1 MP feed pulley (9) (10) (11) (12) MP feed roller 2 MP paper switch (MPPSW) MP feed switch (MPFSW) MP paper length switch (MPPLSW) (13) MP paper width switch (MPPWSW) 2GN/2GP/2GR EPWB RCL YC14-B6 RSW YC10-A2 FCL1 YC11-14 YC11-17 FSW1 PSW-U LICSW-U YC13-B9 PFCL-U YC13-B12 YC14-B1 YC13-A12 FCL2 PSW-L FSW2 LICSW-L YC13-B15 PFCL-L YC13-B18 YC14-B4 FCL3 YC13-A5 FSW3 YC13-A2 YC13-A7 Figure 2-1-3 Paper feed section block diagram (cassettes 1 and 2) MPPFCL MPFCL MPPSW YC6-A9 YC6-A6 YC6-A11 YC9-A2 MPFSW EPWB Figure 2-1-4 Paper feed section block diagram (MP tray) 2-1-3 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-1-2 Main charging section The main charging section consists of the main charger assembly, drum and so on. The drum is electrically charged uniformly by means of a grid to form a latent image on the surface. The main charger unit charges the drum so that a latent image is formed on the surface, the shield grid ensuring the charge is applied uniformly. In addition, the main charger unit is equipped with the main charger cleaning motor, and it is cleaning automatically. Main charger unit Tungsten wire Drum Shield grid Figure 2-1-5 Main charging section MCCM_FWD/REV YC9-B13,B14 YC7-4 MHVDR MCCM MC YC1-11 Grid EPWB HVTPWB Drum ZENER PWB Figure 2-1-6 Main charging section block diagram 2-1-4 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-1-3 Optical section The optical section consists of the scanner, mirror frame and image scanning unit for scanning and the laser scanner unit for printing. Figure 2-1-7 Optical section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) Mirror 1 frame Mirror 2 frame Exposure lamp (EL) Mirror 1 Mirror 2 Mirror 3 Lens CCD PWB (CCDPWB) Image scanning unit Laser scanner unit (LSU) 2-1-5 2GN/2GP/2GR (1) Original scanning The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD PWB (CCDPWB) in the image scanning unit via the three mirrors, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal. The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side. The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner. When the DP is used, the scanner and mirror frames stop at the DP original scanning position to start scanning. ODSW SHPSW YC4-5 YC4-8 YC9-1YC9-4 YC6-3 LAMP ON EL INPWB CCDPWB Image data OSDS SM YC4-2 Original CN1-3 YC3 SHDPWB YC18 YC20 Image data Serial communication YC5 SPWB MPWB Figure 2-1-8 Optional section block diagram 2-1-6 2GN/2GP/2GR (2) Image printing The image data scanned by the CCD PWB (CCDPWB) is processed on the main PWB (MPWB) and transmitted as image printing data to the laser scanner unit (LSU). By repeatedly turning the laser on and off, the laser scanner unit forms a latent image on the drum surface. Figure 2-1-9 Laser scanner unit (1) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) Laser diode PWB (LDPWB) Collimator lens Cylindrical lens Polygon motor (PM) Polygon mirror fθ lens Mirror Mirror BD sensor mirror Cylindrical correcting lens BD sensor 2-1-7 2GN/2GP/2GR Drum Figure 2-1-10 Laser scanner unit (2) 1. 2. Laser diode: Generates the laser beam which forms a latent image on the drum. Collimator lens: Collimates the diffused laser beam emitted from the laser diode to convert it into a cylindrical beam. 3. Cylindrical lens: Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the printing resolution. 4. Polygon mirror: Nine-facet mirror that rotates with each face reflecting the laser beam toward the drum for one main-direction scan. 5. fθ lens: Corrects for non-linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface, keeps the beam diameter constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beam is on the drum surface. 6. Mirror: Reflects the laser beam and changes the irradiation direction. 7. Mirror: Reflects the laser beam and changes the irradiation direction. 8. BD sensor mirror: Reflects the laser beam to the BD sensor to generate the main-direction (horizontal) sync signal. 9. Cylindrical correcting lens: Corrects for the deviation of the laser beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror to the BD sensor. 10. BD sensor: Detects the beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror, outputting a signal to the main PWB (MPWB) to provide timing for the main-direction sync signal. 2-1-8 2GN/2GP/2GR The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 2-1-11. Less than 100 µm Less than 85 µm Figure 2-1-11 Scanning in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror, while scanning in the auxiliary direction is provided by the rotating drum, forming a static latent image on the drum. The static latent image of the letter “A”, for example, is formed on the drum surface as shown in Figure 2-1-12. Electrical charge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface irradiated by the laser. The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line, and adjacent lines slightly overlap each other. Main scanning direction Auxilary scanning direction : laser beam is on Figure 2-1-12 2-1-9 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-1-4 Developing section The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner container. The developing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed, the doctor blade and the developing spirals that agitate the toner. When the toner sensor (TNS) detects a low toner level in the developing unit, the toner replenishment signal is output to the engine PWB (EPWB). The engine PWB (EPWB) that has received the signal turns on the toner replenishment solenoid (TNFSOL) and replenishes toner from the toner container to the developing unit. Also, the toner container sensor (TCS) checks whether or not toner remains in the toner container. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Developing unit housing Developing roller Toner sensor (TNS) Doctor blade Right developing spiral Left developing spiral Figure 2-1-13 Developing section Developing roller Left developing spiral Right developing spiral Developing paddle Flow of the toner Figure 2-1-14 Flow of the toner 2-1-10 2GN/2GP/2GR YC9-A5 YC9-B2 TCS TNFSOL TCS TNFSOL EPWB TNS YC9-A9 YC7-1 YC7-9 TNS SIG BVSEL1 BVSEL2 YC1-14 YC1-6 DB HVTPWB Figure 2-1-15 Developing section block diagram 2-1-11 2GN/2GP/2GR (1) Single component developing system This machine uses the single component developing system, and reversal processing is performed with a + charged drum (a-Si) and a + charged magnetic toner. With the single component developing system, toner is electrically charged by friction with the developing sleeve and + charged when it passes through the magnetic toner blade. The toner that has passed through the magnetic toner blade forms a uniform layer on the developing sleeve. When the toner layer comes to the location where the developing sleeve is the nearest to the drum, toner moves between the drum and the developing sleeve by an electric field of the magnetic pole. Then, when the developing sleeve rotates and passes through the nearest location to the drum, on the portion of the drum that has been exposed to light, toner is attracted toward the drum by potential difference between the developing bias and the drum surface and development is performed. On the other hand, on the portion of the drum that has not been exposed to light, toner is attracted toward the sleeve and development is not performed. When toner comes to an area where the gap between the drum and the developing sleeve is large, an electric field disappears and toner does not leave the developing sleeve. Development is complete. Magnetic toner blade Toner South pole Drum North pole Developing sleeve Figure 2-1-16 Single component developing system 2-1-12 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections The transfer and separation section consists mainly of the transfer roller, separation electrode and drum separation claws. A high voltage generated by the high-voltage transformer PWB (HVTPWB) is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging. Paper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying separation bias that is output from the high-voltage transformer PWB (HVTPWB) to the separation electrode. Drum separation claw Separation electrode Drum Transfer roller Figure 2-1-17 Transfer and separation sections SC YC7-10 YC7-6 THVDR RHVDR Separation electrode Drum YC1-5 Transfer roller YC1-9 TC HVTPWB EPWB Figure 2-1-18 Transfer and separation sections block diagram 2-1-13 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-1-6 Cleaning and charge erasing sections The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transfer process, and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner box. The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging. Also the toner quantity in the waste toner box is sensed with the overflow sensor (OFS). Cleaning spiral Cleaning lamp (CL) Cleaning roller Cleaning blade Drum Figure 2-1-19 Cleaning and charge erasing sections CL CL YC9-B7 Drum EPWB OFS OFS YC6-B4 Figure 2-1-20 Cleaning and charge erasing sections block diagram 2-1-14 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-1-7 Fuser section The fuser section consists of the parts shown in Figure 2-1-21. When paper reaches the fuser section after the transfer process, it passes between the press roller and heat roller, which is heated by fuser heaters M or S (FH-M or FH-S). Pressure is applied by the fuser unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted, fused and fixed onto the paper. The heat roller is heated by fuser heaters M or S (FH-M or FH-S) inside it; its surface temperature is detected by the fuser unit thermistor 1 and 2 (FTH1/2), and is regulated by the fuser heaters turning on and off. If the fuser section becomes abnormally hot, fuser unit thermostat 1 and 2 (FTS1/2) operates shutting the power to the fuser heaters off. When the fusing process is completed, the paper is separated from the heat roller by its separation claws and is conveyed from the machine to eject and switchback section. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) Upper fuser unit cover Fuser housing Heat roller Heat roller separation claw Fuser heater M (FH-M) Fuser heater S (FH-S) Fuser unit thermostat 1 (FTS1) Fuser unit thermostat 2 (FTS2) Fuser unit thermistor 1 (FTH1) Fuser unit thermistor 2 (FTH2) Press roller Press roller separation claw Figure 2-1-21 Fuser section FTS2 FTS1 Heat roller ILSW YC5-2 FH-S YC5-1 FH-M YC5-3 FTH2 PSPWB YC10-A10 FTH1 YC10-A6 EPWB FTH2 YC2-2 FH-S ON YC1-5 YC1-4 FH-M ON YC2-3 FTH1 Figure 2-1-22 Fuser section block diagram 2-1-15 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-1-8 Eject and switchback sections The eject and switchback sections eject paper on which fixing has ended with the eject roller that is rotated by forward rotation of the eject motor. In duplex copying, paper is turned over by reverse rotation of the eject motor. When paper is transferred to the job separator or the internal finisher, the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) is turned on to activate the feedshift guide to switch the paper transfer path. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Feedshift guide Eject roller Eject pulley Switchback roller Switchback pulley Eject switch (ESW) Feedshift switch (FSSW) Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) Figure 2-1-23 Eject and switchback sections EM FSSW FSSOL YC14-A11 YC14-B11YC14-B14 YC14-A1YC14-A2 YC14-A5 ESW EPWB Figure 2-1-24 Eject and switchback sections block diagram 2-1-16 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-1-9 Duplex section The duplex section consists of the components shown in figure. In duplex mode, after copying on to the reverse face of the paper, the paper is reversed in the switchback section and conveyed to the duplex section. The paper is then conveyed to the paper feed section by the upper and lower duplex feed rollers. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Feedshift guide Upper duplex feed roller Lower duplex feed roller Duplex feed pulley Duplex feed pulley Duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) Figure 2-1-25 Duplex section EPWB DUPPCSW YC10-B4 DUPFCL YC10-B2 Figure 2-1-26 Duplex section block diagram 2-1-17 2GN/2GP/2GR (1) Paper conveying operation in duplex copying Paper of which copying onto the reverse side is complete is conveyed to the switchback section, the eject motor switches from normal rotation to reverse rotation to switch the eject roller to reverse rotation, and the paper conveying direction is reversed. Paper that has been switched back is conveyed to the duplex section via the eject roller and the switchback roller. Paper that has been conveyed to the duplex section is conveyed to the paper feed section again by rotation of the upper duplex feed roller and the lower duplex feed roller and copying onto the front side is performed. Eject roller Switchback roller Eject roller Eject roller Upper duplex feed roller Lower duplex feed roller Copying onto reverse side (normal rotation of eject motor) Switchback operation (reverse rotation of eject motor) Copying onto front side (normal rotation of eject motor) Paper path Figure 2-1-27 2-1-18 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-2 Electrical Parts Layout 2-2-1 Electrical parts layout (1) PWBs 12 11 9 5 6 13 10 14 8 7 2 1 4 15 3 Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-1 PWBs 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Engine PWB (EPWB)................................... Controls the other PWBs, electrical components and optional devices. Main PWB (MPWB) ..................................... Controls the image processing and operation panel. Power source PWB (PSPWB) ..................... Generates +24 V DC, 12 V DC and 5V DC; controls the fuser heater. High voltage PWB (HVTPWB) ..................... Main charging. Generates developing bias and high voltages for transfer. Scanner PWB (SPWB) ................................ Controls the scanning section. Inverter PWB (INPWB) ................................ Controls the exposure lamp. SHD PWB (SHDPWB) ................................. Controls the shading correction and AGC of CCD. CCD PWB (CCDPWB)................................. Reads the image off originals. Main operation unit PWB (OPWB-M)........... Controls touch panel and LCD indication. Right operation unit PWB (OPWB-R) .......... Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs. Left operation unit PWB (OPWB-L) ............. Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs. Upper operation unit PWB (OPWB-U) ......... Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs. Front operation unit PWB (OPWB-F)........... Consists of the display LEDs. LCD inverter PWB (LINPWB) ...................... Controls LCD indication. Laser diode PWB (LDPWB)......................... Generates and controls the laser light. 2-2-1 2GN/2GP/2GR (2) Switches and sensors 21 20 3 22 2 25 35 24 33 32 28 31 27 14 37 4 26 30 1 23 34 13 29 19 16 15 7 5 11 17 9 8 Machine front 6 36 12 10 18 Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Main power switch (MSW) ........................... Turns the AC power on and off. Interlock switch (ILSW) ................................ Turns the AC power for the fuser heater on and off. Safety switch 1 (SSW1) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the left cover 1 is opened. Safety switch 2 (SSW2) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened. Upper paper switch (PSW-U)....................... Detects the presence of paper in the cassette 1. Lower paper switch (PSW-L) ....................... Detects the presence of paper in the cassette 2. Upper lift limit switch (LICSW-U).................. Detects the cassette 1 lift reaching the upper limit. Lower lift limit switch (LICSW-L) .................. Detects the cassette 2 lift reaching the upper limit. Upper paper size length switch (PLSW-U) .................................................... Detects the length of paper in the cassette 1. Lower paper size length switch (PLSW-L) ..................................................... Detects the length of paper in the cassette 2. Upper paper size width switch (PWSW-U) ................................................... Detects the width of paper in the cassette 1. Lower paper size width switch (PWSW-L) .................................................... Detects the width of paper in the cassette 2. MP paper switch (MPPSW) ......................... Detects the presence of paper on the MP tray. MP paper size length switch (MPPLSW) ................................................... Detects the length of paper on the MP tray. MP paper size width switch (MPPWSW).................................................. Detects the width of paper on the MP tray. 2-2-2 2GN/2GP/2GR 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. Feed switch 1 (FSW1) ................................. Controls feed clutch 1 drive timing. Feed switch 2 (FSW2) ................................. Controls feed clutch 2 drive timing Feed switch 3 (FSW3) ................................. Controls feed clutch 3 drive timing MP feed switch (MPFSW)............................ Controls MP feed clutch drive timing Scanner home position switch (SHPSW)..... Detects the optical system in the home position. Original detection switch (ODSW) ............... Operates the original size detection sensor. Original size detection sensor (OSDS) ........ Detects the size of the original. Registration switch (RSW) ........................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing. Eject switch (ESW) ...................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser section. Feedshift switch (FSSW) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback section in a duplex copy. Toner sensor (TNS)...................................... Detects the toner density in the developing unit. Toner container detection switch (TCDSW) ..................................................... Detects the presence of the toner container. Toner container sensor (TCS) ...................... Detects the quantity of toner in a toner container. Waste toner box detection switch (WTDSW)..................................................... Detects the presence of the waste toner box. Overflow sensor (OFS) ................................ Detects when the waste toner box is full. Humidity sensor (HUMS) ............................. Detects absolute humidity. Fuser unit thermistor 1 (FTH1)..................... Detects the heat roller temperature. Fuser unit thermistor 2 (FTH2)..................... Detects the heat roller temperature. Front cover switch (FRCSW) ....................... Detects the opening and closing of the front cover. Left cover 1 switch (LC1SW) ....................... Detects the opening and closing of the left cover 1. Left cover 2 switch (LC2SW) ....................... Detects the opening and closing of the left cover 2. Duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) ................................................ Detects a paper jam in the duplex section. 2-2-3 2GN/2GP/2GR (3) Motors 5 13 6 9 12 7 8 14,15,16 1 21 17,18,19 11 20 2 10 3 Machine front 4 Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-3 Motors 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. Drive motor (DM) ......................................... Drives the machine. Paper feed motor (PFM) .............................. Drives paper feed section. Upper lift motor (LM-U) ................................ Drives cassette 1 lift. Lower lift motor (LM-L) ................................. Drives cassette 2 lift. Scanner motor (SM)..................................... Drives the optical system. Eject motor (EM) .......................................... Drives the eject section. Cooling fan motor 1 (CFM1) ........................ Cools the machine interior. Cooling fan motor 2 (CFM2) ........................ Cools the machine interior. Cooling fan motor 3 (CFM3) ........................ Cools the machine interior. Cooling fan motor 4 (CFM4) ........................ Cools the machine interior (around the power supply unit). Cooling fan motor 5 (CFM5) ........................ Cools the machine interior (around the LSU). Cooling fan motor 6 (CFM6) ........................ Cools the machine interior (controller box). Cooling fan motor 7 (CFM7) ........................ Cools the machine interior (operation panel). Cooling fan motor 8 (CFM8).......................... Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying. Cooling fan motor 9 (CFM9) ......................... Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying. Cooling fan motor 10 (CFM10)..................... Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying. Cooling fan motor 11 (CFM11) ..................... Cools the machine interior (around the paper conveying). Cooling fan motor 12 (CFM12) .................... Cools the machine interior (around the paper conveying). Cooling fan motor 13 (CFM13) .................... Cools the machine interior (around the paper conveying). Polygon motor (PM) ..................................... Drives the polygon mirror. Main charger cleaning motor (MCCM)......... Drives the main charger auto cleaning. 2-2-4 2GN/2GP/2GR (4) Other electrical components 12 18 10 15 14 16,17 11 13 9 8 7 6 3 1 4 Machine front 2 Machine inside 5 19 Machine rear Figure 2-2-4 Other electrical components 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. Upper paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL-U) ........... Primary paper feed from the cassette 1. Lower paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL-L) ............ Primary paper feed from the cassette 2. Feed clutch 1 (FCL1) ................................... Controls the drive of feed roller. Feed clutch 2 (FCL2) ................................... Controls the drive of feed roller. Feed clutch 3 (FCL3) ................................... Controls the drive of feed roller. MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) ................. Primary paper feed from the MP tray. MP feed clutch (MPFCL).............................. Controls the drive of MP feed roller. Registration clutch (RCL)............................. Secondary paper feed. Duplex feed clutch (DUPFCL)...................... Controls the drive of the duplex feed roller. Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)......................... Operates the feedshift guide. Toner feed solenoid (TNFSOL) .................... Replenishes toner. Exposure lamp (EL) ..................................... Exposes originals. Cleaning lamp (CL) ...................................... Removes residual charge from the drum surface. Fuser heater M (FH-M) ................................ Heats the heat roller. Fuser heater S (FH-S) ................................. Heats the heat roller. Fuser unit thermostat 1 (FTS1) .................... Prevents overheating in the fuser section. Fuser unit thermostat 2 (FTS2) .................... Prevents overheating in the fuser section. Hard disk unit (HDD).................................... Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode. Cassette heater (CH) ................................... Dehumidifies the cassette section. 2-2-5 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-2-6 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-3 Operation of the PWBs 2-3-1 Power source PWB MSW TB3 TB4 Power source PWB +24VD +24VDF F201 TB2 F101 LIVE L101 F202 Switching regulator NEUTRAL +12VD +5V +5VD +5VDF F203 Zero-cross signal output circuit +3R3VD SLEEP ZCROSS CFM4 Heater control circuit FH-M FH-S L102 F102 AC input TB1 FH-M Fuser heater FH-S F103 FH LIVE Cassette heater Figure 2-3-1 Power source PWB diagram 1 3 1 6 1 2 YC2 YC4 YC5 1 YC1 7 1 YC9 7 1 TB4 YC6 14 TB3 1 YC3 TB1 6 1 YC8 YC7 1 3 TB2 YC10 16 10 1 Figure 2-3-2 Power source PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-1 2GN/2GP/2GR Connector TB Connected to the AC inlet Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description TB1 LIVE I 120 V AC 220-240 V AC AC power input TB2 COM I 120 V AC 220-240 V AC AC power input TB3 LIVE I 120 V AC 220-240 V AC AC power output TB4 LIVE O 120 V AC 220-240 V AC AC power input YC1 1 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output Connected to the engine PWB 2 GND - - Ground 3 GND - - Ground 4 GND - - Ground 5 +3.3VD O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output 6 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 7 +24VD O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output YC2 1 GND - - Ground Connected to the engine PWB 2 FH-S ON I 0/5 V DC FH-S On/Off 3 FH-M ON I 5 V DC FH-M On/Off 4 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 5 ZCROSS O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal 6 CFM3,4 I 0/24 V DC CFM3,4 On/Off 1 SGND - - Ground 2 SGND - - Ground 3 SGND - - Ground 4 SGND - - Ground 5 SGND - - Ground YC3 Connected to the optional document finisher YC4 Connected to the cooling fan motor 3/4 YC5 Connected to the fuser heater M/S 2-3-2 6 SGND - - Ground 1 CFM3,4 O DC0V/24V CFM3,4 On/Off 2 +24VD O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 1 FH-M ON O 120/0 V AC 220-240/0 V AC FH-M On/Off 2 FH-S ON O 120/0 V AC 220-240/0 V AC FH-S On/Off 3 FH LIVE O 120 V AC 220-240 V AC AC power output 2GN/2GP/2GR Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description YC6 1 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output Connected to the scanner PWB 2 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 3 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 4 PGND - - Ground 5 PGND - - Ground 6 PGND - - Ground 7 SGND - - Ground 8 SGND - - Ground 9 SGND - - Ground 10 SGND - - Ground 11 12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power output 12 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 13 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output 14 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output 1 LIVE O 120 V AC 220-240 V AC AC power output 3 NEUTRAL O 120 V AC 220-240 V AC AC power output YC8 1 V24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output Connected to the optional paper feeder, optional document finisher and hard disk 2 V24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 3 5.1V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 4 PGND - - Ground 5 FGND - - Ground YC7 Connected to the optional cassette heater YC9 Connected to the main operation PWB 6 PGND - - Ground 7 +12VD O 12 V DC 12 V DC power output 8 GND - - Ground 9 GND - - Ground 10 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 1 +24VD O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 2 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 3 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 4 GND - - Ground 5 GND - - Ground 6 GND - - Ground 7 N.C - - Not used 2-3-3 2GN/2GP/2GR Connector Pin No. YC10 1 SLEEP I 0/5 V DC SLEEP signal 2 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 4 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 5 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 6 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 7 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 8 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 9 GND - - Ground 10 GND - - Ground Connected to the main PWB 2-3-4 Signal I/O Voltage Description 11 GND - - Ground 12 GND - - Ground 13 GND - - Ground 14 GND - - Ground 15 GND - - Ground 16 GND - - Ground 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-3-2 Engine PWB Engine PWB CPU (U2) MPWB Driver (U12) Optional finisher Driver (U13) Optional paper feeder 3.3 V Data bus Address bus EEPROM (U3) XIO (U11) Switches Sensors Clutches Motors Engine G/A (U8) HVTPWB 5V Reset IC (U9) LSU 5V Figure 2-3-3 Engine PWB diagram YC22 2 YC3 1 8 B10 YC18 12 12 A1 B1 1 B1 A11 A1 B1 B11 YC10 A16 B19 B1 A1 13 YC17 1 YC9 YC14 1 A1 B16 YC1 1 A10 YC13 7 8 1 A19 YC19 B1 6 YC16 YC5 1 A14 YC21 YC12 12 YC7 B1 B14 1 A1 A15 1 YC6 A1 B15 18 14 1 YC23 YC24 1 7 15 14 YC8 YC20 1 1 1 YC2 YC15 1 18 YC11 7 1 10 1 Figure 2-3-4 Engine PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-5 2GN/2GP/2GR Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description YC1 1 CFM3,4 O 0/24 V DC Connected to the power source PWB 2 ZCROSS I 0/5 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal CFM3,4: On/Off 3 +5VD I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input 4 FH-M ON O 0/5 V DC FH-M: On/Off 5 FH-S ON O 0/5 V DC FH-S: On/Off 6 GND - - Ground YC2 1 +24VDR I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input Connected to the power source PWB 2 GND - - Ground 3 GND - - Ground 4 GND - - Ground 5 3.3V I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power input 6 +5VD I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input 7 +24VDR I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input 1 SET SIG I 0/5 V DC Document finisher connection signal 2 DFSDO O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Document finisher serial communication data signal 3 DFSDI I 0/5 V DC (pulse) Document finisher serial communication data signal YC3 Connected to the optional document finisher 4 DFSCLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Document finisher CLOCK signal 5 DFSEL O 0/5 V DC Document finisher SELECT signal 6 SISEL - - Not used 7 DFRDY I 0/5 V DC Document finisher READY signal 8 SIRDY - - Not used YC5 1 GND - - Ground Connected to the optional paper feeder 2 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 3 PFSEL O 0/5 V DC Paper feeder SELECT signal 4 PFSCLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Paper feeder CLOCK signal 5 PFSDI I 0/5 V DC (pulse) Paper feeder serial communication data signal 6 PFSDO O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Paper feeder serial communication data signal 7 PFRDY I 0/5 V DC Paper feeder READY signal PFFEED O 0/5 V DC Paper feeder FEED signal YC6 A1 8 MPPWSW0 I 0/5 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off Connected to the MP unit, waste toner box detection switch, overflow sensor, front cover switch and cooling fan motor 1/2 A2 MPPWSW1 I 0/5 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off A3 MPPWSW2 I 0/5 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off A4 GND - - Ground A5 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output A6 MPPSW I 0/5 V DC MPPSW: On/Off A7 GND - - Ground A8 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output A9 MPPFCL O 0/24 V DC MPPFCL: On/Off A10 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output A11 MPFCL O 0/24 V DC MPFCL: On/Off B1 NC - - Not used B2 GND - - Ground B3 CFM2 O 0/24 V DC CFM2: On/Off B4 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 2-3-6 2GN/2GP/2GR Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description YC6 B5 WTDSW I 0/5 V DC WTDSW: On/Off Connected to the MP unit, waste toner box detection switch, overflow sensor, front cover switch and cooling fan motor 1/2 B6 GND - - Ground B7 OFS I 0/5 V DC OFS: On/Off B8 GND - - Ground B9 FRCSW I 0/5 V DC FRCSW: On/Off B10 GND - - Ground B11 CFM1 O 0/24 V DC CFM1: On/Off B12 GND - - Ground B13 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output B14 MPPLSW I 0/5 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off B15 GND - - Ground 1 BVSEL1 O 0 to 5 V DC Developing bias control voltage 2 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 3 GND - - Ground 4 MHVDR O 0/5 V DC Main charging: On/Off 5 HVCLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Developing bias CLOCK signal 6 RHVDR O 0/5 V DC Separation charging: On/Off 7 RISEL O 0 to 5 V DC Separation charging control voltage 8 TICTL O 0 to 5 V DC Transfer charging control voltage 9 BVSEL2 O 0 to 5 V DC Developing bias control voltage 10 THVDR O 0/5 V DC Transfer charging: On/Off 11 NC - - Not used 12 NC - - Not used 13 NC - - Not used 14 NC - - Not used YC8 1 NC - - Not used Connected to the laser scanner unit 2 NC - - Not used 3 NC - - Not used 4 NC - - Not used 5 NC - - Not used 6 NC - - Not used 7 NC - - Not used 8 NC - - Not used 9 NC - - Not used 10 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 11 GND - - Ground 12 SCAN O 0/24 V DC PM: On/Off 13 SCRDYN I 0/5 V DC PM READY signal 14 SCCLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) PM CLOCK signal YC7 Connected to the highvoltage PWB 2-3-7 2GN/2GP/2GR Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description YC9 A1 GND - - Ground Connected to the MP feed switch, toner container sensor, developing unit, toner feed solenoid, toner container detection switch and drum unit A2 MPFSW I 0/5 V DC MPFSW: On/Off A3 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output A4 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output A5 TCS I 0/5 V DC TCS: On/Off A6 GND - - Ground A7 DEVP0 I 0/5 V DC Developing unit distinction signal A8 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output A9 TNS I 0/5 V DC TNS: On/Off A10 GND - - Ground A11 DVUNITN I 0/5 V DC Developing unit detection signal A12 FUSE_CUT O 0/5 V DC Developing unit FUSE CUT signal A13 EEDATA I 0/5 V DC Developing unit EEPROM DATA signal A14 EESCLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Developing unit EEPROM CLOCK signal B1 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output B2 TNFSOL O 0/24 V DC TNFSOL: On/Off B3 TCDSW I 0/5 V DC TCDSW: On/Off B4 GND - - Ground B5 DRUMP0 I 0/5 V DC Drum unit distinction signal B6 GND - - Ground B7 CL O 0/5 V DC CL: On/Off B8 EEDATA I 0/5 V DC Drum unit EEPROM DATA signal B9 EESCLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Drum unit EEPROM CLOCK signal B10 GND - - Ground B11 DRUNITN I 0/5 V DC Drum unit detection signal B12 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output B13 MCCM_FWD O 0/24 V DC MCCM: On/Off B14 MCCM_REV O 0/24 V DC MCCM: On/Off YC10 A1 GND - - Ground Connected to the registration switch, fuser unit, duplex feed clutch, duplex paper conveying switch and cooling fan motor 8 to 13 A2 RSW O 0/5 V DC RSW: On/Off A3 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output A4 FUSER P0 I 0/5 V DC Fuser unit distinction signal A5 3VD O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output A6 FTH1 I 0 to 5 V DC FTH1 detection voltage signal A7 FUSE CUT O 0/5 V DC FTH1 FUSE CUT signal A8 GND - - Ground A9 GND - - Ground A10 FTH2 STD I 0 to 5 V DC FTH2 detection voltage signal A11 FTH2 I 0 to 5 V DC FTH2 detection voltage signal B1 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output B2 DUPFCL O 0/24 V DC DUPFCL: On/Off B3 GND - - Ground B4 DUPPCSW I 0/5 V DC DUPPCSW: On/Off B5 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output B6 GND - - Ground 2-3-8 2GN/2GP/2GR Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description YC10 B7 CFM11,12,13 O 0/24 V DC CFM11,12,13: On/Off Connected to the registration switch, fuser unit, duplex feed clutch, duplex paper conveying switch and cooling fan motor 8 to 13 B8 DUP P0 I 0/5 V DC Duplex unit distinction signal B9 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output B10 CFM8,9,10 O 0/24 V DC CFM8,9,10: On/Off B11 NC - - Not used YC11 1 R24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output Connected to the drive motor, paper feed motor, feed clutch 1 and feed switch 1 2 R24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 3 GND - - Ground 4 GND - - Ground 5 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 6 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 7 GND - - Ground 8 GND - - Ground 9 DM_ON O 0/24 V DC DM: On/Off 10 PFM_ON O 0/24 V DC PFM: On/Off 11 DM_LOCK I 0/5 V DC DM LOCK signal 12 PFM_LOCK I 0/5 V DC PFM LOCK signal 13 DM_CLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) DM CLOCK signal 14 FCL1 O 0/24 V DC FCL1: On/Off 15 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 16 GND - - Ground 17 FSW1 I 0/5 V DC FSW1: On/Off 18 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output YC12 1 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output Connected to the Upper and lower paper size width switches 2 +24VUP I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input 3 PWSW-U0 I 0/5 V DC PWSW-U: On/Off 4 PWSW-U1 I 0/5 V DC PWSW-U: On/Off 5 PWSW-U2 I 0/5 V DC PWSW-U: On/Off 6 GND - - Ground 7 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 8 +24VLO I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input 9 PWSW-L0 I 0/5 V DC PWSW-L: On/Off 10 PWSW-L1 I 0/5 V DC PWSW-L: On/Off 11 PWSW-L2 I 0/5 V DC PWSW-L: On/Off 12 GND - - Ground 2-3-9 2GN/2GP/2GR Connector Pin No. YC13 A1 GND - - Ground Connected to the feed switch 2/3, feed clutch 2/3, left cover 2 switch, upper/lower lift motors, lower lift motor, upper/lower paper size length switches, upper/lower lift limit switches and upper/ lower paper switches A2 FSW3 I 0/5 V DC FSW3: On/Off 2-3-10 Signal I/O Voltage Description A3 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output A4 R24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output A5 FCL3 O 0/24 V DC FCL3: On/Off A6 GND - - Ground A7 FSW2 I 0/5 V DC FSW2: On/Off A8 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output A9 GND - - Ground A10 LC2SW I 0/5 V DC LC2SW: On/Off A11 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output A12 FCL2 O 0/24 V DC FCL2: On/Off A13 LM-U SW2 I 0/5 V DC LM-U SW2: On/Off A14 GND - - Ground A15 LM-U SW1 I 0/5 V DC LM-U SW1: On/Off A16 GND - - Ground A17 LM-U REM O 0/24 V DC LM-U: On/Off A18 GND - - Ground A19 PLSW-L I 0/5 V DC PLSW-L: On/Off B1 GND - - Ground B2 PLSW-U I 0/5 V DC PLSW-U: On/Off B3 LM-L SW2 I 0/5 V DC LM-L SW2: On/Off B4 GND - - Ground B5 LM-L SW1 I 0/5 V DC LM-L SW1: On/Off B6 GND - - Ground B7 LM-L REM O 0/24 V DC LM-L: On/Off B8 GND - - Ground B9 LICSW-U I 0/5 V DC LICSW-U: On/Off B10 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output B11 GND - - Ground B12 PSW-U I 0/5 V DC PSW-U: On/Off B13 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output B14 GND - - Ground B15 LICSW-L I 0/5 V DC LICSW-L: On/Off B16 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output B17 GND - - Ground B18 PSW-L I 0/5 V DC PSW-L: On/Off B19 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 2GN/2GP/2GR Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description YC14 A1 FSSOL2 O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (return) Connected to the feedshift solenoid, feedshift switch, eject switch, cooling fan motor 5, left cover 1 switch, upper/lower paper feed clutches, humidity sensor eject motor A2 FSSOL1 O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (activate) A3 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output A4 GND - - Ground A5 FSSW I 0/5 V DC FSSW: On/Off A6 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output A7 GND - - Ground A8 NC - - Not used A9 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output A10 GND - - Ground A11 ESW I 0/5 V DC ESW: On/Off A12 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output A13 CFM5 O 0/24 V DC CFM5: On/Off A14 GND - - Ground A15 GND - - Ground A16 LC1SW I 0/5 V DC LC1SW: On/Off B1 PFCL-U O 0/24 V DC PFCL-U: On/Off B2 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output B3 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output B4 PFCL-L O 0/24 V DC PFCL-L: On/Off B5 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output B6 RCL O 0/24 V DC RCL: On/Off B7 +3VD O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output B8 HUMS I 0 to 5 V DC HUMS detection voltage signal B9 GND - - Ground B10 THOUT I 0 to 5 V DC Thermistor detection voltage signal B11 EM_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal B12 EM B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal B13 EM_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal B14 EM A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal B15 NC - - Not used B16 NC - - Not used YC15 1 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output Connected to the total counter, optional key card and optional key counter 2 T_COUNT O 0/5 V DC Total counter signal 3 GND - - Ground 4 SET SIG I 0/5 V DC Connection signal 5 GND - - Ground 6 SET SIG I 0/5 V DC Key counter connection signal 7 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 8 K_COUNT O 0/5 V DC Key counter signal 9 GND - - Ground 10 SET SIG I 0/5 V DC Connection signal 2-3-11 2GN/2GP/2GR Connector Pin No. YC16 1 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 2 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 3 GND - - Ground 4 GND - - Ground 5 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 6 GND - - Ground 7 SELECT O 0/5 V DC Built-in finisher SELECT signal 8 READY I 0/5 V DC Built-in finisher READY signal 9 SDI I 0/5 V DC (pulse) Built-in finisher serial communication data signal 10 SDO O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Built-in finisher serial communication data signal Connected to the optional built-in finisher Signal I/O Voltage Description 11 SCLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Built-in finisher CLOCK signal 12 NC - - Not used YC17 1 JBESW I 0/5 V DC JBESW: On/Off Connected to the optional job separator 2 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 3 GND - - Ground 4 GND - - Ground 5 SET SIG I 0/5 V DC Job separator connection signal 6 GND - - Ground YC20 Connected to the main PWB 2-3-12 7 EPDSW I 0/5 V DC EPDSW: On/Off 8 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 9 LED REM O 0/5 V DC LED: On/Off 10 +5VD LED O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 11 FSSOL2 O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (return) 12 FSSOL1 O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (activate) 13 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 1 SCKN I 0/5 V DC (pulse) CLOCK signal 2 EGSI I 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 3 EGSO O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 4 SBSY O 0/5 V DC SBSY signal 5 SDIR O 0/5 V DC SDIR signal 6 EGIRN O 0/5 V DC EGIRN signal 7 OUTPEN O 0/5 V DC OUTPEN signal 8 PVSYNC O 0/5 V DC (pulse) PVSYNC signal 9 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output 10 SGND - - Ground 11 SGND - - Ground 12 LDON O 0/5 V DC LDON signal 13 PRST I 0/5 V DC PRST signal 14 PMD I 0/5 V DC PMD signal 15 HLDENG I 0/5 V DC HLDENG signal 2GN/2GP/2GR 2-4 Appendixes Maintenance parts list Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Upper/lower paper feed pulley PULLEY,PAPER FEED Part No. Alternative part No. Fig. No. Ref. No. 2AR07220 - 4 2 Upper/lower separation pulley PULLEY,SEPARATION 2AR07230 - 4 3 Upper/lower forwarding pulley PULLEY FEED A 2BJ06010 - 4 5 MP paper feed pulley UPPER PULLEY,BYPASS 61706770 - 11 49 MP separation pulley PULLEY,SEPARATION 2AR07230 - 11 2 MP forwarding pulley PULLEY FEED A 2BJ06010 - 11 6 MP feed roller 1 ROLLER2 BYPASSFEED 302BL06541 2BL06541 12 13 MP feed roller 2 ROLLER4 BYPASSFEED 302BL06561 2BL06561 12 14 MP feed pulley RIGHT PULLEY,FEED 33906660 - 12 22 Left registration roller ROLLER REGIST 2FG16021 - 7 35 Right registration roller RIGHT ROLLER REGIST 302FG06211 2FG06211 5 51 Feed pulley PULLEY FEED 2BL16080 - 6/7 47/19 Feed roller 1 PULLEY MIDDLE FEED A 302GR06010 2GR06010 5 72 Feed roller 1 PULLEY MIDDLE FEED B 302GR06020 2GR06020 5 73 Feed roller 2 ROLLER B FEED 302BL06081 2BL06081 5 22 Feed roller 3 ROLLER C FEED 302BL06091 2BL06091 5 23 Registration switch SWITCH REGISTRATION 2FG27110 - 5 46 Left registration cleaner UNDER CLEANER REGIST 2BL07950 - 7 15 Registration guide GUIDE REGIST F 2BL16130 - 7 22 Right registration cleaner PARTS,REGISTRATION CLEAN 2BL93450 - 5 44 Laser scanner unit LK-710 302GR93090 2GR93090 13 1 Platen PARTS CONTACT GLASS (M) ASSY 302GR93310 2GR93310 10 1 Platen PARTS CONTACT GLASS (I) ASSY 302GR93320 2GR93320 10 1 Slit glass PARTS CONTACT GLASS DP ASSY 302GR94380 2GR94380 10 2 Mirror 1 MIRROR A 2FB12140 - 9 25 Mirror 2 and mirror 3 MIRROR B 302GR17280 2GR17280 9 17 Reflector REFLECTOR SCANNER 302GR17250 2GR17250 9 27 Exposure lamp PARTS,LAMP SCANNER SP 302GR94330 2GR94330 9 32 Original size detection switch SENSOR ORIGINAL 2C927090 - 9 44 Transfer roller unit TR-710 302GR93280 2GR93280 7 A02 Developing unit DV-715 302GR93030 2GR93030 14 1 Drum unit DK-715 (30 ppm) 302GN93010 2GN93010 16 A01 Drum unit DK-716 (40/50 ppm) 302GR93040 2GR93040 16 A01 Main charger unit MC-710 302GR93070 2GR93070 16 13 Drum separation claw PARTS CLAW SEPARATION ASSY 302GR93190 2GR93190 16 14 Fuser unit FK-715 U 302GR93050 2GR93050 15 A01 Fuser unit FK-715 E 302GR93060 2GR93060 15 A01 Heat roller PARTS,ROLLER HEAT SP 302GR94270 2GR94270 15 32 Heat roller separation claw CLAW HEAT ROLLER 2BL20080 - 15 1 Press roller PARTS,ROLLER PRESS SP 302GR94280 2GR94280 15 A02 Press roller separation claw CLAW PRESS ROLLER 2BL20350 - 6 34 2-4-1 2GN/2GP/2GR Maintenance part name Part No. Alternative part No. Fig. No. Ref. No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Upper duplex feed roller ROLLER DU FEED UP 2BL07020 - 7 4 Lower duplex feed roller ROLLER DU FEED LOW 2BL07030 - 7 5 Duplex feed pulley PULLEY DU 2BL07040 - 7 6 Eject roller ROLLER EXIT 302BL21021 2BL21021 8 24 Switchback roller ROLLER FEED SHIFT 302BL21031 2BL21031 8 25 Eject pulley PULLEY EXIT C 2BL21520 - 8 22 Eject pulley PULLEY EXIT 302GR28060 2GR28060 8 32 Switchback pulley PULLEY FEED SHIFT 2BL21330 - 6 36 Dust filter 1 PARTS FILTER DUST F1 ASSY 302GR94430 2GR94430 13 13 Dust filter 1 PARTS FILTER DUST F2 ASSY 302GR94440 2GR94440 13 14 2-4-2 2GN/2GP/2GR Periodic maintenance procedures Maintenance part/location Test copy Perform at the maxiand test print mum copy size Section Section Paper feed section Maintenance part/location Method Test copy Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page Points and cautions Page Every service Maintenance cycle Upper/lower paper feed Replace pulley 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Replace.* P.1-5-2 Upper/lower separation pulley Replace 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Replace.* P.1-5-2 Upper/lower forwarding pulley Replace 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Replace.* P.1-5-2 MP paper feed pulley Replace 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Replace.* P.1-5-4 MP separation pulley Replace 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Replace.* P.1-5-4 MP forwarding pulley Replace 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Replace.* P.1-5-4 MP feed roller 1 Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol.* MP feed pulley Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol.* MP feed roller 2 Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol.* Left registration roller Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol.* Right registration roller Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol.* Feed pulley Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol.* Feed roller 1 Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol.* Feed roller 2 Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol.* Feed roller 3 Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol.* Registration switch Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with a dry cloth. Left registration cleaner Replace 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Replace. Registration guide Replace 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Replace. Right registration cleaner Replace 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Replace. P.1-5-9 P.1-5-9 *Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs. 2-4-3 2GN/2GP/2GR Section Optical section Section Maintenance part/location Laser scanner unit Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Check or clean User call Clean the shield glass with a dry cloth. Platen Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth. Slit glass Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol. Mirror 1 Clean User call Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image. Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Clean User call Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image. Lens Clean User call Clean with a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image. Reflector Clean User call Clean with a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image. Exposure lamp Check or replace User call Replace if an image problem occurs. Optical rail Grease User call Check noise and shifting and then apply scanner rail grease EM-50L. Original size detection sensor Check or clean User call Clean the sensor emitter and sensor receiver with alcohol or a dry cloth only if there is a problem. Maintenance part/location Transfer/ separation section Transfer roller unit Section Maintenance part/location Developing unit Developing section Method Method Replace Method Replace Maintenance cycle 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Maintenance cycle 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Points and cautions Replace. (Clean when user call occurs.) Points and cautions Replace. (Check and replace when user call occurs.) Page P.1-5-21 P.1-5-11 Page P.1-5-27 Page P.1-5-26 2-4-4 2GN/2GP/2GR Section Main charging/drum section Section Fuser section Section Maintenance part/location Drum unit Replace 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Replace. (Check and replace when user call occurs.) P.1-5-24 Main charger unit Clean User call Clean with a wet cloth and then a dry cloth. P.1-5-25 Drum separation claw Check or replace User call Replace if the leading edge of the claws are damaged. Maintenance part/location Fuser unit Method Method Maintenance cycle Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Points and cautions Page Page Replace 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Replace. (Check and replace P.1-5-28 when user call occurs.) Heat roller Check or replace User call Check and replace when user P.1-5-32 call occurs. Heat roller separation claw Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol. (Check and replace when user call occurs.) Press roller Check or replace User call Check and replace when user P.1-5-30 call occurs. Press roller separation claw Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol. (Check and replace when user call occurs.) Maintenance part/location Eject section Eject roller Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol. (Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs.) Eject pulley Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol. (Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs.) Switchback roller Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol. (Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs.) Switchback pulley Clean 400K (30) 500K (40/50) Clean with alcohol. (Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs.) P.1-5-29 Page 2-4-5 2GN/2GP/2GR Section Covers Section Other Maintenance part/location Covers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. Dust filter 1 Clean Every service Vacuum. Dust filter 2 Clean Every service Vacuum. Maintenance part/location Image quality Method Method Check and adjust Maintenance cycle Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Points and cautions Page Page Every service 2-4-6 2GN/2GP/2GR Chart of image adjustment procedures Adjusting order Item Image Description Maintenance mode Item No. Adjusting the lateral squareness (printing adjustment) Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit (printing adjustment) Polygon motor speed adjustment U053 � Adjusting the magnification in the main scanning direction (printing adjustment) Drive motor speed adjustment � Adjusting the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction (printing adjustment) Adjusting the center line (printing adjustment) Mode Original Page U993 (PG2) Test chart P.1-5-23 POLYGON MOTOR U053 test pattern P.1-3-21 U053 MAIN MOTOR U053 test pattern P.1-3-21 Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU OUT LEFT U034 test pattern P.1-3-19 Adjusting the center line of the cassettes and paper feeder (printing adjustment) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster U034 LSU OUT LEFT U034 test pattern - Adjusting the leading edge registration (printing adjustment) Registration clutch turning on timing (secondary paper feed start timing) U034 LSU OUT TOP U034 test pattern P.1-3-18 Adjusting the leading edge margin (printing adjustment) LSU illumination start timing U402 LESD U402 test pattern P.1-3-64 Adjusting the trailing edge margin (printing adjustment) LSU illumination end timing U402 TRAIL TRAIL(DUP) TRAIL(MP) U402 test pattern P.1-3-64 Adjusting the left and right margins (printing adjustment) LSU illumination start/end timing U402 A C U402 test pattern P.1-3-64 Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction (scanning adjustment) Data processing U065 U070 MAIN SCAN ADJ CIS MAIN ADJ Test chart P.1-3-23 P.1-3-26 Remarks � � � Adjusts the position of each paper source. � � � To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select TRAIL(DUP). To make an adjustment for MP tray, select TRAIL(MP). � �� 2-4-7 2GN/2GP/2GR Adjusting order �� Item Image Description Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction (scanning adjustment) Original scanning speed Adjusting the center line (scanning adjustment) Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) �� Adjusting the leading edge registration (scanning adjustment) Original scan start timing (image adjustment) �� Adjusting the leading edge margin (scanning adjustment) Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) �� Adjusting the trailing edge margin (scanning adjustment) Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) �� Adjusting the left and right margins (scanning adjustment) �� Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) Maintenance mode Item No. Original Mode U065 SUB SCAN ADJ U070 CONVEY SPEED/ CIS SUB ADJ U067 ADJUST DATA1/2 U072 ADJUST DATA1/2/3 U066 ADJUST DATA1/2 U071 ADJUST DATA1/2/ 3/4/5 U403 B MARGIN U404 B MARGIN/ B MARGIN(BACK) U403 D MARGIN U404 D MARGIN/ D MARGIN(BACK) U403 A MARGIN C MARGIN A MARGIN/ A MARGIN(BACK) C MARGIN/ C MARGIN(BACK) U404 When maintenance item U411 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) is run using the specified original (P/N 302FZ56990), the following adjustments are automatically made: Adjusting the scanner magnification (U065) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) When maintenance item U411 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) is run using the specified original (P/N 2AC68241), the following adjustments are automatically made: Adjusting the DP magnification (U070) Adjusting the DP scanning timing (U071) Adjusting the DP center line (U072) Test chart Page P.1-3-23 P.1-3-26 Test chart P.1-3-25 P.1-3-30 Test chart P.1-3-24 P.1-3-28 Test chart P.1-3-65 P.1-3-66 Test chart P.1-3-65 P.1-3-66 Test chart P.1-3-65 P.1-3-66 Remarks U065: For copying an original placed on the platen. U070: For copying originals from the DP. U067: For copying an original placed on the platen. U072: For copying originals from the DP. U066: For copying an original placed on the platen. U071: For copying originals from the DP. U403: For copying an original placed on the platen. U404: For copying originals from the DP. U403: For copying an original placed on the platen. U404: For copying originals from the DP. U403: For copying an original placed on the platen. U404: For copying originals from the DP. Image quality Item 100% magnification Enlargement/reduction Lateral squareness Leading edge registration Skewed paper feed Left-right difference Curling Specifications Machine: ±0.8% Using DP: ±1.5% Machine: ±1.0% Using DP: ±1.5% Machine: ±1.5 mm/375 mm Using DP: ±2.5 mm/375 mm Cassette: ±2.5 mm MP tray: ±2.5 mm Duplex copying: ±2.5 mm Cassette: 1.5 mm or less MP tray: 1.5 mm or less Duplex copying: 2.0 mm or less Cassette: ±2.0 mm MP tray: ±2.0 mm Duplex mode: ±3.0 mm Simplex mode: 10.0 mm or less Duplex mode: 10.0 mm or less 2-4-8 FWD REV FUSE TNS DEVELOPING UNIT 2 1 TCD SW 2 1 CL MCCM TC HV HVTPWB OPTION KEY CARD MK-2 (ONLY JAPAN) TC ROLL HUMS PFCL-U PFCL-L ESW FSSW RCL FSSOL CFM5 LC1SW DM PFM DB EM MC MAIN HV FCL1 EJECT UNIT 7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2 PWSW-U CASSETTE1 1 2 3 PWSW-L CASSETTE2 FCL3 FSW1 FSW3 1 2 3 2 1 FSW2 1 2 3 LC2SW 2 1 F.G 1 2 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 7 8 6 5 9 10 11 12 4 3 2 1 FCL2 VERTICAL CONVEYING UNIT 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC11 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC5 YC3 LM-U B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 YC10 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 1 2 1 2 1 2 DOCUMENT FINISHER (OPTION) 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 1 1 2 CFM3,4 +24VD 24V 24V 24V PGND PGND PGND SGND SGND SGND SGND 12V 5V 3.3V 3.3V YC6 CFM13 YC1 2 1 LM-L 1 2 1 2 1 NOISE FILTER TB3 TB4 YC2 SET SIG GND K_COUNT +24VD SET SIG GND SET SIG GND T_COUNT +24VD GND FH-S ON FH-M ON +5VD ZCROSS CFM3,4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 12 13 14 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 12 13 14 +12VD +5VD +5VD GND GND GND N.C 2 1 2 1 CFM3 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A30 A30 B1 B1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PAPER FEEDER (OPTION) 5 4 3 2 1 CH GND PLSW-U LM-L SW2 GND LM-L SW1 GND LM-L REM GND LICSW-U +5VD GND PSW-U +5VD GND LICSW-L +5VD GND PSW-L +5VD RSW W2 YC8 (2/3) 2 1 1 1 2 2 W1 YC3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC8 (1/3) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC9 PLSW-U 2 2 1 1 3 5 3 4 2 PM 2 1 CH (OPTION) 1 +24VD +5VD +3.3VD GND GND GND +24VDR YC7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DUPLEX UNIT 5 3 4 2 2 3 FGND 5.1V PGND V24V 1 PLSW-L EPWB YC8 (3/3) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 7 8 9 10 5 4 3 2 1 DUP PCSW 7 8 9 10 4 3 2 1 DUP FCL YC10 4 3 2 1 CFM12 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 1 2 1 FH-M ON FH-S ON FH LIVE A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 CFM11 +12VD GND GND +5VD A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 1 2 3 4 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GND FSW3 +5VD R24VDR FCL3 GND FSW2 +5VD GND LC2SW +24VDR FCL2 LM-U SW2 GND LM-U SW1 GND LM-U REM GND PLSW-L 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC11 GND 5V RSSE XRXC XTXC XDSR XDTR XCTS XRTS SCCCLK SGND SGND SGND SGND SGND SGND 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A6 A1 A5 A2 A4 A3 A3 A4 A2 A5 A1 A6 FFC 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 30 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 1 2 3 4 2 2 1 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 INPWB SET SIG DFSDO DFSDI DFSCLK DFSEL SISEL DFRDY SIRDY FFC 6 1 SM 6 1 A1 PGND V24V DP (OPTION) 12 6 2 1 SLEEPN GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V SLEEP 12 6 2 1 A1 LIVE 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 NEUTRAL 34 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 1 24V 24V LAMP ON PGND PGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 40 PFFEED PFRDY PFSDO PFSDI PFSCLK PFSEL +5VD GND 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 5V SHPSW SGND 5V ODSW SGND 5V OSDS SGND PWSW-L2 GND 1 2 3 4 5 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 2 1 GND GND GND GND GND GND OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN 5V 5V 5V 5V +5V2_PD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC14 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PWSW-U1 PWSW-U2 GND +24VDR +24VLO PWSW-L0 PWSW-L1 RESISTRATION UNIT 1 2 HDD 2 1 ILSW 2 1 FAX DATA BACKUP KIT 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 YC9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 1 4 3 2 1 YC10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 1 2 3 4 YC6 +24VDR +24VUP PWSW-U0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SM B_ SM A_ SM B SM A YC4 7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 1 4 5 2 1 SPWB DUP P0 CFM11,12,13 +24VDR +5VD DUPPCSW GND DUPFCL +24VDR 1 2 1 2 3 4 DEBUG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 2 1 2 1 CFM9 1 2 1 2 1 40 CFM8,9,10 +24VDR 1 2 3 1 40 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 1 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 2 1 YC4 40 FCL1 +24VDR GND FSW1 +5VDR +5VD RSW GND 1 2 YC7 1 2 3 4 5 A3 A2 A1 B11 B10 B9 A3 A2 A1 B11 B10 B9 FTH2 2 4 6 8 10 12 FTH1 3VD FUSER P0 CFM10 2 4 6 8 10 12 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 FTH2 FTH2 STD GND GND FUSE CUT FUSER P0 5V FTH1 FUSE CUT GND R24VDR GND +5VD GND PFM_ON PFM_LOCK 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 YC7 R24VDR GND +5VD GND DM_ON DM_LOCK DM_CLK A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 FTH1 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 YC5 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 PD B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 YC31 EM B EM_A EM A YC17 EM_B YC8 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 Flash Writer 1 2 3 4 5 4 3 2 1 YC30 A15 A15 A16 A16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 PGND PGND DPTMG DPRDY DPSCLK DPSDO 5V 3.3V 24V 12V SGND SGND SGND PGND PGND DPEND DPSEL DPSDI 5V 3.3V 24V 24V 24V SGND SGND B30 B30 A30 A30 B1 B1 A1 A1 YC1 5 4 3 2 1 DEV UNIT GND LC1SW YC8 A13 A13 A14 A14 YC16 CFM5 GND 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SET SIG SGND SCIRN SCSDIR SCSBSY SCSDO SCSDI SCSCLK B30 B30 A30 A30 B1 B1 A1 A1 YC3 2 1 2 1 68 5 4 3 2 1 68 1 2 3 4 5 B30 B30 1 2 5 4 3 2 1 35 34 35 2 1 34 FTS1 FTS2 A30 A30 B1 B1 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 4 YC27 1 +24VDR FSSOL1 FSSOL2 FH-S FH-M KUIOPWB A1 A1 GND +5VD FSSW GND YC20 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 LDPWB A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 YC17 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 +5VD ESW GND +5VD 1 2 3 YC20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 CF USB USB TOUCH PANEL 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC19 +24VDR GND SCAN SCRDYN SCCLK 3 2 1 A14 A10 B1 A12 B3 B4 A3 B13 A1 B10 B9 B8 B7 LED EPDSW JBESW A1 A5 B14 A3 B12 B11 A12 B2 A14 B10 B9 B8 B7 YC21 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 LSU 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 YC22 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 AC HV YC7 YC2 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 SEPARATE 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 F.G YC9 4 3 2 1 YC9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 OPWB-R B6 B5 1 2 3 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 YS1 5V SAFE SAMPLE POWCONT LASER VDO+ VDOGND PD GND Code DIMM B6 B5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC26 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ISSCLKAFE ISSDIAFE ISSDOAFE ISSELAFE IESSCLK ISSDI ISSDO ISSEL ISRDY OVMON PAGEST ISPLLSYNC ISDIVSEL ISPLLSEL0 ISPLLSEL1 ISRESETN 5V GND 5V GND 3.3V GND 3.3V GND 11V SGND 11V SGND THOUT GND HUMS +3VD KMAS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RCL +24VDR (ONLY JAPAN) 2 1 YC25 1 2 MP FCL 1 2 MPWB 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2 1 MPPWSW 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FSSOL 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 JOB SEPARATER UNIT (OPTION) 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 B4 B3 CFM6 5V YC15 B4 B3 S_LED0 S_LED1 PANEL_RESET HLDPANEL SW_FOOTN 24V_DOWN SUPND_ENTR AUDIO SGND PH_KEY SGND SUPND_POWER YC14 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 SPEAKER ETHER USB NET SHDPWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2 1 INNER FINISHER (OPTION) 5 4 3 2 1 YC18 B2 B1 SHIELD GND DATA+ DATAVBUS YC16 B2 B1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FROM PSPWB 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PFCL-L +24VDR YC13 YC11 LINPWB YC1 YC5 KEY0 KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 SCAN0 SCAN1 SCAN2 SCAN3 LED0 LED1 WakeUp SGND 5V_MSWON SGND 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 YC6 CFM6 1 2 DIMM1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 DIMM2 YC7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 LCD +24VDR PFCL-U 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC1 5 4 3 2 1 12V 5V 5V PGND SGND SGND 1 2 YC19 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 EGSI EGSO SBSY SDIR EGIRN OUTPEN PVSYNC +5VDR SGND SGND LDON PRST PMD HLDENG OPWB-M 2 1 YC6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PGND 12V BK_ON ADJUST SGND SCKN YC2 HV LV 2 3 4 5 6 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 SHILED GND DATA+ DATAVBUS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MP PLSW RIGHT USB B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MP PFCL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC3 +24VDR FSSOL1 FSSOL2 +5VD LED LED_REM +5VD EPDSW GND SET SIG GND GND +5VD JBESW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 2 1 SGND SGND B5 B4 B3 SGND B2 B1 B0 SGND G5 G4 G3 SGND G2 G1 G0 SGND R5 R4 R3 SGND R2 R1 R0 SGND DE SGND L_R U_D SGND DCCLK NC SGND 5V 5V 5V 5V SGND SGND 4 3 2 1 SGND 5V SGND 5V SGND CCDCP SGND CCDRS SGND CCDSH SGND CCDCLK2A SGND CCDCLK1A KEY_CARD GND B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 +24VD COPY_ENABLE +5VD +5VD +5VD +5VD +5VD +5VD +5VD +5VD 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SCLK SDO SDI READY SELECT GND +5VD GND GND +24VD +24VD 1 2 3 MP TRAY UNIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 KEY5 KEY6 KEY7 SCAN0 SCAN1 SCAN2 SCAN3 LED2 LED3 LED4 SGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 1 2 3 YC6 Code DIMM BVSEL1 +24VDR GND MHVDR HVCLK RHVDR RISEL TICTL BVSEL2 THVDR NC NC NC NC B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 GND MPPLSW +5VD YC14 YC12 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DRUMP0 GND CL EEDATA EESCLK GND DRUNITN +5VD MCCM_FWD MCCM_REV B3 B4 B15 B14 B13 B1 B12 B11 B10 B1 YC5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 RIGHT BOTTOM LEFT TOP AGND REDEVEN AGND REDODD AGND GREENEVEN AGND GREENODD AGND BLUEEVEN AGND BLUEODD 11V 11V 1 2 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 B3 B4 B1 B2 1 2 3 4 5 YC4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 EEPROM 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 B1 B2 FRCSW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 MPFSW TCS 1 2 TNF SOL TCDSW GND +24VDR TNFSOL 2 1 MP PSW 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 YC8 2 1 1 2 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 1 2 OPWB-F CCDPWB GND CL 3 2 1 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 WTDSW 3 2 1 F.G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 OFS MPFCL +24VDR MPPFCL +24VDR GND MPPSW +5VD GND MPPWSW2 MPPWSW1 MPPWSW0 1 2 15 DEVP0 +5VD TNS GND DVUNITN FUSE_CUT EEDATA EESCLK A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A4 A5 A6 1 2 3 SGND S_LED1 S_LED0 LED7 LED6 LED5 SCAN5 SCAN4 A4 A5 A6 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 +5VD TCS GND 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 OPWB-U CFM7 5V 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 A1 A2 A3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 +5VD WTDSW GND OFS GND FRCSW GND 1 2 2 1 CFM2 CFM1 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 OPTION COIN VENDER (ONLY JAPAN) B6 B9 B7 B10 CFM1 GND GND CFM2 OPWB-L 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A1 A2 A3 B2 B3 B8 B9 B8 B11 B9 B12 A15 A14 A13 A12 A15 A14 A13 A12 SCAN5 LED5 LED6 S_LED1 SGND 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CFM7 GND MPFSW +5VD FEED_COUNT EJECT_COUNT COPYING_SIG TxD GND RxD GND +24VR GND GND COIN_EN 1 2 3 4 5 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2GN/2GP/2GR General wiring diagram SHPSW ODSW OSDS EL 3.3V 3.3V 5V 12V SGND SGND SGND SGND PGND PGND PGND 24V 24V 24V A1 A30 A30 B1 B1 B30 B30 A1 CFM4 B30 B30 TO OPERATION YC4 PSPWB YC5 HEATER CONTROLLER TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 NO COM TB1 TB2 INLET CFM8 YC12 LIVE GROUND COM 1 2 MSW YC2 SSW1 KEY CARD1 OR KEY COUNTER (OPTION) TC SSW2 NO COM FUSER UNIT YC1 YC15 YC18 YC13 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LOWER FEED UNIT 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 8 7 6 5 2 1 4 3 6 4 3 2 1 5 8 7 PSW-L 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 LIC SW-L PSW-U 1 2 3 LIC SW-U FEED UNIT UPPER FEED UNIT DRUM UNIT 2-4-9 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DOCUMENT PROCESSOR B G* H I G** D A C English Supplied parts A B C D E DP............................................................ 1 Original mat ............................................. 1 Fixing fitting ............................................. 2 Angle control fitting .................................. 1 Pin ........................................................... 3 Français Pièces fournies A B C D E DP............................................................ 1 Plaque d’original ...................................... 1 Fixation .................................................... 2 Fixation d’angle ....................................... 1 Goupille ................................................... 3 Español Piezas suministradas A B C D E DP............................................................ 1 Alfombrilla para originales ....................... 1 Herraje de fijación.................................... 2 Herraje de control de ángulo ................... 1 Pasador ................................................... 3 Deutsch Gelieferte Teile A B C D E DP............................................................ 1 Originalmatte ........................................... 1 Befestigungshalterung............................. 2 Winkeleinstellbefestigung ........................ 1 Stift........................................................... 3 Italiano Parti fornite A B C D E DP............................................................ 1 Tappetino originale .................................. 1 Accessorio di fissaggio ............................ 2 Accessorio di regolazione angolare......... 1 Perno ....................................................... 3 付属品 A DP 本体 ............................. 1 B 原稿マット.......................... 1 C 固定金具............................ 2 D 角度規制金具........................ 1 E ピン................................ 3 E F F M4 × 14TP screw..................................... 4 G Label “Operation procedure” (except for 100 V models) ....................... 1 *: for metric specification **: for inch specification H Caution label “Remove original!” (except for 100 V models) ....................... 1 I Caution label “Original face up!” (except for 100 V models) ....................... 1 F Vis TP M4 × 14 ........................................ 4 G Étiquette relative à la procédure d’utilisation (sauf pour les modèles 100 V) ................ 1 * : pour des spécifications métriques ** : pour des spécifications anglo-saxonnes H Étiquette d’avertissement relative au retrait de l’original (sauf pour les modèles 100 V)...... 1 I Étiquette d’avertissement relative à l’orientation vers le haut de la face de l’original (sauf pour les modèles 100 V) ................ 1 F Tornillo TP M4 × 14.................................. 4 G Etiqueta “Procedimiento operativo” (excepto para modelos de 100 V) ........... 1 *: para especificaciones en el sistema métrico **: para especificaciones en el sistema de pulgadas H Etiqueta de precaución “Retire original” (excepto para los modelos de 100 V)...... 1 I Etiqueta de precaución “Original cara arriba” (excepto para los modelos de 100 V) ......... 1 F M4 × 14TP Schraube............................... 4 G Schild “Funktionsanweisung” (außer 100 V-Modelle)............................. 1 *: für metrische Angaben **: für Angaben in Zoll H Warnschild “Original entfernen” (außer 100 V-Modelle)............................. 1 I Warnschild “Originalschriftseite nach oben” (außer 100 V-Modelle)............................. 1 F Vite M4 × 14TP ....................................... 4 G Etichetta “Procedura di funzionamento” (eccetto modelli 100 V)............................ 1 *: per specifiche in unità del sistema metrico **: per specifiche in pollici H Etichetta di avvertimento “Rimuovere originale!” (eccetto modelli 100 V).................. 1 I Etichetta di avvertimento “Originale rivolto verso l’alto!” (eccetto modelli 100 V) ....... 1 F ビス M4 × 14TP ...................... 4 G 操作ラベル (100V 仕様以外 ) .......... 1 *: センチ仕様 **: インチ仕様 H 原稿忘れラベル (100V 仕様以外 ) ...... 1 I 原稿表向きラベル (100V 仕様以外 ) .... 1 1 Installation Procedure When installing the DP, be sure to turn the MFP power off and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet. Méthode d’installation Lors de l’installation du DP, veiller à mettre l’interrupteur du MFP hors tension et à débrancher la fiche d’alimentation de la prise murale. Procedimiento de instalación Cuando instale el DP, asegúrese de apagar el interruptor principal del MFP y desenchúfelo del tomacorriente de la pared. Installationsverfahren Schalten Sie vor Installation des DP unbedingt den MFP-Hauptschalter aus, und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose. Istruzioni per il montaggio Spegnere l’interruttore principale e sfilare la spina dell’MFP dalla presa prima di installare il DP. 取付手順 DP 本体を設置するときは、必ず MFP 本体のメ インスイッチを OFF にし、電源プラグを抜いて から作業すること。 2 E 3 8 4 5 6 C A 3 7 8 7 C 10 C 9 C Remove the film and cushioning material. Attach the fixing fitting. Install the DP. 4. Align MFP projection (7) with hole (8) of fixing fitting (C) and insert fixing fitting (C) into the MFP. 5. Secure fixing fitting (C) with two pins (E). 6. Align hinge hole (9) of DP (A) with pin (10) of fixing fitting (C), place DP (A) on the MFP. 7. Slide DP (A) to ward the front side. Mettre en place la fixation. Installer le DP. 4. Aligner la saillie du MFP (7) sur le trou (8) de la fixation (C) et insérer cette dernière dans le MFP. 5. Attacher la fixation (C) à l’aide des deux goupilles (E). 6. Aligner le trou de la charnière (9) du DP (A) sur la goupille (10) de la fixation (C) et placer le DP (A) sur le MFP. 7. Faire glisser le DP (A) vers l’avant. Monte el herraje de fijación. Instale el DP. 4. Alinee el saliente del MFP (7) con el orificio (8) del herraje de fijación (C) e inserte el herraje de fijación (C) en el MFP. 5. Asegure el herraje de fijación (C) con dos pasadores (E). 6. Alinee el orificio de bisagra (9) del DP (A) con el pasador (10) del herraje de fijación (C) y coloque el DP (A) en el MFP. 7. Deslice el DP (A) hacia el lado delantero. Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung. Installieren des DP. 4. MFP-Projektion (7) mit Loch (8) der Befestigungshalterung (C) ausrichten und Befestigungshalterung (C) in den MFP einsetzen. 5. Befestigungshalterung (C) mit zwei Stiften (E) befestigen. 6. Scharnierloch (9) des DP (A) mit Stift (10) der Befestigungshalterung (C) ausrichten, und DP (A) auf den MFP stellen. 7. DP (A) nach vorne schieben. Rimozione della pellicola e del materiale antiurto. Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio. Montaggio del DP. 1. Rimuovere il nastro di fissaggio dal coperchio dell’unità di alimentazione originali del DP (A). 2. Aprire il coperchio dell’unità di alimentazione originali (3) e il trasportatore (4). 3. Rimuovere la pellicola (5) e il materiale antiurto (6). 4. Allineare la sporgenza dell’MFP (7) con il foro (8) dell’accessorio di fissaggio (C), quindi inserire l’accessorio di fissaggio (C) nell’MFP. 5. Assicurare l’accessorio di fissaggio (C) con due perni (E). フィルム / 緩衝材の取り外し 1. DP 本体 （A）の原稿送り装置カバーの固定テー プを剥がす。 2. 原稿送り装置カバー(3) と搬送ユニット (4) を開く。 3. フィルム (5) と緩衝材 (6) を取り除く。 固定金具の取り付け 4. MFP 本体の突起 (7) と固定金具 (C) の穴 (8) を合わせ、MFP 本体に固定金具 (C) を差し込 む。 5. ピン (E)2 本で固定金具 (C) を固定する。 1. Remove the fixing tape from the original feed unit cover of DP (A). 2. Open original feed unit cover (3) and carrier unit (4). 3. Remove film (5) and cushioning material (6). Retirer le film et la garniture d’emballage. 1. Retirer la bande adhésive de fixation du couvercle de l’unité d’alimentation d’original du DP (A). 2. Ouvrir le couvercle de l’unité d’alimentation d’original (3) et sortir l’unité de support (4). 3. Retirer le film (5) et la garniture d’emballage (6). Retire la película y el material amortiguador. 1. Quite la cinta adhesiva de la cubierta de la unidad de alimentación de originales del DP (A). 2. Abra la cubierta de la unidad de alimentación de originales (3) y la unidad del carro (4). 3. Retire la película (5) y el material amortiguador (6). Entfernen des Films und des Polstermaterials. 1. Das Befestigungsband von der Abdeckung der Originalzufuhreinheit des DP (A) abnehmen. 2. Abdeckung der Originalzufuhreinheit (3) und der Trägereinheit (4) öffnen. 3. Film (5) und Polstermaterial (6) abnehmen. 6. Allineare il foro della cerniera (9) del DP (A) con il perno (10) dell’accessorio di fissaggio (C), quindi posizionare il DP (A) sull’MFP. 7. Fare scorrere il DP (A) verso la parte anteriore. DP 本体の取り付け 6. DP 本体 (A) のヒンジ部の穴 (9) と固定金具 (C) のピン (10) を合わせ、MFP 本体に DP 本 体 (A) を乗せる。 7. DP 本体 (A) を手前にスライドさせる。 3 11 F E 12 D F C F 11 8. Install DP (A) onto the MFP securely with pin (E) and two M4 × 14TP screws (F). Install the angle control fitting. 8. Installer le DP (A) sur le MFP en le fixant à l’aide de la goupille (E) et des deux vis TP M4 × 14 (F). Installer la fixation d’angle. 8. Instale el DP (A) firmemente en el MFP con el pasador (E) y dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (F). Instale el herraje de control de ángulo. 8. DP (A) sicher mit einem Stift (E) und zwei M4 × 14TP Schrauben (F) am MFP befestigen. Installieren der Winkeleinstellbefestigung. To adjust DP open-close angle 60 degrees 9. Install angle control fitting (D) at the rear side of the right hinge with two M4 × 14TP screws (F). Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture du DP de 60 degrés 9. Placer la fixation d’angle (D) à l’arrière de la charnière droite à l’aide des deux vis TP M4 × 14 (F). Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 60 grados 9. Instale el herraje de control de ángulo (D) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha con dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (F). Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswinkels des DP um 60 Grad 9. Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers mit zwei M4 × 14TP Schrauben (F) befestigen. 8. Montare il DP (A) sull’MFP assicurandolo con il perno (E) e due viti M4 × 14TP (F). Montaggio dell’accessorio di regolazione angolare. Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura del DP a 60 gradi 9. Montare l’accessorio di regolazione angolare (D) sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra con due viti M4 × 14TP (F). 8. ピン (E)1 本とビス M4 × 14TP(F)2 本で DP 本体 (A) を MFP 本体に固定する。 4 角度規制金具の取り付け DP 開閉角度を 60 度に設定する場合 9. 右ヒンジ後側にビス M4 × 14TP(F)2 本で角 度規制金具 (D) を取り付ける。 To adjust DP open-close angle 30 degrees 10. Remove four screws (11) and then remove rear cover (12) of DP (A). Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture du DP de 30 degrés 10. Retirer les quatre vis (11), puis le couvercle arrière (12) du DP (A). Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 30 grados 10. Saque cuatro tornillos (11) y retire la cubierta trasera (12) del DP (A). Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswinkels des DP um 30 Grad 10. Vier Schrauben (11) abnehmen und dann die Rückabdeckung (12) des DP (A) abnehmen. Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura del DP a 30 gradi 10. Rimuovere quattro viti (11), quindi rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (12) del DP (A). DP 開閉角度を 30 度に設定する場合 10.ビス (11)4 本を外し、DP 本体 (A) の後カバー (12) を取り外す。 13 13 # ! 14 14 $ " D 11. Remove stop ring (13) of angle control fitting (D) that has been installed in step 12 to remove shaft (14). 12. Insert shaft (14) into the rear side of the right hinge. 13. Attach stop ring (13) to the notch of shaft (14) and secure shaft (14). 14. Reinstall rear cover (12) that has been removed in step 10, with four screws (11). 11. Retirer l’anneau de butée (13) de la fixation d’angle (D) installée à l’étape 12 pour enlever la tige (14). 12. Insérer la tige (14) à l’arrière de la charnière droite. 13. Fixer l’anneau de butée (13) sur l’encoche de la tige (14) et mettre en place la tige (14). 14. Remettre en place le couvercle arrière (12) retiré à l’étape 10 à l’aide des quatre vis (11). 11. Retire el anillo de retención (13) del herraje de control de ángulo (D) que se instaló en el paso 12 para retirar el eje (14). 12. Inserte el eje (14) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha. 13. Fije el anillo de retención (13) a la muesca del eje (14) y asegure el eje (14). 14. Reinstale la cubierta trasera (12) que ha retirado en el paso 10 con cuatro tornillos (11). 11. Anschlagring (13) von der Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) abnehmen, die in Schritt 12 montiert wurde, um die Welle (14) zu entfernen. 12. Welle (14) in die Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einsetzen. 13. Anschlagring (13) an der Wellenkerbe (14) anbringen und Welle befestigen (14). 14. Die in Schritt 10 abgenommene Rückabdeckung (12) wieder mit vier Schrauben (11) einbauen. 11. Rimuovere l’anello di bloccaggio (13) dell’accessorio di regolazione angolare (D) che era stato installato al Punto 12 per rimuovere l’albero (14). 12. Inserire l’albero (14) nella parte posteriore della cerniera destra. 13. Applicare l’anello di bloccaggio (13) nell’incavo dell’albero (14) e assicurare l’albero (14). 14. Rimontare il coperchio posteriore (12) rimosso al Punto 10 con quattro viti (11). 11.手順 12 で取り付けた角度規制金具 (D) のストップリング (13)1 個を外し、シャフト (14) を取り 外す。 12.右ヒンジ後側にシャフト (14) を挿入する。 13.ストップリング (13) をシャフト (14) の溝に取り付け、シャフト (14) を固定する。 14.手順 10 で外した後カバー(12) をビス (11)4 本で元通り取り付ける。 % % Connect the signal lines. 15. Connect control signal line (15) of DP (A) and data signal line (16) to the MFP. 16. Turn fixing knobs (17) at the both sides of the connector clockwise to secure the signal lines. Connecter les circuits de transmission. 15. Connecter le circuit de transmission de commande (15) du DP (A) ainsi que celui de données (16) au MFP. 16. Tourner les boutons de fixation (17) de chaque côté du connecteur dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre pour fixer les circuits de transmission. Conecte las líneas de señal. 15. Conecte la línea de señal de control (15) del DP (A) y la línea de señal de datos (16) al MFP. 16. Gire los pomos de fijación (17) de ambos lados del conector en sentido horario para asegurar las líneas de señal. Anschließen der Signalleitungen. 15. Steuersignalleitung (15) von DP (A) und Datensignalleitung (16) an den MFP anschließen. 16. Befestigungshandräder (17) an beiden Seiten des Anschlusses nach rechts drehen, um die Signalleitungen zu befestigen. Connessione delle linee dei segnali. 15. Connettere la linea del segnale di controllo (15) del DP (A) e la linea del segnale dati (16) all’MFP. 16. Ruotare le rotelle di fissaggio (17) su entrambi i lati del connettore in senso orario, fissando così le linee dei segnali. 信号線の接続 15.DP 本体 (A) の制御信号線 (15) とデータ信号 線 (16) を MFP 本体に接続する。 16.コネクタ両側の固定ツマミ (17) を右へ回し 固定する。 5 B A B 18 Fasten the original mat. 17. Place original mat (B) with its Velcro (18) upward over the contact glass. Align original mat (B) corner that has not been surface cut with the inner left corner of the original instruction panel. 18. Close DP (A) and attach original mat (B) onto it with Velcro. Fixer la plaque d’original. 17. Placer la plaque d’original (B) sur la vitre d’exposition, en orientant les bandes Velcro (18) vers le haut. Aligner le coin de la plaque d’original (B) qui n’est pas découpé sur le coin intérieur gauche du panneau d’instructions de l’original. 18. Abaisser le DP (A) et y fixer la plaque d’original (B) à l’aide des bandes Velcro. Fije la alfombrilla para originales. 17. Coloque la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro (18) hacia arriba sobre el cristal de contacto. Alinee la esquina no cortada de la alfombrilla para originales (B) con la esquina interior izquierda del panel de instrucciones del original. 18. Cierre el DP (A) y fije la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro. Befestigen der Originalmatte. 17. Die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband (18) nach oben über das Kontaktglas legen. Die Ecke der Originalmatte (B), deren Oberfläche nicht ausgeschnitten ist, mit der linken, inneren Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten. 18. Den DP (A) schließen und die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband auf ihm befestigen. Fissaggio del tappetino originale. 17. Posizionare il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro (18) rivolto verso l’alto sul vetro di appoggio. Allineare l’angolo del tappetino originale (B) non tagliato in superficie con l’angolo interno sinistro del pannello di controllo originale. 18. Chiudere il DP (A) e applicarvi il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro. 原稿マットの貼り付け 17.原稿マット (B) を、 マジックテープ (18) を上に向けてコンタクトガラス上に置く。 原稿マット (B) は面カットされていない角を原稿指示板の左奥に合わせること。 18.DP 本体 (A) を下ろし、原稿マット (B) を DP 本体 (A) に貼り付ける。 6 I G (c) (a) G H Adhere the label “Operation procedure” (except for 100 V models) Adhere the caution label “Remove original!” (except for 100 V models) (b) Adhere the caution label “Original face up!” (except for 100 V models) 19. Clean the label surface of the original feed unit cover with alcohol. 20. Adhere label “Operation procedure” (G) of which the language corresponding to the destination of the MFP on to the existing label of the original feed unit cover. Figure (a) 21. Clean the label surface of the original delivery table with alcohol. 22. Adhere caution label “Remove original!” (H) of which the language corresponding to the destination of the MFP on to the label of the original delivery table. Figure (b) 23. Clean the label on the original table with alcohol. 24. Adhere caution label “Original face up!” (I) of which the language corresponding to the destination of MFP on to the label of the original table. Figure (c) Coller l’étiquette relative à la procédure d’utilisation (sauf pour les modèles 100 V) Coller l’étiquette d’avertissement relative au retrait de l’original (sauf pour les modèles 100 V) Coller l’étiquette d’avertissement relative à l’orientation vers le haut de la face de l’original (sauf pour les modèles 100 V) 19. Nettoyer la surface de l’étiquette du couvercle de l’unité d’alimentation d’original avec de l’alcool. 20. Coller l’étiquette relative à la procédure d’utilisation (G) dans la langue correspondant à la destination du MFP sur l’étiquette déjà apposée sur le couvercle de l’unité d’alimentation d’original. Figure (a) Pegue la etiqueta “Procedimiento operativo” (excepto para los modelos de 100 V) 19. Limpie con alcohol la superficie de etiquetas de la cubierta de la unidad de alimentación de originales. 20. Pegue la etiqueta “Procedimiento operativo” (G) del idioma correspondiente al destino del MFP sobre la etiqueta existente de la cubierta de la unidad de alimentación de originales. Figura (a) Anbringen des Schildes “Funktionsanweisung” (außer 100 V-Modelle) 21. Nettoyer la surface de l’étiquette du plateau de sortie d’original avec de l’alcool. 22. Coller l’étiquette d’avertissement relative au retrait de l’original (H) dans la langue correspondant à la destination du MFP sur l’étiquette du plateau de sortie d’original. Figure (b) 23. Nettoyer l’étiquette figurant sur le plateau d’original avec de l’alcool. 24. Coller l’étiquette d’avertissement relative à l’orientation vers le haut de la face de l’original (I) dans la langue correspondant à la destination du MFP sur l’étiquette du plateau d’original. Figure (c) Pegue la etiqueta de precaución “Retirar original” (excepto para los modelos de 100 V) Pegue la etiqueta de precaución “Original cara arriba” (excepto para los modelos de 100 V) 21. Limpie con alcohol la superficie de etiquetas de la cubierta de originales. 22. Pegue la etiqueta de precaución “Retirar original” (H) del idioma correspondiente al destino del MFP sobre la etiqueta de la cubierta de originales. Figura (b) 23. Limpie con alcohol la etiqueta de la cubierta de originales. 24. Pegue la etiqueta de precaución “Original cara arriba” (I) del idioma correspondiente al destino del MFP sobre la etiqueta de la cubierta de originales. Figura (c) Anbringen des Warnschildes “Original entfernen” (außer 100 V-Modelle) Anbringen des Warnschildes “Originalschriftseite nach oben” (außer 100 V-Modelle) 19. Die Schildoberfläche an der Abdeckung der Originalzufuhreinheit mit Alkohol reinigen. 20. Das Schild “Funktionsanweisung” (G) in der Sprache des Bestimmungsortes des MFP auf das bestehende Schild an der Abdeckung der Originalzufuhreinheit aufkleben. Abbildung (a) 21. Die Schildoberfläche am Originalzufuhrschacht mit Alkohol reinigen. 22. Das Warnschild “Original entfernen” (H) in der Sprache des Bestimmungsortes des MFP auf das bestehende Schild am Originalzufuhrschacht aufkleben. Abbildung (b) Applicazione dell’etichetta “Procedura di funzionamento” (eccetto modelli 100 V) Applicazione dell’etichetta di avvertimento “Rimuovere originale!” (eccetto modelli 100 V) 19. Pulire con alcool la superficie dell’etichetta sul coperchio dell’unità di alimentazione originali. 20. Applicare l’etichetta “Procedura di funzionamento” (G) nella lingua corrispondente alla destinazione dell’MFP sopra l’etichetta del coperchio dell’unità di alimentazione originali. Figura (a) 操作ラベルの貼り付け (100V 仕様以外 ) 19.原稿送り装置カバーのラベル上をアルコー ル清掃する。 20.MFP 本体を使用する国の言語に合った操作ラ ベル (G) をラベルの上に貼り付ける。図 (a) 23. Die Schildoberfläche am Originalzufuhrschacht mit Alkohol reinigen. 24. Das Warnschild “Originalschriftseite nach oben” (I) in der Sprache des Bestimmungsortes des MFP auf das bestehende Schild am Originalzufuhrschacht aufkleben. Abbildung (c) Applicazione dell’etichetta di avvertimento “Originale rivolto verso l’alto!” (eccetto modelli 100 V) 21. Pulire con alcool la superficie dell’etichetta sul piano di ricevimento originali. 22. Applicare l’etichetta di avvertimento “Rimuovere originale!” (H) nella lingua corrispondente alla destinazione dell’MFP sopra l’etichetta del piano di ricevimento originali. Figura (b) 23. Pulire con alcool l’etichetta sul piano originali. 24. Applicare l’etichetta di avvertimento “Originale rivolto verso l’alto!” (I) nella lingua corrispondente alla destinazione dell’MFP sopra l’etichetta del piano originali. Figura (c) 原稿忘れラベルの貼り付け (100V 仕様以外 ) 21.原稿排紙テーブルのラベル上をアルコール 清掃する。 22.MFP 本体を使用する国の言語に合った原稿忘 れラベル (H) をラベルの上に貼り付ける。 図 (b) 原稿表向きラベルの貼り付け (100V 仕様以外 ) 23.原稿テーブルのラベル上をアルコール清掃 する。 24.MFP 本体を使用する国の言語に合った原稿表 向きラベル (I) をラベルの上に貼り付ける。 図 (c) 7 20mm 20mm c 20mm b b 20mm a [Operation check] 1. To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its center. 2. Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power on. 3. Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example. 4. Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the gap. Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual. [Vérification du fonctionnement] 1. Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1 ligne (c) en son axe. 2. Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension. 3. Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie. 4. Comparer l’original (a) avec l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en fonction du type d’écart. Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien. [Verifique el funcionamiento] 1. Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1 línea (c) dibujada en el centro. 2. Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal. 3. Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia. 4. Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separación. Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio. [Funktionsprüfung] 1. Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte gezeichnet sind. 2. Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten. 3. Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen. 4. Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem Abstandstyp durchführen. Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung. [Verifica del funzionamento] 1. Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina, preparare l’originale (a) tirando 4 linee (b) a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea (c) al centro. 2. Inserire la spina dell’alimentazione dell’MFP nella presa a muro, quindi posizionare l’interruttore principale su On. 3. Posizionare l’originale(a) sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e l’esempio di copia. 4. Confrontare l’originale (a) con l’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento. Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull’MFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni. [ 動作確認 ] 1. A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。 2. MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、メインスイッチを ON にする。 3. 原稿 (a) を DP 本体にセットし、 テストコピーを行い、動作およびコピーサンプルを確認する。 4. 原稿 (a) とコピーサンプルを比較し、基準値以上のずれがある場合、ずれ方に応じて調整を行う。 MFP 本体の画像確認及び調整を行ってから DP 本体の画像確認を行うこと。 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。 8 Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly. ● For the adjustment of DP oblique position, see page 10. <Reference value> Single copying: within ±3 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4 mm ● For the adjustment of DP original size, see page 13. <Reference value> within ±1.5% ● For the adjustment of DP leading edge timing, see page 15. <Reference value> within ±2.5 mm ● For the adjustment of DP original center line, see page 17. <Reference value> Single copying: ±2 mm; Duplex copying: within ±3 mm When using the DP auto adjusting original, automatic adjustments excluding the DP oblique position adjustment can be performed. ● For the adjustments using DP auto adjusting original, see page 20. Veiller à effectuer les réglages dans l’ordre suivant. Si ce n’est pas le cas, ils ne seront pas effectués correctement. ● Pour le réglage de la position oblique du DP, voir la page 10. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto : ±3 mm ; Copie recto-verso : ±4 mm ● Pour le réglage du format d’original du DP, voir la page 13. <Valeur de référence> ±1,5% ● Pour le réglage de la synchronisation du bord avant du DP, voir la page 15. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm ● Pour le réglage de l’axe de l’original du DP, voir la page 17. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto : ±2 mm ; Copie recto-verso : ±3 mm En cas d’utilisation de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP, les réglages automatiques, sauf le réglage de la position oblique du DP, peuvent être effectués. ● Pour les réglages effectués à l’aide de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP, voir la page 20. Haga el ajuste en el orden siguiente. De lo contrario, el ajuste no será correcto. ● Para el ajuste de la posición oblicua del DP, consulte la página 10. <Valor de referencia> Copiado por una cara: dentro de ±3 mm; Copiado dúplex: dentro de ±4 mm ● Para el ajuste del tamaño de original del DP, consulte la página 13. <Valor de referencia> dentro de ±1,5% ● Para el ajuste de la sincronización de extremo guía del DP, consulte la página 15. <Valor de referencia> dentro de ±2,5 mm ● Para el ajuste de la línea de centro del original del DP, consulte la página 17. <Valor de referencia> Copiado por una cara: ±2 mm; Copiado dúplex: dentro de ±3 mm Cuando se usa el original de ajuste automático del DP, se pueden realizar los ajustes automáticos, a excepción del ajuste de la posición oblicua del DP. ● Para los ajustes que usan el original de ajuste automático del DP, consulte la página 20. Die Einstellungen müssen in der folgenden Reihenfolge vorgenommen werden. Sonst kann die Einstellung nicht richtig ausgeführt werden. ● Einzelheiten zur Einstellung der Schräglage des DP siehe Seite 10. <Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Innerhalb ±3 mm; Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4 mm ● Einzelheiten zur Einstellung der Originalgröße des DP siehe Seite 13. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5% ● Einzelheiten zur Einstellung des Vorderkantentaktes des DP siehe Seite 15. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm ● Einzelheiten zur Einstellung der Originalmittellinie des DP siehe Seite 17. <Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: ±2 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3 mm Bei der Verwendung der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP können automatische Einstellungen, außer der Einstellung der Schräglage des DP, ausgeführt werden. ● Einzelheiten zu den Einstellungen mit der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP siehe Seite 20. Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente. ● Per la regolazione della posizione obliqua del DP, vedere pagina 10. <Valore di riferimento> Copia singola: tolleranza ±3 mm; Copia duplex: tolleranza ±4 mm ● Per la regolazione delle dimensioni dell’originale DP, vedere pagina 13. <Valore di riferimento> tolleranza ±1,5% ● Per la regolazione della fasatura del bordo di entrata del DP, vedere pagina 15. <Valore di riferimento> tolleranza ±2,5 mm ● Per la regolazione della linea centrale del DP, vedere pagina 17. <Valore di riferimento> Copia singola: ±2 mm; Copia duplex: tolleranza ±3 mm Se si utilizza l’autoregolazione originale DP, è possibile eseguire regolazioni automatiche, eccetto la regolazione della posizione obliqua del DP. ● Per le regolazioni con l’autoregolazione originale DP, vedere pagina 20. 必ず下記の順序で調整を行うこと。順序通りに調整を行わない場合、正しい調整ができない。 ● DP 斜め確認 10 ページ ＜基準値＞ 片面：± 3mm 以内： 両面：± 4mm 以内 ● DP 等倍度確認 13 ページ ＜基準値＞ ± 1.5% ● DP 先端タイミング確認 15 ページ ＜基準値＞ ± 2.5mm 以内 ● DP 原稿センター位置確認 17 ページ ＜基準値＞ 片面：± 2mm 以内 両面：± 3mm 以内 DP 自動調整原稿を使用すると、DP 斜め調整以外の自動調整が行える。 ● DP 自動調整原稿による調整 20 ページ 9 2 1 3mm/4mm 3mm/4mm 2 a d e [Checking DP oblique position] 1. Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the following procedure. <Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3 mm. For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4 mm. [Vérification de la position oblique du DP] 1. Vérifier l’écart horizontal entre la position de la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et celle de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante. <Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3 mm. Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4 mm. [Verificación de la posición oblicua del DP] 1. Compruebe la separación horizontal entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de las posiciones del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. <Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3 mm. Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4 mm. [Prüfen der Schräglage des DP] 1. Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. <Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3 mm liegen. Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4 mm liegen. [Verifica della posizione obliqua del DP] 1. Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) delle posizioni dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. <Valore di riferimento> Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3 mm. Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4 mm. [DP 斜め確認 ] 1. 原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) の左右のずれを確認する。 ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 ＜基準値＞ 片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：± 3mm 以内 両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：± 4mm 以内 10 3 C F F C Adjusting the DP oblique position. 1. Loosen two M4 × 14TP screws (F) of right and left fixing fittings (C). 2. Turn adjusting screw (3) at the rear side of the right hinge to adjust the DP position. For copy example (d): Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise and move the DP to the inner side. For copy example (e): Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and move the DP to the front side. Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1 mm 3. Perform a test copy. Réglage de la position oblique du DP. 1. Desserrer les deux vis TP M4 × 14 (F) des fixations (C) droite et gauche. 2. Tourner la vis de réglage (3) à l’arrière de la charnière droite pour régler la position du DP. Pour l’exemple de copie (d) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’intérieur. Pour l’exemple de copie (e) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’avant. Changement par graduation d’échelle : environ 1 mm 3. Effectuer une copie de test. Ajuste de la posición oblicua del DP. 1. Afloje dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (F) de los herrajes de fijación (C) derecho e izquierdo. 2. Gire el tornillo de ajuste (3) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha para ajustar la posición del DP. Para el ejemplo de copia (d): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido antihorario y mueva el DP al lado interno. Para el ejemplo de copia (e): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido horario y mueva el DP al lado frontal. Magnitud del cambio por escala: aprox. 1 mm 3. Haga una copia de prueba. Einstellen der Schräglage des DP. 1. Die zwei M4 × 14TP Schrauben (F) an der rechten und linken Befestigungshalterung (C) lösen. 2. Die Einstellschraube (3) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einstellen, um die DP-Position einzustellen. Kopierbeispiel (d): Die Einstellschraube nach links drehen und den DP nach innen schieben. Kopierbeispiel (e): Die Einstellschraube nach rechts drehen und den DP nach vorne schieben. Änderung pro Maßstab: Ungefähr 1 mm 3. Eine Testkopie erstellen. Regolazione della posizione obliqua del DP. 1. Allentare le due viti M4 × 14TP (F) degli accessori di fissaggio (C) destro e sinistro. 2. Ruotare la vite di regolazione (3) sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra per regolare la posizione del DP. Per l’esempio di copia (d): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso antiorario e spostare il DP verso l’interno. Per l’esempio di copia (e): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso orario e spostare il DP in avanti. Entità modifica per scala: circa 1 mm 3. Eseguire una copia di prova. DP 斜め調整 1. 左右の固定金具 (C) のビス M4 × 14TP (F) ２本を緩める。 2. 右ヒンジ後側の調整ビス (3) を回し、DP 本体の位置を調整する。 コピーサンプル (d) の場合：調整ビスを左に回し、 DP 本体を奥へ動かす コピーサンプル (e) の場合：調整ビスを右に回し、 DP 本体を手前へ動かす 1 目盛り当たりの変化量：約 1mm 3. テストコピーを行う。 11 2 1 3mm/4mm 3mm/4mm 2 a d e 4. Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values. <Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3 mm. For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4 mm. 5. After adjustment is completed, retighten two M4 × 14TP screws (F) that have been loosened in step 1. 4. Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suivantes. <Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3 mm. Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4 mm. 5. Une fois le réglage effectué, resserrer les deux vis TP M4 × 14 (F) desserrées à l’étape 1. 4. Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia. <Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3 mm. Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4 mm. 5. Una vez hecho el ajuste, vuelva a apretar los dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (F) que ha aflojado en el paso 1. 4. Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist. <Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3 mm liegen. Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4 mm liegen. 5. Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 × 14TP Schrauben (F), die in Schritt 1 gelöst wurden, wieder festziehen. 4. Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento seguenti. <Valore di riferimento> Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3 mm. Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4 mm. 5. Una volta conclusa la regolazione, serrare nuovamente le viti M4 × 14TP (F) che erano state allentate al Punto 1. 4. コピーサンプルの線 (2) ずれが基準値内になるまで、調整を繰り返す。 ＜基準値＞ 片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：± 3mm 以内 両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：± 4mm 以内 5. 調整終了後、手順 1 で緩めたビス M4 × 14TP (F) ２本を締め付ける。 12 X X’ X’ X 3 3 X X’ X’ 2 X 2 1 a f g -1.5% h X X’ X 100 i +1.5% [Checking DP original size] Adjusting DP original size. 1. Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the following procedure. <Reference value> For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5% For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5% 1. Set the maintenance mode U070, and adjust the copy example for each of single and duplex copying respectively. For the single copying, adjusts the CONVEY SPEED (sub-scan direction). For the duplex copying, adjusts the CIS MAIN ADJ (rear side mainscan direction) and the CIS SUB ADJ (rear side sub-scan direction). [Vérification du format d’original du DP] Réglage du format d’original du DP. 1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante. <Valeur de référence> Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est de ±1,5% Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est de ±1,5% 1. Exécuter le mode d’entretien U070 et régler l’exemple de copie pour la copie recto et la copie recto-verso respectivement. Pour la copie recto, régler CONVEY SPEED (vitesse d’acheminement) (direction du balayage secondaire). Pour la copie recto-verso, régler CIS MAIN ADJ (réglage principal du détecteur d’image à contact) (direction du balayage principal - arrière) et CIS SUB ADJ (réglage secondaire du détecteur d’image à contact) (direction du balayage secondaire - arrière). [Verificación del tamaño de original del DP] Ajuste del tamaño de original del DP. 1. Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. <Valor de referencia> Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5% Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5% 1. Active el modo de mantenimiento U070 y ajuste el ejemplo de copia para el copiado por una cara y para el copiado dúplex, respectivamente. Para el copiado por una cara, ajuste CONVEY SPEED (velocidad de transporte) (dirección de exploración secundaria). Para el copiado dúplex, ajuste CIS MAIN ADJ (aj principal CIS) (dirección de exploración principal del reverso) y CIS SUB ADJ (aj secundario CIS) (dirección de exploración secundaria del reverso). [Prüfen der Originalgröße des DP] Einstellen der Originalgröße des DP. 1. Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) (3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. <Bezugswert> Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5% Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5% 1. Den Wartungsmodus U070 einstellen und das Kopierbeispiel für jede Einzel- und Duplexkopie einstellen. Für die Einzelkopie die CONVEY SPEED (ZUFUHRGESCHWINDIGKEIT) (Subscanrichtung) einstellen. Für die Duplexkopie CIS MAIN ADJ (CIS-HAUPTEINSTELLUNG) (Hauptscanrichtung hinten) und CIS SUB ADJ (CIS-UNTEREINSTELLUNG) (Subscanrichtung hinten) einstellen. [Verifica delle dimensioni dell’originale DP] Regolazione delle dimensioni dell’originale DP. 1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. <Valore di riferimento> Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% [DP 等倍度確認 ] 1. 原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれを確認する。 ず れが基準値外の場合、 次の手順で調整を行う。 ＜基準値＞ 副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：± 1.5% 以内 主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：± 1.5% 以内 1. Impostare la modalità di manutenzione U070 e regolare l’esempio di copia rispettivamente per ogni esecuzione di copia singola e duplex. Per la copia singola, regolare CONVEY SPEED (VELOCITÀ TRASFERIMENTO) (orientamento della scansione ausiliare). Per la copia duplex, regola CIS MAIN ADJ (REGOLAZIONE SCANSIONE PRINCIPALE CIS) (orientamento scansione principale lato posteriore) e CIS SUB ADJ (REGOLAZIONE SCANSIONE AUSILIARE CIS) (orientamento scansione ausiliare lato posteriore). DP 等倍度調整 1. メンテナンスモード U070 をセットし、コピーサンプルの片面、両面別 に調整する。 片面の場合、 CONVEY SPEED( 副走査方向 ) の調整を行う。 両面の場合、 CIS MAIN ADJ( 裏面の主走査方向 ) と CIS SUB ADJ( 裏面 の副走査方向 ) の調整を行う。 13 X X’ X’ X 3 3 X X’ X’ 2 X 2 1 a f g -1.5% h X X’ X 100 i +1.5% 2. Adjust the values. For the shorter length copy example (f)(h): Increases the value. For the longer length copy example (g)(i): Decreases the value. Amount of change per step: 0.42 mm 3. Perform a test copy. 4. Repeat the steps 1 to 3 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy example shows the reference value. <Reference value> For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5% For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5% 2. Régler les valeurs. Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (f)(h) : augmenter la valeur. Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (g)(i) : diminuer la valeur. Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,42 mm 3. Effectuer une copie de test. 4. Répéter les étapes 1 à 3 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) (3) de l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence. <Valeur de référence> Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est de ±1,5% Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est de ±1,5% 2. Ajuste los valores. Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (f)(h): aumenta el valor. Para el ejemplo de copia más largo (g)(i): disminuye el valor. Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,42 mm 3. Haga una copia de prueba. 4. Repita los pasos 1 a 3 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia. <Valor de referencia> Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5% Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5% 2. Die Werte einstellen. Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (f)(h): Den Wert erhöhen. Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (g)(i): Den Wert verringern. Änderung pro Schritt: 0,42 mm 3. Eine Testkopie erstellen. 4. Die Schritte 1 bis 3 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist. <Bezugswert> Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5% Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5% 2. Regolare i valori. Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore (f)(h): aumenta il valore. Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza superiore (g)(i): riduce il valore. Entità modifica per passo: 0,42 mm 3. Eseguire una copia di prova 4. Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 1 a 3 fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento. <Valore di riferimento> Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% 2. 設定値を調整する。 長さが短い場合 コピーサンプル (f)(h)：設定値を上げる 長さが長い場合 コピーサンプル (g)(i)：設定値を下げる 1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.42mm 3. テストコピーを行う。 4. コピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 1 ～ 3 を繰り返す。 ＜基準値＞ 副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：± 1.5% 以内 主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：± 1.5% 以内 14 2.5mm 2.5mm 2 2 1 a j k [Checking the DP leading edge timing] Adjusting the DP leading edge timing. 1. Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the following procedure. <Reference value> Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm 1. Set the maintenance mode U071, and adjust the copy example for each of single, duplex and 180-degree rotation copying respectively. For the single copying, adjusts the ADJUST DATA1 (leading edge). For the duplex copying, adjusts the ADJUST DATA3 (rear side main-scan direction). For the 180-degree rotation copying, adjusts the ADJUST DATA5 (180-degree rotation). [Vérification de la synchronisation du bord avant du DP] Réglage de la synchronisation du bord avant du DP. 1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante. <Valeur de référence> Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2.5 mm 1. Exécuter le mode d’entretien U071 et régler l’exemple de copie pour la copie recto, la copie rectoverso et la copie avec rotation de 180 degrés respectivement. Pour la copie recto, régler ADJUST DATA1 (régler données1) (bord avant). Pour la copie recto-verso, régler ADJUST DATA3 (régler données3) (direction du balayage principal - arrière). Pour la copie avec rotation de 180 degrés, régler ADJUST DATA5 (régler données5) (rotation de 180 degrés). [Verificación de la sincronización de extremo guía del DP] Ajuste de la sincronización de extremo guía del DP. [Prüfen des Vorderkantentaktes des DP] Einstellen des Vorderkantentaktes des DP. 1. Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. <Bezugswert> Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm 1. Den Wartungsmodus U071 einstellen und das Kopierbeispiel für jede Einzelkopie, Duplexkopie und um 180 Grad gedrehte Kopie einstellen. Für die Einzelkopie ADJUST DATA1 (EINSTELLDATEN1) (Vorderkante). Für die Duplexkopie ADJUST DATA3 (EINSTELLDATEN3) (Hauptscanrichtung hinten). Für die um 180 Grad gedrehte Kopie ADJUST DATA5 (EINSTELLDATEN5) (Drehung um 180 Grad) einstellen. [Verifica della fasatura del bordo di entrata] Regolazione della fasatura del bordo di entrata. 1. Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. <Valor de referencia> Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm 1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. <Valore di riferimento> Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm [DP 先端タイミング確認 ] 1. 原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、 次の手順で調整を行う。 ＜基準値＞線 (2) の上下ずれ：± 2.5mm 以内 1. Active el modo de mantenimiento U071 y ajuste el ejemplo de copia para el copiado por una cara, para el copiado dúplex y para el copiado con giro de 180 grados, respectivamente. Para el copiado por una cara, ajuste ADJUST DATA1 (ajustar datos 1) (extremo guía). Para el copiado dúplex, ajuste ADJUST DATA3 (ajustar datos 3) (dirección de exploración principal del reverso). Para el copiado con giro de 180 grados, ajuste ADJUST DATA5 (ajustar datos 5) (giro de 180 grados). 1. Impostare la modalità di manutenzione U071 e regolare l’esempio di copia rispettivamente per ogni esecuzione di copia singola, duplex e in rotazione di 180 gradi. Per la copia singola, regola ADJUST DATA1 (REGOLAZIONE DATI1) (bordo di entrata). Per la copia duplex, regola ADJUST DATA3 (REGOLAZIONE DATI3) (orientamento scansione principale lato posteriore). Per la copia in rotazione di 180 gradi, regola ADJUST DATA5 (REGOLAZIONE DATI5) (rotazione 180 gradi). DP 先端タイミング調整 1. メンテナンスモード U071 をセットし、 コピーサンプルの片面、 両面、180 度回転別に調整する。 片面と両面の表の場合、ADJUST DATA1 ( 先端 ) の調整を行う。 両面の裏面の場合、ADJUST DATA3( 裏先端 ) の調整を行う。 180 度回転の場合、ADJUST DATA5(180 度回転 ) の調整を行う。 15 2.5mm 2.5mm 2 2 1 a j k 2. Adjust the values. For the faster leading edge timing, copy examples (j): Decreases the value. For the slower leading edge timing, copy examples (k): Increases the value. Amount of change per step: 0.17 mm 3. Perform a test copy. 4. Repeat the steps 1 to 3 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the reference value. <Reference value> Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm 2. Régler les valeurs. Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est plus rapide (j) : diminuer la valeur. Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est plus lente (k) : augmenter la valeur. Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,17 mm 3. Effectuer une copie de test. 4. Répéter les étapes 1 à 3 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence. <Valeur de référence> Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2.5 mm 2. Ajuste los valores. Para una sincronización más rápida de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia (j): disminuye el valor. Para una sincronización más lenta de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia (k): aumenta el valor. Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,17 mm 3. Haga una copia de prueba. 4. Repita los pasos 1 a 3 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia. <Valor de referencia> Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm 2. Die Werte einstellen. Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (j): Den Wert verringern. Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (k): Den Wert erhöhen. Änderung pro Schritt: 0,17 mm 3. Eine Testkopie erstellen. 4. Die Schritte 1 bis 3 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist. <Bezugswert> Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm 2. Regolare i valori. Per accelerare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (j): riduce il valore. Per rallentare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (k): aumenta il valore. Entità modifica per passo: 0,17 mm 3. Eseguire una copia di prova 4. Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 1 a 3 fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento. <Valore di riferimento> Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm 2. 設定値を調整する。 先端タイミングが早い場合 コピーサンプル (j)：設定値を下げる 先端タイミングが遅い場合 コピーサンプル (k)：設定値を上げる 1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.17mm 3. テストコピーを行う。 4. コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 1 ～ 3 を繰り返す。 ＜基準値＞線 (2) の上下ずれ：± 2.5mm 以内 16 2mm/3mm 1 2mm/3mm 2 a 2 l m [Checking the DP original center line ] 1. Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the following procedure. <Reference value> Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3 mm [Vérification de l’axe de l’original du DP] 1. Vérifier l’écart entre l’axe (1) de l’original (a) et l’axe (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante. <Valeur de référence> Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2 mm Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3 mm [Verificación de la línea de centro del original del DP] 1. Compruebe la separación entre la línea de centro (1) del original (a) y la línea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. <Valor de referencia> Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una cara: ±2 mm Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex: ±3 mm [Prüfen der Originalmittellinie des DP] 1. Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mittellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. <Bezugswert> Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2 mm Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3 mm [Verifica della linea centrale del DP] 1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. <Valore di riferimento> Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3 mm [DP 原稿センター位置確認 ] 1. 原稿 (a) の中心線 (1) とコピーサンプルの中心線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 ＜基準値＞ 片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：± 2mm 以内 両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：± 3mm 以内 17 2mm/3mm 1 2mm/3mm 2 a 2 l m Adjusting the DP original center line. 1. Set the maintenance mode U072, and adjust the copy example for each of single, duplex and 180-degree rotation copying respectively. For the single copying or the surface of the duplex copying, adjusts the ADJUST DATA1 (surface). For the rear side of the duplex copying, adjusts the ADJUST DATA2 (rear side). For the 180-degree rotation copying, adjusts the ADJUST DATA3 (180-degree rotation). Réglage de l’axe de l’original du DP. 1. Exécuter le mode d’entretien U072 et régler l’exemple de copie pour la copie recto, la copie recto-verso et la copie avec rotation de 180 degrés respectivement. Pour la copie recto ou la surface de la copie recto-verso, régler ADJUST DATA1 (régler données1) (surface). Pour le verso de la copie recto-verso, régler ADJUST DATA2 (régler données2) (verso). Pour la copie avec rotation de 180 degrés, régler ADJUST DATA3 (régler données3) (rotation de 180 degrés). Ajuste de la línea de centro del original del DP. 1. Active el modo de mantenimiento U072 y ajuste el ejemplo de copia para el copiado por una cara, para el copiado dúplex y para el copiado con giro de 180 grados, respectivamente. Para el copiado por una cara o para el anverso en el copiado dúplex, ajuste ADJUST DATA1 (ajustar datos 1) (anverso). Para el reverso en el copiado dúplex, ajuste ADJUST DATA2 (ajustar datos 2) (reverso). Para el copiado con giro de 180 grados, ajuste ADJUST DATA3 (ajustar datos 3) (giro de 180 grados). Einstellen der Originalmittellinie des DP. 1. Den Wartungsmodus U072 einstellen und das Kopierbeispiel für jede Einzelkopie, Duplexkopie und um 180 Grad gedrehte Kopie einstellen. Für die Einzelkopie oder die Oberfläche der Duplexkopie ADJUST DATA1 (EINSTELLDATEN1) (Oberfläche) einstellen. Für die Rückseite der Duplexkopie ADJUST DATA2 (EINSTELLDATEN2) (Rückseite) einstellen. Für die um 180 Grad gedrehte Kopie ADJUST DATA3 (EINSTELLDATEN3) (Drehung um 180 Grad) einstellen. Regolazione della linea centrale del DP. 1. Impostare la modalità di manutenzione U072 e regolare l’esempio di copia rispettivamente per ogni esecuzione di copia singola, duplex e in rotazione di 180 gradi. Per la copia singola o per la superficie della copia duplex, regola ADJUST DATA1 (REGOLAZIONE DATI1) (superficie). Per il lato posteriore della copia duplex, regola ADJUST DATA2 (REGOLAZIONE DATI2) (lato posteriore). Per la copia in rotazione di 180 gradi, regola ADJUST DATA3 (REGOLAZIONE DATI3) (rotazione 180 gradi). DP 原稿センター位置調整 1. メンテナンスモード U072 をセットし、 コピーサンプルの片面、 両面、180 度回転別に調整を行う。 片面の場合、両面の表の場合、ADJUST DATA1( 表面 ) を調整する。 両面の裏の場合、ADJUST DATA2( 裏面 ) を調整する。 180 度回転の場合、ADJUST DATA3(180 度回転 ) を調整する。 18 2mm/3mm 1 2mm/3mm 2 a 2 l m 2. Adjust the values. If the center moves more front, copy example (l): Increases the value. If the center moves inner, copy sample (m): Decreases the value. Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm 3. Perform a test copy. 4. Repeat the steps 1 to 3 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the reference value. <Reference value> Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3 mm 2. Régler les valeurs. Pour l’exemple de copie (l) dont l’axe se déplace davantage vers l’avant : augmenter la valeur. Pour l’exemple de copie (m) dont l’axe se déplace vers l’intérieur : diminuer la valeur. Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,085 mm 3. Effectuer une copie de test. 4. Répéter les étapes 1 à 3 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence. <Valeur de référence> Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2 mm Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3 mm 2. Ajuste los valores. Si el centro se desplaza más hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (l): aumenta el valor. Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro, ejemplo de copia (m): disminuye el valor. Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm 3. Haga una copia de prueba. 4. Repita los pasos 1 a 3 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia. <Valor de referencia> Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una cara: ±2 mm Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex: ±3 mm 2. Die Werte einstellen. Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert erhöhen. Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert verringern. Änderung pro Schritt: 0,085 mm 3. Eine Testkopie erstellen. 4. Die Schritte 1 bis 3 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist. <Bezugswert> Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2 mm Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3 mm 2. Regolare i valori. Se il centro si sposta più avanti, esempio di copia (1): aumenta il valore. Se il centro si sposta verso l’interno, esempio di copia (m): riduce il valore. Entità modifica per passo: 0,085 mm 3. Eseguire una copia di prova 4. Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 1 a 3 fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento. <Valore di riferimento> Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3 mm 2. 設定値を調整する。 センターが手前にずれている場合 コピーサンプル (l)：設定値を上げる センターが奥にずれている場合 コピーサンプル (m) 設定値を下げる 1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.085mm 3. テストコピーを行う。 4. コピーサンプルの中心線 (2) ずれが基準値内になるまで手順 1 ～ 3 を繰り返す。 ＜基準値＞ 片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：± 2mm 以内 両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：± 3mm 以内 19 5mm F 60 1mm A(60 5mm) R 128 1mm [Adjustment using the DP auto adjustment original] 1. Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the original from the place where F and R are marked. 2. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the DP (FACE UP) key, the INPUT key and the START key in order to adjust the surface. 3. When RESULT OK 00 appears on the display, the adjustment is completed. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment is failed. Check the original set position and repeat the steps 1 to 2 until RESULT OK 00 appears. For details, see the service manual. [Réglage à l’aide de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP] 1. Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l’original à partir de l’emplacement des repères F et R. 2. Exécuter le mode d’entretien U411. Appuyer sur les touches DP (FACE UP) (DP - face vers le haut), INPUT (entrer) et START (démarrer) pour régler la surface. 3. Lorsque le message RESULT OK 00 (résultat OK 00) s’affiche sur l’écran, le réglage est terminé. Si le message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s’affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifier la position de réglage de l’original et répéter les étapes 1 et 2 jusqu’à ce que le message RESULT OK 00 (résultat OK 00) s’affiche. Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien. [Ajuste usando el original de ajuste automático del DP] 1. Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. 2. Active el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse la tecla DP (FACE UP) (cara arriba), la tecla INPUT (entrada) y la tecla START (inicio) para ajustar el anverso. 3. Cuando aparece en la pantalla RESULT OK 00 (resultado correcto 00), el ajuste ha finalizado. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición del original colocado y repita los pasos 1 a 2 hasta que aparezca RESULT OK 00 (resultado correcto 00). Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio. [Einstellung mit der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP] 1. F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle setzen. 2. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einstellen. Die Tasten DP (FACE UP) (DP SCHRIFTSEITE NACH OBEN), INPUT (EINGABE) und START der Reihe nach drücken, um die Oberfläche einzustellen. 3. Bei richtigem Ergebnis wird RESULT OK 00 (ERGEBNIS OK 00) auf der Anzeige angezeigt, und die Einstellung ist abgeschlossen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX)angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen. Die eingestellte Originalposition prüfen und die Schritte 1 und 2 wiederholen, bis RESULT OK 00 (ERGEBNIS OK 00) angezeigt wird. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung. [Regolazione con l’autoregolazione originale DP] 1. Orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso l’alto e disporre l’originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. 2. Impostare la modalità di manutenzione U411. Premere il tasto DP (FACE UP, FACCIATA SU), il tasto INPUT (IMMETTI) e il tasto START (AVVIA) per regolare la superficie. 3. Quando sul display appare RESULT OK 00 (RISULTATO OK 00), la regolazione è completata. Se compare ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazione dell’originale e ripetere le operazioni da 1 a 3 fino a quando non viene visualizzato RESULT OK 00 (RISULTATO OK 00). Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni. [DP 自動調整原稿による調整 ] 1. DP 自動調整原稿の F、 R を上に向け、F、R が書かれている方から DP 本体へセットする。 2. メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 DP(FACE UP) キー、INPUT キー、START の順に押し、表面の調整を行う。 3. ディスプレイに RESULT OK 00 が表示されれば調整完了となる。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。 原稿のセット位置を確認し、RESULT OK 00 が表示されるまで手順 1 ～ 2 を繰り返す。 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。 20 5mm F 60 1mm A(60 5mm) R 128 1mm 4. After completing the surface adjustment, direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original downward and set the original by inserting the side where the F and R are marked into the DP first. 5. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the DP (FACE DOWN) key, NORMAL TARGET key, START INPUT key and START in order to adjust the rear surface. 6. When RESULT OK 00 appears on the display, the adjustment is completed. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment is failed. Check the original set position and repeat the steps 4 to 5 until RESULT OK 00 appears. For details, see the service manual. 4. Une fois le réglage de la surface effectué, diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP vers le bas et placer l’original en introduisant en premier dans le DP le côté sur lequel F et R sont indiqués. 5. Exécuter le mode d’entretien U411. Appuyer sur les touches DP (FACE DOWN) (DP - FACE VERS LE BAS), NORMAL TARGET (CIBLE NORMALE), START INPUT (DÉMARRER ENTRÉE) puis START (DÉMARRER) afin de régler la surface arrière. 6. Lorsque le message RESULT OK 00 (résultat OK 00) s’affiche sur l’écran, le réglage est terminé. Si le message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s’affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifier la position de réglage de l’original et répéter les étapes 4 et 5 jusqu’à ce que le message RESULT OK 00 (résultat OK 00) s’affiche. Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien. 4. Una vez hecho el ajuste del anverso, dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia abajo y coloque el original insertando en el DP, en primer lugar, el lado en el que están marcados F y R. 5. Active el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas DP (FACE DOWN) (CARA ABAJO), NORMAL TARGET (DESTINO NORMAL), START INPUT (INICIAR ENTRADA) y START (INICIO) para ajustar el reverso. 6. Cuando aparece en la pantalla RESULT OK 00 (resultado correcto 00), el ajuste ha finalizado. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición del original colocado y repita los pasos 4 a 5 hasta que aparezca RESULT OK 00 (resultado correcto 00). Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio. 4. Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflächeneinstellung F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das Original einstellen, indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den DP eingeführt wird. 5. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einstellen. Die Tasten DP (FACE DOWN) (SCHRIFTSEITE NACH UNTEN), NORMAL TARGET (NORMALZIEL), START INPUT (EINGABE) und START der Reihe nach drücken, um die hintere Oberfläche einzustellen. 6. Bei richtigem Ergebnis wird RESULT OK 00 (ERGEBNIS OK 00)auf der Anzeige angezeigt, und die Einstellung ist abgeschlossen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen. Die eingestellte Originalposition prüfen und die Schritte 4 und 5 wiederholen, bis RESULT OK 00 (ERGEBNIS OK 00) angezeigt wird. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung. 4. Una volta conclusa la regolazione della superficie, orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso il basso e disporre l’originale inserendo nel DP prima il lato su cui sono contrassegnati F e R. 5. Impostare la modalità di manutenzione U411. Premere il tasto DP (FACE DOWN, FACCIATA GIÙ), il tasto NORMAL TARGET (DESTINAZIONE NORMALE), il tasto START INPUT (AVVIA INPUT) e START (AVVIA) per regolare la superficie posteriore. 6. Quando sul display appare RESULT OK 00 (RISULTATO OK 00), la regolazione è completata. Se compare ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazione dell’originale e ripetere le operazioni da 4 a 5 fino a quando non viene visualizzato RESULT OK 00 (RISULTATO OK 00). Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni. 4. 表面の調整完了後、DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を下に向け、F、 R が書かれている方から DP 本体へセットする。 5. メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 DP(FACE DOWN) キー、NORMAL TARGET キー、START キー、INPUT キー、START の順に押し、裏面の調整を行う。 6. ディスプレイに RESULT OK 00 が表示されれば調整完了となる。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。 原稿のセット位置を確認し、RESULT OK 00 が表示されるまで手順 4 ～ 5 を繰り返す。 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。 21 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR BUILT-IN FINISHER B A G English Supplied parts A B C D Transfer unit ................................................. 1 Intermediate tray .......................................... 1 Staple cover.................................................. 1 Large ejection cover ..................................... 1 Français Pièces fournies A B C D Unité de transfert .......................................... 1 Plateau intermédiaire ................................... 1 Couvercle d’agrafes ..................................... 1 Grand couvercle d’éjection ........................... 1 Español Partes suministradas A B C D Unidad de transferencia ............................... 1 Bandeja intermediaria .................................. 1 Cubierta de grapas ....................................... 1 Cubierta de expulsión grande....................... 1 Deutsch Gelieferte Teile A B C D Transfereinheit.............................................. 1 Zwischenablage ........................................... 1 Hefterabdeckung .......................................... 1 Große Auswurfabdeckung............................ 1 Italiano Parti fornite A B C D Unità di trasferimento ................................... 1 Vassoio intermedio ....................................... 1 Coperchio della graffatrice............................ 1 Coperchio grande di espulsione carta .......... 1 日本語 付属品 A B C D 搬送ユニット ........................1 中間トレイ ..........................1 ステープルカバー ....................1 排出カバー大 ........................1 E F G H I J K D C H I J K E L F M Front ejection cover ......................................1 Rear ejection cover .......................................1 Copy tray.......................................................1 Staple cartridge .............................................1 Flat spring ejection........................................1 Ground plate .................................................1 Pull label .......................................................1 L TP screw M3 × 05.................................... 7 M Operation section securing pin .....................1 E F G H I J K L M Couvercle d’éjection avant............................1 Couvercle d’éjection arrière ..........................1 Plateau à copies ...........................................1 Cartouche d’agrafes......................................1 Dispositif d’éjection à ressort plat .................1 Plaque de masse ..........................................1 Etiquette Tirer................................................1 Vis TP M3 × 05 .............................................7 Broche de fixation de la section de commande ....................................................1 E F G H I J K L M Cubierta de expulsión frontal ........................1 Cubierta de expulsión trasera .......................1 Bandeja de copias ........................................1 Cartucho de grapas ......................................1 Expulsión por resorte plano ..........................1 Placa a tierra.................................................1 Etiqueta de tiro..............................................1 Tornillo TP M3 × 05 .......................................7 Pasador de fijación de la sección de funcionamiento .............................................1 E F G H I J K L M Vordere Auswurfabdeckung..........................1 Hintere Auswurfabdeckung...........................1 Kopienablage ................................................1 Heftklammerpatrone......................................1 Blattfederauswurf ..........................................1 Grundplatte ...................................................1 Abziehaufkleber ............................................1 TP-Schraube M3 × 05...................................7 Bedienteil-Sicherungsstift .............................1 E F G H I J K L M Coperchio frontale di espulsione carta .........1 Coperchio posteriore di espulsione carta......1 Vassoio copie................................................1 Cartuccia della graffatrice .............................1 Molla piatta a espulsione ..............................1 Piastra di terra .............................................1 Etichetta staccabile .....................................1 Vite TP M3 × 05 ............................................7 Perno di fissaggio della sezione di comando ..........1 E F G H I J K L 排出カバー前........................1 排出カバー後........................1 排出トレイ..........................1 ステープルカートリッジ..............1 板バネ排出..........................1 アース版............................1 PULL ラベル .........................1 ビス M3 × 05TP ......................7 M 操作部固定ピン...................... 1 1 A M Note When placing the transfer unit (A) on the floor or the like, be sure to place it upside down. If not, the stapler mounting plate may be deformed, resulting in a malfunction. Preparation When installing a finisher, be sure to turn the MFP main switch off and disconnect the MFP power plug from the wall outlet. 1. Pull the lever toward the front side to raise the operation section, and secure it using the operation section securing pin (M). Note After the finisher is installed, the operation section is secured and the angle cannot be adjusted. 2. Open the left transfer cover and the front cover. Remarque Lorsqu’on place l’unité de transfert (A) sur le sol ou sur une surface équivalente, veiller à la placer sens dessus dessous. Sinon, la plaque de montage de l’agrafeuse risque d’être déformée, ce qui causera des anomalies de fonctionnement. Nota Cuando se coloca la unidad de transferencia (A) en el piso o similar, asegúrese de colocarlo al revés. de lo contrario, la placa de montaje del grapador puede deformarse, provocando un mal funcionamiento. Hinweis Wenn die Transfereinheit (A) auf den Boden oder dergleichen gestellt wird, muss sie auf den Kopf gestellt werden. Anderenfalls kann die Heftermontageplatte verformt werden, was zu einer Funktionsstörung führt. Préparation 1. Tirer le levier vers l’avant pour élever la section de commande, et le fixer à l’aide de la broche de fixation de la section de commande (M). Note Une fois que le finisseur a été installé, la section de commande est fixée et il est impossible de régler l’angle. 2. Ouvrir le couvercle de transfert gauche et le couvercle avant. Preparación 1. Tire de la palanca hacia el lado delantero para que suba la sección de funcionamiento y asegure utilizando el pasador de fijación de la sección de funcionamiento (M). Nota Después de instalar el finalizador, la sección de funcionamiento queda fijada y no puede ajustar el ángulo. 2. Abra la cubierta de transferencia izquierda y la cubierta frontal. Vorbereitung 1. Den Hebel zur Vorderseite ziehen, um den Bedienteil anzuheben, und diesen mit dem Bedienteil-Sicherungsstift (M) sichern. Lors de l’installation d’un finisseur, veiller à mettre l’interrupteur principal du MFP hors tension et à débrancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP de la prise murale. Cuando se instala un finalizador, asegúrese de desconectar el interruptor principal del MFP y desenchufar el cable eléctrico del tomacorriente de la pared. Schalten Sie vor der Installation des Fixierers unbedingt den Hauptschalter des MFP aus, und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker des MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab. Hinweis Nach der Installation des Fixierers wird der Bedienteil gesichert, und der Winkel kann nicht mehr verändert werden. 2. Die linke Transferabdeckung und die Frontabdeckung öffnen. Nota Preparazione Quando si posiziona l’unità di trasferimento (A) sul pavimento o in luoghi simili, occorre posizionarla rovesciata. In caso contrario, la piastra di montaggio della pinzatrice potrebbe venire deformata, provocando malfunzionamenti. Al momento dell’installazione della finitrice, assicuratevi innanzitutto di spegnere l’MFP e scollegarne il cavo di alimentazione dalla presa di rete. ［注意事項］ ［取付手順］ 搬送ユニット (A) を床等に置く場合には、 必ず 裏返しにした状態で置く。そのまま置くとス テープラ取付板が変形し、不具合の原因となる。 フィニッシャーを取り付ける際は、 必ず MFP 本 体のメインスイッチを OFF にし、 電源プラグを 外して作業を行うこと。 2 1. Tirate la leva verso il lato frontale per sollevare la sezione di comando, e fissarla usando il perno di fissaggio della sezione di comando (M). Nota Dopo che avete installato il finitore, la sezione di comando è stata assicurata e l’angolo non può essere regolato. 2. Aprite il coperchio di trasferimento sinistro e quindi il coperchio frontale. 1. レバーを手前に引いて、 操作部を上方向に持 ち上げ、操作部固定ピン (M) で固定する。 注意 フィニッシャを取り付けると、 操作部は固定 となり、角度調整はできません。 2. 搬送左カバーおよび前カバーを開ける。 8 1 2 5 4 7 6 3 3. Remove the staple holder (1), remove the two screws (2) from the upper side and the front side, and loosen the two screws (3) on the left side. 4. Open the hook (4) on the right side and remove the left front cover (5). 5. Remove the screw (6) and the pin (7) to remove the upper left cover (8). 3. Retirer le support d’agrafes (1), retirer les deux vis (2) du côté supérieur et du côté avant, et desserrer les deux vis (3) du côté gauche. 4. Ouvrir le crochet (4) se trouvant sur le côté droit et retirer le couvercle avant gauche (5). 5. Retirer la vis (6) et la broche (7) pour enlever le couvercle supérieur gauche (8). 3. Desmonte el soporte de grapas (1), saque los dos tornillos (2) del lado superior y el lado delantero y afloje los dos tornillos (3) en el lado izquierdo. 4. Abra el gancho (4) en el lado derecho y desmonte la cubierta delantera izquierda (5). 5. Quite el tornillo (6) y el pasador (7) para desmontar la cubierta superior izquierda (8). 3. Den Heftklammerhalter (1) entfernen, die zwei Schrauben (2) an der Ober- und Vorderseite herausdrehen, und die zwei Schrauben (3) auf der linken Seite lösen. 4. Den Haken (4) auf der rechten Seite öffnen, und die linke Frontabdeckung (5) abnehmen. 5. Die Schraube (6) und den Stift (7) entfernen, um die obere linke Abdeckung (8) abzunehmen. 3. Rimuovete il vassoio graffette (1), rimuovete le due viti (2) dal lato superiore e dal lato frontale e allentate le due viti (3) sul lato sinistro. 4. Aprite il gancio (4) che si trova sul lato destro e rimuovete il coperchio frontale sinistro (5). 5. Rimuovere la vite (6) e il perno (7) per rimuovere il coperchio superiore sinistro (8). 3. ステープルホルダー(1) を取り外し、 上側と 前側のビス (2)2 本を外して、左側のビス (3)2 本をゆるめる。 4. 右側の引っかけ部 (4) を開いて左前カバー (5) を取り外す。 5. ビス (6)1 本およびピン (7)1 本を外して左 上カバー(8) を取り外す。 3 12 10 I 11 13 9 6. Remove the two screws (9) and then remove the ejection cover (10) with the mounting plate. 7. Remove the two screws (11) and then remove the inner ejection cover (12). 8. Remove the screw (13) located at the front of the static charge eliminator of the MFP, fit the flat spring ejection (I) from the lower side, and secure it with the removed screw (13). 6. Enlever les deux vis (9), puis enlever le couvercle d’éjection (10) avec la plaque de montage. 7. Enlever les deux vis (11), puis enlever le couvercle d’éjection interne (12). 8. Retirer la vis (13) située à l’avant du dispositif d’élimination de charge statique du MFP, mettre en place le dispositif d’éjection à ressort plat (I) par le côté inférieur, puis le fixer à l’aide de la vis retirée (13). 6. Saque los dos tornillos (9) y desmonte la cubierta de expulsión (10) con la placa de montaje. 7. Saque los dos tornillos (11) y desmonte la cubierta de expulsión interior (12). 8. Quite el tornillo (13) ubicado en el frente del eliminador de carga estática del MFP, encaje la expulsión por resorte plano (I) del lado inferior y asegúrelo con el tornillo quitado (13). 6. Die zwei Schrauben (9) entfernen, und dann die Auswurfabdeckung (10) mit der Montageplatte abnehmen. 7. Die zwei Schrauben (11) entfernen, und dann die innere Auswurfabdeckung (12) abnehmen. 8. Die Schraube (13) an der Vorderseite des Entstörers für statische Aufladung des MFP entfernen, dann den Blattfederauswurf (I) von der Unterseite einpassen und mit der entfernten Schraube (13) befestigen. 6. Rimuovete ora le due viti (9) e quindi il coperchio di espulsione (10) con la piastra di montaggio. 7. Rimuovete le due viti (11) e quindi il coperchio interno di espulsione (12). 8. Rimuovere la vite (13) situata nella parte frontale dell’eliminatore di cariche statiche dell’MFP, montare la molla piatta a espulsione (I) nel lato inferiore e fissarla con la vite rimossa (13). 6. ビス (9)2 本を外し、 排出カバー(10) を取付 板ごと取り外す。 7. ビス (11)2 本を外し、 排出内カバー(12) を取 り外す。 8. 本体の除電器手前の固定ビス (13)1 本を取 り外し、板バネ排出 (I) を下からはめ込み、 取り外したビス (13)1 本で取り付ける。 4 A 15 14 16 17 9. Remove the blue screw (14) from the transfer unit (A) and then remove the securing plate (15). 10. Remove the securing tape (17) from the 13-pin connector (16), pass the wire under the stapler motor, and connect the wire with the 13-pin connector (16). 9. Retirer la vis bleue (14) de l’unité de transfert (A) puis enlever la plaque de fixation (15). 10. Retirer la bande de fixation (17) du connecteur à treize broches (16), passer le fil au-dessous du moteur de l’agrafeuse, et connecter le fil à l’aide du connecteur à treize broches (16). 9. Quite el tornillo azul (14) de la unidad de transferencia (A) y desmonte la placa de fijación (15). 10. Despegue la cinta de fijación (17) del conector de 13 pasadores (16), pase el cable por debajo del motor del grapador y conecte el cable con el conector de 13 pasadores (16). 9. Die blaue Schraube (14) von der Transfereinheit (A) entfernen, und dann die Halteplatte (15) abnehmen. 10. Das Sicherungsband (17) vom 13-poligen Steckverbinder (16) entfernen, dann das Kabel unter dem Heftermotor hindurchführen und an den 13-poligen Steckverbinder (16) anschließen. 9. Rimuovete la vite blu (14) dall’unità di trasferimento (A) e poi rimuovete la piastra di fissaggio (15). 10. Rimuovere il nastri di sicurezza (17) dal connettore a 13 pin (16), far passare il filo sotto il motore della pinzatrice e collegare il filo con il connettore a 13 pin (16). 9. 搬送ユニット (A) の青ビス (14)1 本を外して固定板 (15) を取り外す。 10.13P コネクタ (16) の固定テープ (17)1 本を取り外し、 ステープルモータの下に電線を通して 13P コネクタ (16) を接続する。 5 18 L A L 11. Insert the transfer unit (A) into the MFP from the front side and slide it to the left. Secure the unit using two TP screws M3 × 05 (L) and the pin (18) that has been fitted to the transfer unit (A). 11. Insérer l’unité de transfert (A) dans le MFP depuis l’avant et le faire glisser vers la gauche. Fixer l’unité avec deux vis TP M3 × 05 (L) et la goupille (18) qui a été ajustée dans l’unité de transfert (A). 11. Inserte la unidad de transferencia (A) en el MFP desde el lado delantero y deslice hacia la izquierda. Asegure la unidad utilizando dos tornillos TP M3 × 05 (L) y el pasador (18) colocado en la unidad de transferencia (A). 11. Die Transfereinheit (A) von vorn in den MFP einführen und nach links schieben. Die Einheit mit zwei TP-Schrauben M3 × 05 (L) und dem an der Transfereinheit (A) angebrachten Stift (18) sichern. 11. Inserite nell’MFP l’unità di trasferimento (A) dal lato frontale e quindi fatela scorrere a sinistra. Fissate l’unità usando due viti TP M3 × 05 (L) e il perno (18) che avete inserito nell’unità di trasferimento (A). 11.搬送ユニット (A) を MFP 本体の機械前側より挿入し、左側にスライドする。 ビス M3 × 05TP(L) 2 本と搬送ユニット (A) に取り付いているピン (18)1 本で固定する。 6 26 24 20 19 L 25 J 22 L 21 23 25 12. Fit the ground plate (J) using a TP screw M3 × 05 (L). 13. Fit the hook (20) and the hole (22) of the transfer unit (A) to the oblong hole (19) and the projection (21) of the frame of the MFP and secure the unit using a TP screw M3 × 05 (L). Arrange the cable (23) to position it under the metal fittings (24) . 14. Remove the screw (25) from the left rear side of the MFP, turn the lever (26) upward, and fit the screw (25) again to the lower hole. 12. Placer la plaque de masse (J) à l’aide d’une vis TP M3 × 05 (L). 13. Placer le crochet (20) et l’orifice (22) de l’unité de transfert (A) dans l’orifice oblong (19) et dans la saillie (21) du cadre du MFP, et fixer l’unité à l’aide d’une vis TP M3 × 05 (L). Arranger le câble (23) pour le mettre en place au-dessous des garnitures en métal (24) . 14. Enlever la vis (25) du côté arrière gauche du MFP, tourner le levier (26) vers le haut, et replacer la vis (25) dans l’orifice inférieur. 12. Encaje la placa de tierra (J) utilizando un tornillo TP M3 × 05 (L). 13. Encaje el gancho (20) y el orificio (22) de la unidad de transferencia (A) al orificio alargado (19) y la saliente (21) del armazón del MFP y asegure la unidad utilizando un tornillo TP M3 × 05 (L). Instale el cable (23) para ubicarlos debajo de los herrajes de metal (24). 14. Saque el tornillo (25) del lado trasero del MFP, mueva la palanca (26) hacia arriba, y fije el tornillo (25) de nuevo en el orificio inferior. 12. Die Grundplatte (J) mit einer TP-Schraube M3 × 05 (L) befestigen. 13. Den Haken (20) und das Loch (22) der Transfereinheit (A) in das Langloch (19) und den Vorsprung (21) des MFP-Rahmens einpassen, und die Einheit mit einer TPSchraube M3 × 05 (L) sichern. Das Kabel (23) unter den Metallbeschlägen (24) hindurchführen. 14. Die Schraube (25) von der linken Rückseite des MFP entfernen, den Hebel (26) nach oben drehen, und die Schraube (25) wieder in das untere Loch einpassen. 12. Montate la piastra di terra (J) usando una vite TP M3 × 05 (L). 13. Inserite il gancio (20) e il foro (22) dell’unità di trasferimento (A) nel foro oblungo (19) e nella sporgenza (21) del telaio dell’MFP e assicurate l’unità usando una vite TP M3 × 05 (L). Disponete il cavo (23) in modo da farlo scorrere al di sotto del supporto metallico (24). 14. Rimuovete la vite (25) dal lato posteriore sinistro dell’MFP, girate la leva (26) verso l’alto e inserite di nuovo la vite (25) nel foro inferiore. 12.アース板 (J) をビス M3 × 05TP(L) 1 本で取 り付ける。 13.搬送ユニット (A) のフック (20) と穴 (22) を MFP 本体フレームの長穴 (19) と突起部 (21) に合わせて取り付け、ビス M3 × 05TP(L)1 本で固定する。 電線 (23) が金具 (24) の下側になるように 配線する。 14.MFP 本体左後側のビス (25)1 本を取り外し、 レバー(26) を上方向に回転させ、 下側の穴に 再度ビス (25) を取り付ける。 7 29 27 30 B 28 A 30 B 15. Insert the intermediate tray (B) and connect the connector (white) (27) of the intermediate tray (B) to the transfer unit. Connect the connectors (gray) (28) to the connectors of the MFP as shown in the illustration. Connect the gray connector (28) with more pins to the upper connector and the gray connector (28) with less pins to the lower connector. 16. Hang the right and left pins (29) of the intermediate tray (B) on the recessed portions (30) of the MFP and the transfer unit (A). Raise the intermediate tray (B) and set it as shown in the illustration. 15. Insérer le plateau intermédiaire (B) et connecter le connecteur (blanc) (27) du plateau intermédiaire (B) à l’unité de transfert. Connecter les connecteurs (gris) (28) aux connecteurs du MFP comme montré dans l’illustration. Connecter le connecteur (gris) (28) avec le plus grand nombre de broches au connecteur supérieur et le connecteur (gris) (28) avec le plus petit nombre de broches au connecteur inférieur. 16. Accrocher les goupilles droite et gauche (29) du plateau intermédiaire (B) sur les parties en retrait (30) du MFP et de l’unité de transfert (A). Elever le plateau intermédiaire (B) et le placer comme indiqué sur l’illustration. 15. Inserte la bandeja intermediaria (B) y conecte el conectador (blanco) (27) de la bandeja intermediaria (B) en la unidad de transferencia. Conecte los conectores (grises) (28) en los conectores del MFP tal como aparece en las figuras. Conecte el conector (gris) (28) con más patillas en el conector superior y el conector (gris) (28) con menos patillas en el conector inferior. 16. Cuelgue los pasadores derecho e izquierdo (29) de a bandeja intermediaria (B) en las partes entradas (30) del MFP y la unidad de transferencia (A). Suba la bandeja intermediaria (B) y fije tal como aparece en la figura. 15. Die Zwischenablage (B) einführen, und den Steckverbinder (weiß) (27) der Zwischenablage (B) an die Transfereinheit anschließen. Die Steckverbinder (grau) (28) an die Steckverbinder des MFP anschließen, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt. Schließen Sie den Steckverbinder (grau) (28) mit mehr Stiften an den oberen Steckverbinder, und den Steckverbinder (grau) (28) mit weniger Stiften an den unteren Steckverbinder an. 16. Den rechten und linken Stift (29) der Zwischenablage (B) in die Aussparungen (30) des MFP und der Transfereinheit (A) einhängen. Die Zwischenablage (B) anheben und gemäß der Abbildung einstellen. 15. Inserite il vassoio intermedio (B) e collegatene il connettore (bianco) (27) all’unità di trasferimento. Quindi collegate i connettori (grigio) (28) ai connettori dell’MFP, come illustrato in figura. Collegate il connettore (grigio) (28) con più contatti al connettore superiore e il connettore (grigio) (28) con meno contatti al connettore inferiore. 16. Appendete i perni destro e sinistro (29) del vassoio intermedio (B) sulle parti rientranti (30) dell’MFP e dell’unità di trasferimento (A). Sollevate il vassoio intermedio (B) e regolatelo come illustrato in figura. 15.中間トレイ (B) を挿入し、中間トレイ (B) の コネクタ（白）(27) を搬送ユニットのコネク タに接続する。コネクタ （グレー） (28) を図の ように本体のコネクタに接続する。 コネクタ（グレー）(28) は電線数の多い方を 上側に、少ない方を下側に接続する。 16.中間トレイ (B) の左右のピン (29) を本体および搬送ユニット (A) の凹部 (30) に引っ掛ける。 中間トレイ (B) を持ち上げ、 図のようにセットする。 8 D 2 L L C 7 6 F 3 E 2 L 17. Fit the large ejection cover (D) with the screw (6) that has fixed the upper left cover in step 5 and the screw (7) each. 18. Fit the staple cover (C) using the two screws (3) on the left side to secure and using the two screws (2) that have been removed in step 3 and a TP screw M3 × 05 (L). 19. Refit the staple holder that has been removed in step 3 to its original position and close the transfer left cover and the front cover. 20. Attach the front ejection cover (E) and the rear ejection cover (F) using a TP screw M3 × 05 (L) each. 17. Fixer le grand couvercle d’éjection (D) à l’aide de la vis (6) qui fixait auparavant le couvercle supérieur gauche à l’étape 5 et la vis (7) respectivement. 18. Fixer le couvercle d’agrafes (C) à l’aide des deux vis (3) sur le côté gauche pour le fixer et à l’aide des deux vis (2) qui ont été enlevées dans l’étape 3 et une vis TP M3 × 05 (L). 19. Remettre le support d’agrafes retiré auparavant lors de l’étape 3 à sa position d’origine, et refermer le couvercle de transfert gauche et le couvercle avant. 20. Fixer le couvercle d’éjection avant (E) et le couvercle d’éjection arrière (F) à l’aide d’une vis TP M3 × 05 (L). 17. Encaje la cubierta de expulsión grande (D) con el tornillo (6) que está fijado en la cubierta superior izquierda en el paso 5 y el tornillo (7) a cada una. 18. Encaje la cubierta de grapas (C) utilizando los dos tornillos (3) en el lado izquierdo para asegurar y utilizando los dos tornillos (2) que se retiraron en el paso 3 y un tornillo TP M3 × 05 (L). 19. Vuelva a colocar el soporte de grapas que fue desmontado en el paso 3 a su posición original y cierre la cubierta izquierda de transferencia y la cubierta delantera. 20. Instale la cubierta de expulsión frontal (E) y la cubierta de expulsión trasera (F) utilizando un tornillo TP M3 × 05 (L) cada uno. 17. Die große Auswurfabdeckung (D) jeweils mit der Schraube (6), die in Schritt 5 an der oberen linken Abdeckung angebracht wurde, und der Schraube (7) befestigen. 18. Die Hefterabdeckung (C) zur Sicherung mit den zwei Schrauben (3) auf der linken Seite sowie mit den in Schritt 3 entfernten zwei Schrauben (2) und einer TP-Schraube M3 × 05 (L) befestigen. 19. Den in Schritt 3 entfernten Heftklammerhalter wieder an seiner ursprünglichen Stelle anbringen, und dann die linke Transferabdeckung und die Frontabdeckung schließen. 20. Die vordere Auswurfabdeckung (E) und die hintere Auswurfabdeckung (F) mit je einer TP-Schraube M3 × 05 (L) befestigen. 17. Montate il coperchio grande di espulsione carta (D) con la vite (6) che fissa il coperchio superiore sinistro nel passo 5 e con una vite (7) per ciascuno. 18. Montate il coperchio della graffatrice (C) usando le due viti (3) sul lato sinistro per fissare e le due viti (2) che sono state rimosse nel passo 3 e una vite TP M3 × 05 (L). 19. Vuelva a colocar el soporte de grapas que fue desmontado en el paso 3 a su posición original y cierre la cubierta izquierda de transferencia y la cubierta delantera. 20. Utilizzando una vite TP M3 × 05 (L) ciascuno, montate il coperchio frontale di espulsione carta (E) ed il coperchio posteriore di espulsione carta (F). 17.手順 5 で左上カバーを固定していたビス (6) およびピン (7) 各 1 本で、排出カバー大 (D) を取り付ける。 18.ステープルカバー(C) を左側のビス (3)2 本 で固定し、 手順 3 で外したビス (2)2 本とビ ス M3 × 05TP(L)1 本で取り付ける。 19.手順 3 で取り外したステープルホルダーを 元どおり取り付け、搬送左カバーおよび前カ バーを閉める。 20.排出カバー前 (E) および排出カバー後 (F) をビス M3 × 05TP(L) 各 1 本で取り付ける。 9 G C K B H 21. Attach the copy tray (G). 22. Open the staple cover (C) and insert the staple cartridge (H) into the stapler. 23. Close the staple cover (C). 24. After cleaning with alcohol, attach the Pull label (K) written in the adequate language onto the label on the intermediate tray (B) as required. 21. Fixer le plateau à copies (G). 22. Ouvrir le couvercle d’agrafes (C) et insérer la cartouche d’agrafes (H) dans l’agrafeuse. 23. Refermer le couvercle d’agrafes (C). 24. Après avoir nettoyé avec de l’alcool, fixer l’étiquette Tirer (K) écrite dans la langue adéquate sur l’étiquette sur le plateau intermédiaire (B) comme nécessaire. 21. Instale la bandeja de copias (G). 22. Abra la cubierta de grapas (C) e inserte el cartucho de grapas (H) en el grapador. 23. Cierre la cubierta de grapas (C). 24. Después de limpiar con alcohol, pegue la etiqueta de tiro (K) escrito en el idioma adecuado en la etiqueta en la bandeja intermediaria (B) según sea necesario. 21. Die Kopienablage (G) anbringen. 22. Die Hefterabdeckung (C) öffnen, und die Heftklammerpatrone (H) in den Hefter einsetzen. 23. Die Hefterabdeckung (C) schließen. 24. Je nach Bedarf den Abziehaufkleber (K) der entsprechenden Sprache nach der Reinigung mit Alkohol auf den Aufkleber an der Zwischenablage (B) anbringen. 21. Montate il vassoio delle copie (G). 22. Aprire il coperchio della graffatrice (C) e inserire la cartuccia della graffatrice (H). 23. Chiudere il coperchio della graffatrice (C). 24. Dopo che avete pulito con alcol, fissate l’etichetta staccabile (K) scritta nella lingua appropriata sull’etichetta del vassoio intermedio (B) come richiesto. 21.排出トレイ (G) を取り付ける。 22.ステープルカバー(C) を開き、ステープル カートリッジ (H) をステープルに挿入する。 23.ステープルカバー(C) を開める。 24.必要に応じて、中間トレイ (B) のラベルの上 に、 アルコール清掃後言語に合った PULL ラ ベル (K) を貼り付ける。 10 Operation check 1. Insert the power plug of the MFP into an outlet and turn the main switch on. 2. Select the staple mode and make a stapled copy to check that stapling is performed properly. Vérification du fonctionnement 1. Insérer la fiche d’alimentation du MFP dans une prise murale et mettre l’interrupteur principal sous tension. 2. Sélectionner le mode d’agrafeuse et effectuer une copie agrafée pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’agrafeuse. Verificación del funcionamiento 1. Enchufe el cable eléctrico del MFP en un tomacorriente y conecte el interruptor principal. 2. Seleccione el modo de grapas y haga una copia grapada para comprobar que el grapado se hace correctamente. Betriebsprüfung 1. Den Netzstecker des MFP in eine Netzsteckdose einstecken, und den Hauptschalter einschalten. 2. Den Heftmodus wählen und eine geheftete Kopie anfertigen, um zu prüfen, ob die Heftung korrekt durchgeführt wird. Verifica di funzionamento 1. Inserite il cavo di alimentazione dell’MFP nella presa di rete e quindi accendetela. 2. Selezionate il modo graffatrice e quindi eseguite una copia graffata, in modo da vericare che la graffatrice funzioni correttamente. ［動作確認］ 1. MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込 み、 メインスイッチを ON にする。 2. ステープルモードを選択して、 ステープルコ ピーを行い、ステープルされるか確認する。 11 O O 1 English Adding procedure to the finisher installation Supplied parts O Sub tray .................................................... 1 The following step is added after step 24 on page 10. Insert the two hooks of the sub tray (O) into the two slits (1) of the MFP eject section to attach the sub tray. Français Ajout d’une procédure à l’installation du finisseur Pièces fournies O Plateau secondaire ................................... 1 L’étape suivante est ajoutée après l’étape 24 de la page 10. Insérer les deux crochets du plateau secondaire (O) dans les deux fentes (1) de la section d’éjection du MFP pour fixer le plateau secondaire. Español Agregando un procedimiento a la instalación del finalizador Partes suministradas O Bandeja secundaria .................................. 1 Se agrega el siguiente paso después del paso 24 en la página 10. Inserte los dos ganchos en la bandeja secundaria (O) en las dos ranuras (1) en la sección de expulsión de MFP para instalar la bandeja secundaria. Deutsch Hinzufügung eines Verfahrens zur Fixierer-Installation Gelieferte Teile O Hilfsablage ................................................ 1 Der folgende Schritt wird nach Schritt 24 auf Seite 10 hinzugefügt. Die zwei Haken der Hilfsablage (O) in die zwei Schlitze (1) des MFP-Auswerfabschnitts einführen, um die Hilfsablage anzubringen. Italiano Procedura addizionale per l’installazione del finitore Parti fornite O Sottovassoio ............................................. 1 Il seguente passo viene aggiunto dopo il passo 24 a pagina 10. Inserite i due ganci del sottovassoio (O) nelle due fessure (1) della sezione di espulsione dell’MFP per montare il sottovassoio. 简体中文 安装装订器时的补充步骤 在第 10 页的步骤 24 后面补充以下步骤。 附属部件 O 辅助托盘 ............................ 1 将辅助托盘 (O) 上的挂钩 (2 处 ) 挂在 MFP 本体 排纸部的 2 处切口 (1) 上。 日本語 フィニッシャ設置時の手順追加 10 ページ、手順 24 の後に、 次の手順を追加。 付属品 O サブトレイ .......................... 1 サブトレイ (O) のフック部 2 箇所を MFP 本体排 出部のスリット (1)2 箇所に引っ掛けて取り付 ける。 2006.2 303J356760 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR JOB SEPARATOR English E TP screw M3 × 05 ..............................................1 Supplied part A B C D Job separator................................................ 1 LED PCB ...................................................... 1 Job separator copy tray ................................ 1 Left front cover JS ........................................ 1 Français E Vis TP M3 × 05 ..................................................1 Séparateur de travaux .................................. 1 LED PCB ...................................................... 1 Plateau de copies du séparateur de travaux..... 1 Couvercle avant gauche JS ......................... 1 Español E Tornillo TP M3 × 05 .......................................1 Separador de trabajos .................................. 1 PCB en LED ................................................. 1 Bandeja de copias del separador de trabajos .......1 Cubierta delantera izquierda JS ................... 1 Deutsch E TP-Schraube M3 × 05 .....................................1 Jobtrenner .................................................... 1 LED-Leiterplatte ........................................... 1 Jobtrenner-Kopienablage ............................. 1 Linke Frontabdeckung JS............................. 1 Italiano E Vite TP M3 × 05 ............................................1 Separatore.................................................... 1 Scheda LED ................................................. 1 Vassoio copie del separatore ....................... 1 Coperchio frontale sinistro del separatore.... 1 日本語 付属品 A B C D ジョブセパレータ ....................1 LED 基板 ............................1 ジョブセパレータ排出トレイ ..........1 左前カバーJS ........................1 Procedura Attenzione: Al momento dell’installazione del separatore, assicuratevi innanzitutto di spegnere l’MFP e scollegarne il cavo di alimentazione dalla presa di rete. Parte fornita A B C D Vorgang Vorsicht: Schalten Sie vor der Installation des Jobtrenners unbedingt den Hauptschalter des MFP aus, und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker des MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab. Gelieferte Teile A B C D Procedimiento Precaución: Cuando se instala un separador de trabajos, asegúrese de desconectar el interruptor principal del MFP y desenchufar el cable eléctrico del tomacorriente de la pared. Parte provista A B C D Procédure Précaution: Lors de l’installation d’un séparateur de travaux, veiller à mettre l’interrupteur principal du MFP hors tension et à débrancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP de la prise murale. Pièce fournie A B C D Procedure Caution: When installing a job separator, be sure to turn the MFP main switch off and disconnect the MFP power plug from the wall outlet. E ビス M3 × 05TP ......................1 [ 取付手順 ] ジョブセパレータを取り付ける際は、必ず MFP 本体のメインスイッチを OFF にし、 電源プラグ を外して作業を行うこと。 1 4 B 5 8 7 A 3 1 2 6 3 1. Insert the LED PCB (B) into the job separator (A). Connect the 2-pin connector (2) of the job separator (A) into the 2-pin connector (1) of the LED PCB (B) by arranging the wire into the three grooves (3) of the job separator (A). 2. Open the left transfer cover and the front cover. 3. Remove the staple holder (4), remove the two screws (5) from the upper side and the front side, and loosen the two screws (6) on the left side. 4. Open the hook (7) on the right side and remove the left front cover (8). 1. Insérer le LED PCB (B) dans le séparateur de travaux (A). Brancher le connecteur à deux broches (2) du séparateur de travaux (A) dans le connecteur à deux broches (1) du LED PCB (B) en plaçant le fil dans les trois rainures (3) du séparateur de travaux (A). 2. Ouvrir le couvercle de transfert gauche et le couvercle avant. 3. Retirer le support d’agrafes (4), retirer les deux vis (5) du côté supérieur et du côté avant, et desserrer les deux vis (6) du côté gauche. 4. Ouvrir le crochet (7) se trouvant sur le côté droit et retirer le couvercle avant gauche (8). 1. Inserte el PCB en LED (B) en el separador de trabajos (A). Conecte el conector de 2 patillas (2) del separador de trabajos (A) en el conector de 2 patillas (1) del PCB en LED (B) colocando el cable en las tres ranuras (3) del separador de trabajos (A). 2. Abra la cubierta de transferencia izquierda y la cubierta frontal. 3. Desmonte el soporte de grapas (4), saque los dos tornillos (5) del lado superior y el lado delantero y afloje los dos tornillos (6) en el lado izquierdo. 4. Abra el gancho (7) en el lado derecho y desmonte la cubierta delantera izquierda (8). 1. Die LED-Leiterplatte (B) in den Jobtrenner (A) einführen. Den 2-poligen Steckverbinder (2) des Jobtrenners (A) mit dem 2-poligen Steckverbinder (1) der LED-Leiterplatte (B) verbinden, indem das Kabel in den drei Nuten (3) des Jobtrenners (A) angeordnet wird. 2. Die linke Transferabdeckung und die Frontabdeckung öffnen. 3. Den Heftklammerhalter (4) entfernen, die zwei Schrauben (5) an der Ober- und Vorderseite herausdrehen, und die zwei Schrauben (6) auf der linken Seite lösen. 4. Den Haken (7) auf der rechten Seite öffnen, und die linke Frontabdeckung (8) abnehmen. 1. Inserite la scheda LED (B) nel separatore (A). Collegate il connettore a 2 pin (2) del separatore (A) nel connettore a 2 pin (1) della scheda LED (B) disponendo il cavo all’interno delle tre scanalature (3) del separatore (A). 2. Aprite il coperchio di trasferimento sinistro e quindi il coperchio frontale. 3. Rimuovete il vassoio graffette (4), rimuovete le due viti (5) dal lato superiore e dal lato frontale e allentate le due viti (6) sul lato sinistro. 4. Aprite il gancio (7) che si trova sul lato destro e rimuovete il coperchio frontale sinistro (8). 1. ジョブセパレータ (A) に LED 基板 (B) を 挿入する。 ジョブセパレータ (A) の 2P コネクタ (2) を、 ジョブセパレータの溝 (3) 3ヶ所に電線 を配線して、 LED 基板 (B) の 2P コネクタ (1) に接続する。 2. 搬送左カバーおよび前カバーを開ける。 3. ステープルホルダー (4) を取り外し、 上側 と前側のビス (5) 2本を外して、左側のビス (6) 2 本をゆるめる。 4. 右側の引っかけ部 (7) を開いて左前カバー (8) を取り外す。 2 A 12 11 13 5. Remove the two screws (9) and remove the ejection cover (10) with the mounting plate. 6. Remove the two screws (11) and then remove the inner ejection cover (12). 7. If the branch pressure lever (13) on the rear side of the job separator (A) has lowered, raise it. 5. Enlever les deux vis (9) et enlever le couvercle d’éjection (10) avec la plaque de montage. 6. Enlever les deux vis (11), puis enlever le couvercle d’éjection interne (12). 7. Si le levier de pression fourchu (13) situé sur le côté arrière du séparateur de travaux (A) est abaissé, le relever. 5. Saque los dos tornillos (9) y desmonte la cubierta de expulsión (10) con la placa de montaje. 6. Saque los dos tornillos (11) y desmonte la cubierta de expulsión interior (12). 7. Si bajó la palanca de presión de ramal (13) en el lado trasero del separador de trabajos (A) levántela. 5. Die zwei Schrauben (9) entfernen, und dann die Auswurfabdeckung (10) mit der Montageplatte abnehmen. 6. Die zwei Schrauben (11) entfernen, und dann die innere Auswurfabdeckung (12) abnehmen. 7. Falls der Zweigdruckhebel (13) auf der Rückseite des Jobtrenners (A) abgesenkt ist, muss er angehoben werden. 5. Rimuovete ora le due viti (9) e quindi il coperchio di espulsione (10) con la piastra di montaggio. 6. Rimuovete le due viti (11) e quindi il coperchio interno di espulsione (12). 7. Se la leva a pressione del braccio (13) situata sul lato posteriore del separatore (A) è abbassata, sollevatela. 5. ビス (9) 2 本を外し、 排出カバー (10) を取 付板ごと取り外す。 6. ビス (11) 2 本を外し、排出内カバー (12) を取り外す。 7. ジョブセパレータ (A) 後側の分岐押圧レ バー（13）が下方向に下がっている場合は 上げる。 3 E A 14 15 16 8. Insert the job separator (A) into the MFP from the front side and slide it to the left. Secure the rear side using a pin (14) and the front side using a TP screw M3 × 05 (E). 9. Connect the connector (15) of the job separator to the lower connector (16) of the MFP. 8. Insérer le séparateur de travaux (A) dans le MFP depuis le côté avant et le faire glisser vers la gauche. Fixer l’arrière à l’aide d’une goupille (14) et l’avant à l’aide d’une vis TP M3 × 05 (E). 9. Connecter le connecteur (15) du séparateur de travaux au connecteur inférieur (16) du MFP. 8. Inserte el separador de trabajos (A) en el MFP del lado delantero y deslice hacia la izquierda. Asegure el lado trasero utilizando un pasador (14) y el lado delantero utilizando un tornillo TP M3 × 05 (E). 9. Conecte el conector (15) del separador de trabajos en el conector inferior (16) del MFP. 8. Den Jobtrenner (A) von der Vorderseite in den MFP einführen und nach links schieben. Die Rückseite mit einem Stift (14), und die Vorderseite mit einer TP-Schraube M3 × 05 (E) sichern. 9. Den Steckverbinder (15) des Jobtrenners an den unteren Steckverbinder (16) des MFP anschließen. 8. Inserite il separatore (A) nell’MFP dal lato frontale e fatelo scorrere a sinistra. Assicuratene il lato posteriore usando un pernetto (14) e il lato frontale usando una vite TP M3 × 05 (E). 9. Collegate il connettore (15) del separatore al connettore inferiore (16) dell’MFP. 8. ジョブセパレータ (A) を MFP 本体の機械前側より挿入し、 左側にスライドする。後側をピン (14) 1 本で固定してから前側をビス M3 × 05TP（E）1 本で固定する。 9. ジョブセパレータのコネクタ (15) を本体 のコネクタ （下側）(16) に接続する。 4 18 17 A 19 21 20 C 10. Attach the job separator tray (C) to the rail (17) of the job separator (A) by sliding it from the front side. Insert the fitting section (18) on the right side of the job separator tray (C) into the recessed portion (19) of the MFP. Put the hook (20) on the right side onto the pin (21) located inside the MFP. 10. Fixer le plateau du séparateur de travaux (C) au rail (17) du séparateur de travaux (A) en le faisant glisser depuis l’avant. Insérer la section de la garniture (18) sur le côté droit du séparateur de travaux (C) dans la partie en retrait (19) du MFP. Mettre le crochet (20) sur le côté droit sur la goupille (21) située dans le MFP. 10. Instale la bandeja del separador de trabajos (C) en el carril (17) del separador de trabajos (A) deslizándolo por el lado delantero. Inserte la sección de fijación (18) en el lado derecho de la bandeja del separador de trabajos (C) en la parte entrada (19) del MFP. Ponga el gancho (20) en el lado derecho del pasador (21) ubicado dentro del MFP. 10. Die Jobtrennerablage (C) von der Vorderseite auf die Schiene (17) des Jobtrenners (A) schieben. Die Passkante (18) auf der rechten Seite der Jobtrennerablage (C) in die Aussparung (19) des MFP einführen. Den Haken (20) auf der rechten Seite auf den Stift (21) im Inneren des MFP setzen. 10. Montate il vassoio del separatore (C) sulla rotaia (17) del separatore stesso, facendolo scorrere dal lato frontale. Inserite la sezione di montaggio (18) situata sul lato destro del vassoio del separatore (C) nella posizione rientrante (19) dell’MFP. Mettete il gancio (20) situato sul lato destro sul perno (21) che si trova all’interno dell’MFP. 10.ジョブセパレータ (A) のレール (17) にジョブセパレータ排出トレイ (C) を前側よりスライド させて取り付ける。 ジョブセパレータ排出トレイ (C) 右側の取付部 (18) を本体の凹部 (19) に挿入する。 右側面のフック (20) を MFP 本体内側のピン (21) の上に乗せる。 5 D 8 5 6 22 23 D 11. Release the three tabs (23) of the left front cover (8) that has been removed in step 4 to remove the white right side section (22), and fit the left front cover JS (D). 12. Fit the left front cover JS (D) using the two screws (6) on the left side to secure and using the two screws (5) that have been removed in step 3. 11. Libérer les trois languettes (23) du couvercle avant gauche (8) retiré auparavant lors de l’étape 4 pour retirer la section blanche du côté droit (22), et placer le couvercle avant gauche JS (D). 12. Placer le couvercle avant gauche JS (D) à l’aide des deux vis (6) sur le côté gauche pour le fixer et en utilisant les deux vis (5) retirées auparavant lors de l’étape 3. 11. Suelte las tres lengüetas (23) de la cubierta delantera izquierda (8) que fue desmontada en el paso 4 para desmontar la sección del lado derecho blanca (22), y encaje la cubierta delantera izquierda JS (D). 12. Encaje la cubierta delantera izquierda JS (D) utilizando los dos tornillos (6) en el lado izquierdo y utilizando los dos tornillos (5) que fueron desmontados en el paso 3. 11. Die drei Laschen (23) der in Schritt 4 entfernten linken Frontabdeckung (8) lösen, um den weißen rechten Seitenteil (22) abzunehmen, und die linke Frontabdeckung JS (D) anbringen. 12. Die linke Frontabdeckung JS (D) mit den zwei Schrauben (6) auf der linken Seite und mit den in Schritt 3 entfernten zwei Schrauben (5) befestigen. 11. Rilasciate le tre linguette (23) situate sul coperchio frontale sinistro (8), che avete rimosso nel passo 4, per rimuovere la sezione laterale bianca destra (22) e montate il coperchio frontale sinistro JS (D). 12. Montate il coperchio frontale sinistro JS (D) usando le due viti (6) sul lato sinistro per fissarlo e usando le due viti (5) che sono state rimosse nel passo 3. 11.手順 4 で取り外した左前カバー (8) のツメ (23)3ヶ所を解除して、右側部（白）(22) を外し、左 前カバーJS（D）を取り付ける。 12.左前カバーJS (D) を左側のビス (6) 2 本で 固定し、手順 3 で外したビス (5) 2 本で取り 付ける。 6 13. Refit the staple holder that has been removed in step 3 to its original position and close the transfer left cover and the front cover. Operation check 3. Make a test copy to check that a copy is ejected to the job separator tray (C). 13. Remettre le support d’agrafes retiré auparavant lors de l’étape 3 à sa position d’origine, et refermer le couvercle de transfert gauche et le couvercle avant. Vérification du fonctionnement 3. Effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier que la copie est éjectée dans le plateau du séparateur de travaux (C). 13. Vuelva a colocar el soporte de grapas que fue desmontado en el paso 3 a su posición original y cierre la cubierta izquierda de transferencia y la cubierta delantera. Verificación del funcionamiento 3. Haga una copia de prueba para verificar que la copia sale a la bandeja del separador de trabajos (C). 13. Den in Schritt 3 entfernten Heftklammerhalter wieder an seiner ursprünglichen Stelle anbringen, und dann die linke Transferabdeckung und die Frontabdeckung schließen. Betriebsprüfung 3. Eine Probekopie anfertigen, um zu prüfen, ob die Kopie in die Jobtrennerablage (C) ausgeworfen wird. 13. Montate nuovamente il vassoio graffette che è stato rimosso nel passo 3 nella sua posizione originale e chiudete il coperchio di trasferimento sinistro e quindi il coperchio frontale. Verifica di funzionamento 3. Effettuate una copia di prova per verificare che essa venga espulsa sul vassoio del separatore (C). [ 動作確認 ] 3. テストコピーを行い、 用紙がジョブセパレー タ排出トレイ (C) に排出されたことを確認 する。 13.手順 3 で取り外したステープルホルダーを 元どおり取り付け、搬送左カバーおよび前カ バーを閉める。 1. Insert the power plug of the MFP into an outlet and turn the main switch on. 2. Press "Org./Paper/Finishing" and "Output Tray" on the touch panel in this order to select "Job separator Tray". 1. Insérer la fiche d’alimentation du MFP dans une prise murale et mettre l’interrupteur principal sous tension. 2. Presser "Org./Papier/Finition" et "Bac de sortie" sur l’écran tactile dans cet ordre pour sélectionner "Plateau du sépar. trav.". 1. Enchufe el cable eléctrico del MFP en un tomacorriente y conecte el interruptor principal. 2. Presione "Org./papel/Finalizando" y "Bandeja de salida" en el panel de toque para seleccionar "Band. de separad. trab.". 1. Den Netzstecker des MFP in eine Netzsteckdose einstecken, und den Hauptschalter einschalten. 2. Die Tasten "Org./Papier/Endbearbeitung" und "Druckablage" auf dem Sensorbildschirm in dieser Reihenfolge drücken, um "Job Separator-Fach" zu wählen. 1. Inserite il cavo di alimentazione dell’MFP nella presa di rete e quindi accendetela. 2. Premete “Org./Carta/Finitura” e “Vassoia di uscita” sul pannello a sfioramento in questo ordine per selezionare “Vass. separat. Lavori”. 1. MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込 み、メインスイッチを ON にする。 2. タッチパネルで「原稿 / 用紙 / 仕上げ」、 「排 紙先」 を順に押し 「ジョブセパレータ」 を選択 する。 7 F F C English Adding procedure to the job separator installation (metric specifications only) Supplied parts F Eject stopper A3..................................................1 The following step is added after step 9 on page 4. After using alcohol to clean the portion of the job separator tray (C) shown in the figure, adhere the eject stopper A3 (F) along the reference lines. Français Ajout d’une procédure à l’installation du séparateur de travaux (pour spécifications métriques seulement) Pièces fournies F Butée d’éjection A3 .............................................1 L’étape suivante est ajoutée après l’étape 9 de la page 4. Après avoir utilisé de l’alcool pour nettoyer le plateau du séparateur de travaux (C) montré dans la figure, faire adhérer la butée d’éjection A3 (F) le long des lignes de référence. Español Agregando un procedimiento a la instalación del separador de trabajos (sólo para las especificaciones métricas) Partes suministradas F Tope de expulsión de A3.....................................1 Se agrega el siguiente paso después del paso 9 en la página 4. Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la parte de la bandeja del separador de trabajos (C) que aparece en la figura, pegue el tope de expulsión de A3 (F) por las líneas de referencia. Deutsch Hinzufügung eines Verfahrens zur Jobtrenner-Installation (nur metrische Spezifikationen) Gelieferte Teile F Auswerfanschlag A3 ...........................................1 Der folgende Schritt wird nach Schritt 9 auf Seite 4 hinzugefügt. Den in der Abbildung gezeigten Abschnitt der Jobtrennerablage (C) mit Alkohol reinigen, dann den Auswerfanschlag A3 (F) innerhalb der Bezugslinien ankleben. Italiano Procedura addizionale per l’installazione del separatore (solo per le specifiche metriche) Parti fornite F Fermo di espulsione A3 ......................................1 Il seguente passo viene aggiunto dopo il passo 9 a pagina 4. Dopo avere usato l’alcol per pulire la parte del vassoio del separatore (C) illustrata in figura, fare aderire il fermo di espulsione A3 (F) lungo le linee di riferimento. 简体中文 安装作业分离器时的补充步骤 ( 仅限英寸规格产品 ) 附属部件 F 排纸挡块 A3 .......................... 1 用酒精擦净作业分离器排纸托盘 (C) ( 图示位置 ) 后，沿着基准线贴上排纸挡块 A3(F)。 在第 4 页的步骤 9 后面补充以下步骤。 日本語 ジョブセパレータ設置時の手順追加 （センチ仕様のみ） 付属品 F 排出ストッパ A3 ...................... 1 ジョブセパレータ排出トレイ (C) の図の位置を アルコール清掃後、排出ストッパ A3(F) を基準 に沿って貼り付ける。 4 ページ、 手順 9 の後に、次の手順を追加。 2006.2 303KB56770 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR FAX System (M) B 3 E A C 1 F D A 2 A 1 English INSTALLATION GUIDE for FAX System (M) Français GUIDE D’INSTALLATION du système FAX (M) Español GUÍA PARA LA INSTALACIÓN del sistema de FAX (M) Deutsch INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG für das Faxsystem (M) Supplied parts A B C D FAX circuit board ............................................................... 1 Modular connecter cable (120 V model only) .................... 1 Terminal seal ..................................................................... 1 Ferrite core 120 V model ...................................................................... 1 230 V model ...................................................................... 2 E Alphabet label.................................................................... 1 Pièces fournies A B C D Carte à circuits FAX........................................................... 1 Câble du connecteur modulaire (modèle 120 V) ............... 1 Joint de borne.................................................................... 1 Noyau de ferrite Modèle 120 V .................................................................... 1 Modèle 230 V .................................................................... 2 E Etiquette de l’alphabet....................................................... 1 Piezas suministradas A B C D Tarjeta de circuitos de fax.................................................. 1 Cable conector modular (sólo para modelo de 120 V) ...... 1 Sello del terminal ............................................................... 1 Núcleo de ferrita Modelo para 120 V............................................................ 1 Modelo para 230 V............................................................ 2 E Etiqueta de alfabeto .......................................................... 1 Gelieferte Teile A B C D FAX-Leiterplatte................................................................. 1 Modulkabel (nur 120-V-Modell) ......................................... 1 Verschlusskappe ............................................................... 1 Ferritkern 120-V-Modell ..................................................................... 1 230-V-Modell ..................................................................... 2 E Alphabetaufkleber ............................................................. 1 Parti fornite Italiano GUIDA ALL’INSTALLAZIONE del sistema fax (M) FAX System (M) 設置手順書 A B C D Scheda a circuiti FAX ........................................................ 1 Cavo connettore modulare (solo per il modello da 120 V) .... 1 Guarnizione terminale ....................................................... 1 Nucleo di ferrite modello da 120 V .............................................................. 1 modello da 230 V .............................................................. 2 E Etichetta alfabetica ............................................................ 1 付属部品 A FAX 基板.......................................... B モジュラーコード (120V 仕様のみ ).................. C 端子シール ....................................... D フェライトコア 120V 仕様......................................... 230V 仕様......................................... E アルファベットラベル ............................. F Clamp (not for use) .............................1 Remove the cover. Install the FAX circuit board. Installation Procedure 1. Remove two screws (1) and then remove OPT 1 cover (2). 2. Insert the FAX circuit board (A) along the groove in OPT1 and secure the board with two screws (1) that have been removed in step 1. Direct the label (3) on to the FAX circuit board toward right side and insert the board along the groove. Do not touch the FAX circuit board terminal. Hold the top and bottom of the FAX circuit board, or the projection of the board to insert the FAX circuit board. Do not insert the FAX circuit board into OPT2. F Collier (non utilisé) ..............................1 Retirer le couvercle. Installer la carte à circuits FAX. Méthode d’installation 1. Retirer les deux vis (1), puis le couvercle OPT 1 (2). 2. Insérer la carte à circuits FAX (A) le long de la rainure dans l’OPT1 et la fixer à l’aide des deux vis (1) retirées à l’étape 1. Diriger l’étiquette (3) située sur la carte à circuits FAX vers la droite et insérer la carte le long de la rainure. Ne pas toucher la borne de la carte à circuits FAX. Tenir les parties inférieure et supérieure de la carte à circuits FAX ou la saillie de la carte pour insérer la carte à circuits FAX. Ne pas insérer la carte à circuits FAX dans l’OPT2. F Abrazadera (no utilizar).......................1 Desmonte la cubierta. Instale la tarjeta de circuitos de fax. Procedimiento de instalación 1. Quite dos tornillos (1) y desmonte la cubierta OPT 1 (2). 2. Inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax (A) a lo largo de la ranura de OPT1 y asegúrela con los dos tornillos (1) que ha quitado en el paso 1. Oriente la etiqueta (3) de la tarjeta de circuitos de fax hacia la derecha e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura. No toque el terminal de la tarjeta de circuitos de fax. Sujete las partes superior e inferior de la tarjeta de circuitos de fax o la saliente de la tarjeta para insertar la tarjeta de circuitos de fax. No inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax en OPT2. F Schelle (wird nicht benutzt) .................1 Entfernen der Abdeckung. Einbauen der FAX-Leiterplatte. Installationsablauf 1. Die beiden Schrauben (1) herausdrehen und Abdeckung OPT1 (2) abnehmen. 2. FAX-Leiterplatte (A) in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT1 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt 1 ausgebauten Schrauben (1) befestigen. Die FAX-Leiterplatte so in die Nut einsetzen, dass der Aufkleber (3) nach rechts zeigt. Die Kontakte der FAX-Leiterplatte nicht berühren. Die FAX-Leiterplatte bein Einsetzen oben und unten oder an dem Vorsprung festhalten. FAX-Leiterplatte nicht in Schacht OPT2 einsetzen. F Fascetta (da non utilizzare).................1 Rimuovere il coperchio. Montaggio della scheda a circuiti FAX. Istruzioni per il montaggio 1. Rimuovere le due viti (1), quindi rimuovere il coperchio OPT 1 (2). 2. Inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX (A) lungo l’incavo nell’OPT1 e fissare la scheda con le due viti (1) rimosse nell’operazione 1. Rivolgere l’etichetta (3) sulla scheda a circuiti FAX verso il lato destro e inserire la scheda lungo l’incavo. Non toccare il terminale della scheda a circuiti FAX. Per inserire il circuito FAX, tenere l’estremit superiore e la base della scheda a circuiti FAX, o la sporgenza della scheda a circuiti FAX. Non inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX nell’OPT2. カバーの取り外し 1. ビス (1)2 本を外し、OPT1 のカバー(2) を 取り外す。 FAX 基板の取り付け 2. OPT1 の溝に沿って FAX 基板 (A) を挿入し、手順 1 で外したビス (1)2 本で固定す る。 FAX 基板は、貼り付けられているラベル (3) を右側に向け、挿入すること。 FAX 基板の端子に触れないこと。 FAX 基板の挿入時は基板の上下か突起を持つこと。 OPT2 には FAX 基板を挿入しないこと。 Be sure to turn the MFP switch OFF and unplug the MFP from the power supply before installing the fax system. Veiller à mettre l’interrupteur principal du MFP hors tension et à débrancher le MFP de la prise secteur avant d’installer le système fax. Asegúrese de apagar el MFP colocando el interruptor principal a OFF y desenchufe el MFP del suministro de red eléctrica antes de instalar el sistema de fax. Schalten Sie den Netzschalter des MFP aus und trennen Sie den MFP vom Netz, bevor Sie das Faxsystem installieren. Assicurarsi di aver spento l’interruttore dell’MFP e di aver sfilato la spina dell’MFP dalla presa prima di installare il sistema fax. F クランプ ( 使用しません）..........1 1 1 1 1 2 1 設置手順 ファクスシステムを設置するときは、必ず MFP 本体のメインスイッチを OFF にし、電 源プラグを抜いてから作業すること。 2005.12 303KH56710 Rev.1.0 D D D 30 E 30 10 mm 10 mm D D D Install the ferrite core (only 230 V model). 3. Install the ferrite core (D) onto the modular connecter cable. Be sure to loop the cord three times through the ferrite core. Make a gap of 30 mm ± 10 mm between the ferrite core and the terminal. Installer le noyau de ferrite (modèle 230 V). 3. Installer le noyau de ferrite (D) dans le câble du connecteur modulaire. Veiller à enrouler trois fois le cordon autour du noyau de ferrite. Un écart de 30 mm ± 10 mm entre le noyau de ferrite et la borne est requis. Instale el núcleo de ferrita (sólo para modelo de 230 V). Connect the MFP to the telephone line. 4. Plug the telephone line modular connector cable with the ferrite core (D) into the line terminal, and then connect the line terminal to the telephone line. For the 120 V model, use the supplied modular connecter cable (B). Connecter le MFP à la ligne de téléphone. 4. Brancher le câble du connecteur modulaire de la ligne de téléphone avec le noyau de ferrite (D) à la borne de la ligne, puis connecter la borne de la ligne à la ligne de téléphone. Pour le modèle 120 V, utiliser le câble du connecteur modulaire (B) fourni. Conecte el MFP a la línea telefónica. Install the ferrite core (telephone line of the separate phone). Connect the MFP to the separate phone. Attach the alphabet labels. [Operation check] 6. Plug the separate phone line with the ferrite core (D) into the line terminal, and then connect the line terminal to the separate phone line. If you don’t connect the MFP to the separate phone, wipe the surface of the telephone terminal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal (C). 7. Wipe the area above the numeric keys at the right side of the operation panel and adhere the alphabet labels (E) here. 8. In Asia and Oceania, use PQRS TUV WXYZ label, and do not use PRS TUV WXY and OPER labels. 1. Plug the MFP into a power outlet, and turn on the main power. 2. Perform the maintenance mode U600 to initialize the fax control assembly. For details, see the service manual. Connecter le MFP au téléphone séparé. Fixer les étiquettes de l’alphabet. [Vérification du fonctionnement] 6. Brancher la ligne de téléphone séparé avec le noyau de ferrite (D) à la borne de la ligne, puis connecter la borne de la ligne à la ligne de téléphone séparé. Si le MFP n’est pas connecté au téléphone séparé, nettoyer la surface de la borne de téléphone avec de l’alcool et apposer le joint de borne (C). 7. Nettoyer la surface au-dessus des touches numériques à droite du panneau de commande et y coller les étiquettes de l’alphabet (E). 8. En Asie et Océanie, utiliser l’étiquette PQRS TUV WXYZ et pas les étiquettes PRS TUV WXY et OPER. 1. Brancher le MFP sur une prise d’alimentation et le mettre sous tension. 2. Exécuter le mode de maintenance U600 pour initialiser l’ensemble de commande de fax. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien. Conecte el MFP al teléfono separado. Fije las etiquetas de alfabeto. [Verifique el funcionamiento] 5. Al conectar un teléfono separado al MFP, coloque el núcleo de ferrita (D) a la línea telefónica del teléfono separado. Asegúrese de dar dos vueltas al cable a través del núcleo de ferrita. 6. Enchufe la línea del teléfono separado con el núcleo de ferrita (D) en el terminal de línea, y seguidamente conecte el terminal de línea a la línea del teléfono separado. Si no conecta el MFP a un teléfono separado, limpie la superficie del terminal telefónico con alcohol y pegue el sello del terminal (C). 7. Limpie la zona situada encima de las teclas numéricas, en el lado derecho del panel de trabajo, y pegue aquí las etiquetas de alfabeto (E). 8. En Asia y Oceanía, utilice la etiqueta PQRS TUV WXYZ y no use las PRS TUV WXY ni las OPER. 1. Conecte el MFP a un receptáculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal. 2. Ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600 para inicializar el conjunto de control de fax. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio. Anbringen der Alphabetaufkleber. [Betriebsprüfung] 7. Den Bereich über den Zifferntasten auf der rechten Seite des Bedienfeldes abwischen und die Alphabetaufkleber (E) hier anbringen. 8. In Asien und Ozeanien den Aufkleber PQRS TUV WXYZ verwenden; nicht die Aufkleber PRS TUV WXY und OPER verwenden. 1. Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter einschalten. 2. Wartungsmodus U600 ausführen, um die Faxsteuerbaugruppe zu initialisieren. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung. Applicazione delle etichette alfabetiche. [Verifica del funzionamento] 5. When connecting a separate phone to the MFP, attach the ferrite core (D) to the telephone line of the separate phone. Be sure to loop the cord twice through the ferrite core. Installer le noyau de ferrite (ligne du téléphone séparé). 5. Lors de la connexion d’un téléphone séparé au MFP, fixer le noyau de ferrite (D) à la ligne du téléphone séparé. Veiller à enrouler deux fois le cordon autour du noyau de ferrite. Instale el núcleo de ferrita (línea telefónica del teléfono independiente). 3. Instale el núcleo de ferrita (D) en el cable conector modular. Asegúrese de dar tres vueltas al cable a través del núcleo de ferrita. Deje una separación de 30 mm ± 10 mm entre el núcleo de ferrita y el terminal. 4. Enchufe el cable conector modular de la línea telefónica con el núcleo de ferrita (D) en el terminal de línea, y seguidamente conecte el terminal de línea a la línea telefónica. Para el modelo de 120 V, utilice el cable conector modular (B) suministrado. Aufsetzen des Ferritkerns (nur 230-VModell). Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung. Aufsetzen des Ferritkerns (Telefonleitung mit separatem Telefon). Anschließen des MFP an das separate Telefon. 3. Ferritkern (D) auf das Modulkabel aufsetzen. Das Kabel dreimal durch den Ferritkern führen. Zwischen Ferritkern und Buchse muss ein Abstand von 30 mm ± 10 eingehalten werden. 4. Telefonmodulkabel mit dem Ferritkern (D) in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose anschließen. Für das 120-V-Modell ist das mitgelieferte Modulkabel (B) zu verwenden. 5. Beim Anschließen eines separaten Telefons an den MFP den Ferritkern (D) auf die Telefonleitung des separaten Telefons aufsetzen. Das Kabel zweimal durch den Ferritkern führen. 6. Das Kabel des separaten Telefons mit dem Ferritkern (D) in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Dose für das separate Telefon anschließen. Wenn der MFP nicht an das separate Telefon angeschlossen wird, die Oberfläche der Telefonbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und Verschlusskappe (C) einsetzen. Montare il nucleo di ferrite (solo per il modello da 230V). Collegamento dell’MFP alla linea del telefono. Montare il nucleo di ferrite (linea telefonica del telefono separato). Collegamento dell’MFP al telefono separato. 3. Montare il nucleo di ferrite (D) sul cavo connettore modulare. Avere cura di avvolgere tre volte il cavo attorno al nucleo di ferrite. Lasciare una distanza di 30 mm ± 10 mm tra il nucleo di ferrite e il terminale. 4. Inserire il cavo connettore modulare della linea del telefono con il nucleo di ferrite (D) nel terminale della linea, quindi collegare il terminale della linea alla linea del telefono. Per i modelli da 120 V, utilizzare il cavo connettore modulare (B) in dotazione. 5. Nel caso in cui si colleghi un telefono separato all’MFP, montare il nucleo di ferrite (D) sulla linea del telefono separato. Avere cura di avvolgere due volte il cavo attorno al nucleo di ferrite. フェライトコアの取り付け (230V 仕様のみ ) 3. モジュラーコードにフェライトコア (D) を 取り付ける。 コードをフェライトコアに必ず 3 回通すこと。 フェライトコアと端子の間隔を 30mm±10mm あけること。 電話回線との接続 4. ライン端子に、電話回線からのモジュラー コードのフェライトコア (D) が取り付けら れている側のプラグを差し込み、 電話回線へ 接続する。 120V 仕様は付属のモジュラーコード (B) を 使用すること。 フェライトコアの取り付け ( 外付け電話の電 話線 ) 5. 外付け電話と MFP 本体を接続する場合、 外付 け電話からの電話線にフェライトコア (D) を取り付ける。 コードをフェライトコアに必 ず 2 回以上通すこと。 6. Collegare la linea del telefono separato con il nucleo di ferrite (D) al terminale della linea, quindi collegare il terminale della linea alla linea del telefono separato. Nel caso in cui non si colleghi l’MFP al telefono separato, pulire la superficie del terminale del telefono con dell’alcol e applicare la guarnizione terminale (C). 外付け電話との接続 6. TEL 端子に、外付け電話からの電話線のフェ ライトコア (D) が取り付けられている側の プラグを差し込み、 外付け電話と接続する。 外付け電話と接続しない場合、TEL 端子周囲 をアルコール清掃し、端子シール (C) を貼り 付ける。 7. Pulire l’area sopra i tasti numerici sul lato destro del pannello operativo e attaccare qui le etichette alfabetiche (E). 8. In Asia ed Oceania, utilizzare l’etichetta PQRS TUV WXYZ e non utilizzare le etichette PRS TUV WXY e OPER. アルファベットラベルの貼り付け 7. 操作パネル右側のテンキー上側をアルコー ル清掃し、アルファベットラベル (E) を貼り 付ける。 8. アジア、オセアニアでは 「PRS TUV WXY」 およ び「OPER」のラベルを使用せず、 「PQRS TUV WXYZ」のラベルを使用すること。 1. Collegare l’MFP ad una presa di corrente e portare l’interruttore principale su On. 2. Eseguire il modo di manutenzione U600 per inizializzare il gruppo di controllo fax. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni. [ 動作確認 ] 1. MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し 込み、 メインスイッチを ON にする。 2. メンテナンスモード U600 を実行し、 FAX 基板 を初期化する。 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。 2005.12 303KH56710 Rev.1.0 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR Data Security Kit (C) 303KP56710 Data Security Kit (C) Installation Guide For MFP Models Guide d'installation du kit de sécurité des données (C) pour les modèles MFP Guía de instalación del Kit de seguridad (C) para los modelos MFP A C English Supplied Parts USB Key ............................................................................................................ 1 Precautions before Activating ･ Activating the Data Security Kit will delete all data stored in the hard disk by the customer. Before activating, check with the customer if the data can be deleted. ･ Be sure that the Main Power Switch of the machine is turned off. Activating Procedure 1. Insert the USB Key into the USB Memory Slot of the machine and turn the Main Power Switch on. (See Illustration A.) 2. After the opening screen is displayed, the Activating security function. message is displayed. Press [OK]. 3. Follow the onscreen instructions to remove the USB Key and turn the Main Power Switch off. 4. Turn the Main Power Switch on. The encryption code entry screen is displayed. Ask the customer to change the encryption code. Using the default value of the encryption code (000000) will not affect the data security reliability. If the customer desires to change the code, lead the customer to follow the steps below. Press [Encryption Code]. Press [Back Space] to delete 000000. Enter the encryption code (6-digit alphanumeric characters) and then press [OK]. B Remind the customer not to forget the encryption code entered. 5. Press [OK]. Hard disk formatting begins. 6. When formatting finishes, follow the onscreen instructions to turn the Main Power Switch off and on again. 7. After the opening screen is displayed, confirm that a hard disk icon ( shown in the lower right corner of the screen.(See Illustration B.) ) is 8. Keep the used USB Key in the USB Key Box on the back side of the left-center cover that is attached to the back side of the machine. (See Illustration C.) Français Español Pièces fournies Piezas suministradas Clé USB ............................................................................................................. 1 Llave USB .......................................................................................................... 1 Precauciones antes de la activación Précautions avant l’activation ･ L’activation du kit de sécurité des données supprime toutes les données enregistrées sur le disque dur par le client. Avant l’activation, vérifier avec le client si les données peuvent être supprimées. ･ Veiller à mettre l'interrupteur principal de l'appareil hors tension. ･ Al activar el kit de seguridad, se eliminarán todos los datos que el cliente tenga almacenados en el disco duro. Antes de iniciar la activación, pida al cliente que confirme que los datos se pueden eliminar. ･ Asegúrese de que el interruptor principal esté apagado. Procedimiento de activación Procédure d’activation 1. Insérer la clé USB dans l'emplacement de mémoire USB de l'appareil et mettre l'interrupteur principal sous tension. (voir illustration A.) 2. Lorsque l'écran d'accueil s'ouvre, le message L'installation du Kit de sécurité va commencer. s'affiche. Appuyer sur [OK]. 3. Suivre les instructions à l'écran pour retirer la clé USB et mettre l'interrupteur principal hors tension. 4. Mettre l'interrupteur principal sous tension. L'écran de saisie du code de cryptage s'affiche. Demander au client de changer le code de cryptage. L'utilisation de la valeur par défaut du code de cryptage (000000) n'affecte pas la fiabilité de la sécurité des données. Si le client désire changer le code, prier le client d'effectuer les opérations suivantes. Appuyer sur [Code de cryptage]. Appuyer sur [Retour arrière] pour effacer 000000. Entrer le code de cryptage (caractères alphanumériques de 6 chiffres), puis appuyer sur [OK]. 1. Inserte la llave USB en la ranura de memoria USB de la máquina y encienda el interruptor principal. (Consulte la ilustración A.) 2. Después de la pantalla inicial, aparecerá el mensaje Comenzará instalación de kit de seguridad. Pulse [OK]. 3. Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla para retirar la llave USB y apague el interruptor principal. 4. Encienda el interruptor principal. Aparecerá la pantalla de introducción del código de cifrado. Pida al cliente que cambie el código de cifrado. Si usa el valor predeterminado del código de cifrado (000000), la fiabilidad de la seguridad de los datos no se verá afectada. Si el cliente desea cambiar el código, avise al cliente que debe seguir los pasos a continuación. Pulse [Encriptación Código]. Pulse [Retroceso] para borrar 000000. Introduzca el código de cifrado (6 caracteres alfanuméricos) y pulse [OK]. Advierta al cliente que no debe olvidar el código de cifrado introducido. Rappeler au client de bien se souvenir du code de cryptage entré. 5. Appuyer sur [OK]. Le formatage du disque dur commence. 5. Pulse [OK]. Se inicia el formateado del disco duro. 6. Lorsque le formatage est terminé, suivre les instructions à l'écran pour mettre l'interrupteur principal hors, puis sous tension. 6. Cuando termine el formateado, siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla para apagar y encender el interruptor principal. 7. Lorsque l'écran d'accueil s'ouvre, vérifier qu'une icône du disque dur ( s'affiche dans l'angle inférieur droit de l'écran. (voir illustration B.) ) 8. Laisser la clé USB utilisée dans l'emplacement correspondant situé au dos du couvercle central gauche à l'arrière de l'appareil. (voir illustration C.) 7. Después de que aparezca la pantalla inicial, compruebe que se muestra un icono de disco duro ( ) en el ángulo superior derecho de la pantalla. (Consulte la ilustración B.) 8. Conserve la llave USB utilizada en su receptáculo, situado en el lado posterior de la cubierta central izquierda instalada en la parte de atrás de la máquina. (Consulte la ilustración C.) Datensicherheits-Kit (C) – Installationsanleitung für MFP-Modelle Kit Sicurezza Dati (C) - Guida all'installazione per i modelli MFP Deutsch Data Security Kit (C) 複合機用設置手順書 ･ Durch Aktivieren des Datensicherheits-Kits werden alle Daten gelöscht, die vom Kunden auf der Festplatte gespeichert wurden. Fragen Sie vor der Aktivierung den Kunden, ob die Daten gelöscht werden können. ･ Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts ausgeschaltet ist. A Gelieferte Teile USB-Schlüssel ................................................................................................... 1 Vorsichtsmaßnahmen vor der Aktivierung C Aktivierungsverfahren 1. Stecken Sie den USB-Schlüssel in den USB-Speichersteckplatz des Geräts ein und schalten Sie den Netzschalter ein. (Siehe Abbildung A.) 2. Zuerst wird der Eröffnungsbildschirm angezeigt, dann wird die Nachricht Sicherheits-Kit wird installiert angezeigt. Drücken Sie [OK]. 3. Folgen Sie den Anweisungen, die auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt werden, um den USB-Schlüssel zu entfernen, und schalten Sie den Netzschalter aus. 4. Schalten Sie den Netzschalter ein. Das Dialogfeld zur Eingabe des Verschlüsselungscodes wird angezeigt. Bitten Sie den Kunden, den Verschlüsselungscode zu ändern. Die Verwendung des Standardwertes für den Verschlüsselungscode (000000) hat keinen Einfluss auf die Zuverlässigkeit der Datensicherheit. Falls der Kunde den Code ändern möchte, weisen Sie ihn an, die folgenden Schritte auszuführen. Drücken Sie [Verschlüssel.- code]. B Drücken Sie [Rücktaste], um 000000 zu löschen. Geben Sie den Verschlüsselungscode (6-stellige alphanumerische Zeichenfolge) ein, und drücken Sie [OK]. Erinnern Sie den Kunden daran, dass er den eingegebenen Verschlüsselungscode nicht vergessen darf. 5. Drücken Sie [OK]. Die Festplatte wird formatiert. 6. Nach der Formatierung werden Sie auf dem Bildschirm aufgefordert, den Netzschalter aus und wieder einzuschalten. 7. Wenn der Eröffnungsbildschirm angezeigt wird, stellen Sie sicher, dass ein Festplattensymbol ( (Siehe Abbildung B.) ) unten rechts auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt wird. 8. Bewahren Sie den USB-Schlüssel in der USB-Schlüsselpackung hinten in der linken mittleren Abdeckung auf, die sich hinten am Gerät befindet. (Siehe Abbildung C.) Italiano 日本語 Componenti forniti 付属部品 Chiave USB ....................................................................................................... 1 USB キー .................................................... 1 Precauzioni prima dell’attivazione ･ Attivando il Kit Sicurezza Dati tutti i dati memorizzati dal cliente sul disco rigido verranno eliminati. Prima di iniziare l’attivazione, verificare con il cliente che i dati possano essere eliminati. ･ Accertarsi che l'interruttore di alimentazione principale della macchina sia spento. Procedura di attivazione 1. Inserire la chiave USB nel relativo slot di memoria della macchina e accendere l'interruttore di alimentazione principale. (vedere Figura A.) 2. Una volta visualizzata la schermata iniziale, viene visualizzato il messaggio Verrà avviata l'installazione del Kit sicurezza. Premere [OK]. ･ ･ データセキュリティキットを導入すると、 お客様がハードディスク に保存したデータは全て削除される。 お客様に削除して問題ないこ とを確認してから、導入作業を行う。 機械の電源が切れていることを確認してから、手順を行う。 導入手順 1. 機械の USB メモリスロットに USB キーを挿入し、主電源スイッチを 入れる。 （イラスト A 参照） 2. オープニング画面が表示されたあと、 「セキュリティ機能を起動しま す。 」が表示されるので、 ［OK］を押す。 3. Seguire le istruzioni sullo schermo per la rimozione della chiave USB e spegnere l'interruttore di alimentazione principale. 4. Accendere l'interruttore di alimentazione principale. Viene visualizzata la schermata per l'immissione della chiave di crittografia. Chiedere al cliente di modificare la chiave di crittografia. L’utilizzo del valore predefinito della chiave di crittografia (000000) non influisce sull’affidabilità della sicurezza dati. Se il cliente desidera modificare la chiave di crittografia, è necessario che esegua i passi descritti qui in basso. Premere [Chiave di crittografia] Premere [Backspace] per eliminare 000000. Immettere la chiave di crittografia (6 caratteri alfanumerici) e poi premere [OK]. Ricordare al cliente di non dimenticare la chiave di crittografia immessa. 3. 画面の指示にしたがって、USB キーを抜き、 主電源スイッチを切る。 4. 主電源スイッチを入れる。暗号化コードを入力する画面が表示され る。 暗号化コードは工場出荷時 (000000) のまま運用してもセキュリ ティ上問題ない。 お客様が変更を希望された場合は、以下の手順で変 更してもらう。 ［暗号化コード］を押す。 ［バックスペース］を押して、 「000000」を消してから、暗号化コード （英数字 6 文字）を入力して、 ［OK］を押す。 お客様に、 暗号化コードを忘れないよう注意を促すこと。 5. Premere [OK]. La formattazione del disco rigido ha inizio. 5.［OK］を押す。ハードディスクのフォーマットが開始される。 6. Al termine della formattazione, seguire le istruzioni sullo schermo per spegnere e riaccendere l'interruttore di alimentazione principale. 7. Una volta aperta la schermata iniziale, verificare che un'icona del disco rigido ( sia visualizzata nell'angolo inferiore destro dello schermo. (vedere Figura B.) 導入前の注意事項について ) 8. Conservare la chiave USB nell'apposito scomparto situato sul retro della copertura centrale sinistra, fissata alla parte posteriore della macchina. (vedere Figura C.) 6. フォーマットが終了したら、画面の指示にしたがって、 主電源スイッ チを切る。 7. 主電源スイッチを入れる。オープニング画面が表示されたあと、画面 右下 （イラスト B 参照）にハードディスクアイコン（ ）が表示され ているか確認する。 8. 使用後の USB キーは、本体後側のカバー（イラスト C 参照） 裏側の USB キーBOX に収納する。 303KP56710 Rev.1.0 2006.4 ">
/
Download
Just a friendly reminder. You can view the document right here. But most importantly, our AI has already read it. It can explain complex things in simple terms, answer your questions in any language, and help you quickly navigate even the longest or most compilcated documents.
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Desktop copiers
Indirect electrostatic system
Automatic feed
Duplex copying
Network connectivity
Resolution: 600 x 600 dpi
Frequently asked questions
The maximum paper size is A3/Ledger.
The copy speed is 30 ppm for the CD 1230, 40 ppm for the CD 1240, and 50 ppm for the CD 1250.
The resolution is 600 x 600 dpi.
The paper feed options include a 500-sheet cassette, a 200-sheet manual feed tray, and optional paper feeders.
The connectivity options include parallel, USB, and network.
User questions
